PCS-915IC_X_Centralized_Busbar_Protection_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X_R2.13.pdf

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay Instruction Manual

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Preface

Preface 1.1 Introduction This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient. Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully. This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

1.2 Health and Safety The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition. When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated. Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who: 

Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected;



Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;



Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices;



Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

1.3 Instructions and Warnings The following indicators and standard definitions are used: PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

i Date: 2015-07-13

Preface

DANGER! means that death, severe personal injury and considerable equipment damage will occur if safety precautions are disregarded. WARNING! means that death, severe personal and considerable equipment damage could occur if safety precautions are disregarded. CAUTION! means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety precautions are disregarded. NOTICE! is particularly applies to damage to device and to resulting damage of the protected equipment.

DANGER! NEVER allow a open current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this device while the primary system is live. Open CT circuit will produce a dangerously high voltage that cause death. WARNING! ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. This personnel MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from improper behavior. WARNING! Do NOT touch the exposed terminals of this device while the power supply is on. The generated high voltage causes death, injury, and device damage. WARNING! Thirty seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. CAUTION!  Earthing Securely earthed the earthing terminal of the device.  Operating environment ONLY use the device within the range of ambient environment and in an environment free of abnormal vibration. ii

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay Date: 2015-07-13

Preface

 Ratings Check the input ratings BEFORE applying AC voltage/current and power supply to the device.  Printed circuit board Do NOT attach or remove printed circuit board if the device is powered on.  External circuit Check the supply voltage used when connecting the device output contacts to external circuits, in order to prevent overheating.  Connection cable Carefully handle connection cables without applying excessive force. NOTICE! The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.

Copyright © 2015 NR. All rights reserved. We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized. The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated. We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice. NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

Tel: +86-25-87178888

Headquarters: 69, Suyuan Avenue, Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China

Fax: +86-25-87178999

Manufactory: 18, Xinfeng Road, Jiangning, Nanjing 211111, China

Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nrec.com

PN: ZL_PCS-915IC_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

Version: R2.13

iii Date: 2015-07-13

Preface

Documentation Structure The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relay’s use and application. All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:

1 Introduction Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.

2 Technical Data Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.

3 Operation Theory Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.

4 Supervision Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.

5 Measurement and Recording Introduce the management function (measurment and recording) of this relay.

6 Hardware Introduce the main function carried out by each plug-in module of this relay and providing the definition of pins of each plug-in module, typical wiring is provided.

7 Settings List settings including system settings, communication settings, label settings, logic links and etc., and some notes about the setting application.

8 Human Machine Interface Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the user how to use this relay through HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view through HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.

9 Configurable Function Introduce how to make function configuration, binary input configuration, binary output configuration and LED indicator configuration etc. through PCS-Explorer software.

10 Communication Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, IEC60970-5-103, IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details. iv


Preface

11 Installation Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.

12 Commissioning Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of this relay.

13 Maintenance A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.

14 Decommissioning and Disposal A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.

15 Manual Version History List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.

Typographic and Graphical Conventions Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously derived from the illustration. The following symbols are used in drawings:

& AND gate

≥1

OR gate

Comparator

Binary signal via opto-coupler

BI

SET

I>

Input signal from comparator with setting

EN

Input signal of logic setting for function enabling

SIG

Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler


v Date: 2015-07-13

Preface OTH

Input of other signal

XXX

Output signal

Timer t

Time (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)

t 10ms

2ms

[XXX]

0ms

Timer (delay pickup, settable)

0ms

[XXX]

Timer (delay dropoff, settable)

[XXX]

[XXX]

Timer (delay pickup, delay dropoff, settable)

Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay dropoff (2ms), non-settable]

IDMT

Timer (inverse-time characteristic)

---xxx is the symbol

Symbol Corresponding Relationship Basic

Example

A, B, C

L1, L2, L3

Ia, Ib, Ic, I0

IL1, IL2, IL3, IN

AN, BN, CN

L1N, L2N, L3N

Ua, Ub, Uc

VL1, VL2, VL3

ABC

L123

Uab, Ubc, Uca

VL12, VL23, VL31

U (voltage)

V

U0, U1, U2

VN, V1, V2

vi


1 Introduction

1 Introduction Table of Contents 1 Introduction ....................................................................................... 1-a 1.1 Application....................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Function ........................................................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Feature ............................................................................................................. 1-2 1.4 Abbreviation .................................................................................................... 1-4


1-a Date: 2013-12-13

1 Introduction


1-b Date: 2013-12-13

1 Introduction

1.1 Application PCS-915IC is a numerical busbar differential protection intended to be used for protecting and monitoring various busbar arrangement of various voltage levels. It is capable to protect up to 25 bays including bus coupler/section. PCS-915IC utilizes NR’s innovative hardware platform which supports both conventional CT/VT and electronic current and voltage transformer (ECVT). It is compliant to several communication protocols, such as IEC60870-5-103, IEC61850, DNP3.0 and Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP). The maximized functions are introduced in this manual, for a specific project, some functions maybe not configured or disabled according to user’s requirement. NOTICE! The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the corresponding label settings. In this instruction manual, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. For a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus coupler. For a bus section bay, “@BSz” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus section. For example, the tripping signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 can be described as “@Bay02.50/51G.Op_Trp”, if the label setting of bay 02 i.e. [Name_Bay02] is set as “Fdr01”, the displayed tripping signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 is [Fdr01.50/51G.Op_Trp]. If [Name_Bay02] is set as “BC1”, the displayed tripping signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 is [BC1.50/51G.Op_Trp]. Please refer to Section “Label Settings” in Chapter 7 for details.

1.2 Function PCS-915IC provides the following functions 1.

Protection function



Busbar differential protection (87B)





Steady-state percentage restraint differential protection



DPFC percentage restraint differential protection

Bus coupler protection 

Breaker failure protection (50BF)



Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)


1-1 Date: 2013-12-13

1 Introduction





Pole disagreement protection (62PD)



Switch-onto-fault protection (50SOTF)



Overcurrent protection (50/51)

Feeder protection 

Breaker failure protection (50BF)



Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)



Pole disagreement protection (62PD)



Overcurrent protection (50/51)

NOTICE! DPFC is the abbreviation of “deviation of power frequency component”. When a fault occurs in the power system, the fault current consists of three parts: the pre-fault power frequency components, the power frequency variables during the fault and the transient variables during the fault. DPFC is the power frequency variables during the fault. 2.

Auxiliary function



Dynamic busbar replica



CT circuit supervision



VT circuit supervision



Disconnector position alarm

1.3 Feature 1.

Protection and Control



Parallel calculation of double DSP system



Independent fault detector element



Accurate measurement which can prevent any undesired trip



Less than 20ms typical trip time for busbar differential protection



High sensitive percentage restraint differential protection



Matching to different CT ratios



A well proven adaptive weighted anti-saturation algorithm



Comprehensive event recorder



Language switchover—English+ selected language


1-2 Date: 2013-12-13

1 Introduction

2.

Four kinds of clock synchronization methods



Conventional







PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level



IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level



PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the optical coupler



PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the optical coupler

SAS 

SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network



SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network



Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol

Advanced 

IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588



IRIG-B (Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface



PPS (Fiber): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface



No clock syncronization

3.

Event recorder and disturbance recorder



1024 latest fault reports



1024 latest self-supervision reports



1024 latest status change of binary input reports



32 latest fault waveforms (The file format of disturbance recorder is compatible with the international COMTRADE file)

4.

Communication



Optional 2 RS-485 communication rear ports conform to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol



1 RS-485 communication rear ports for clock synchronization



Optional 2 or 4 Ethernet ports (depend on the chosen type of MON plug-in module) conform to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP



Optional 2 Ethernet ports via optic fiber (ST interface) conform to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP



Optional additional module that supports PRP.



GOOSE and SV communication function (optional NET-DSP plug-in module)


1-3 Date: 2013-12-13

1 Introduction

5.

User Interface



Friendly HMI interface with LCD and 9-button keypad on the front panel.



1 RS-232 rear port for printer



1 front multiplex RJ45 port for testing and setting



Language switchover—English+ selected language



Auxiliary software—PCS-Explorer

1.4 Abbreviation Symbol

Description

FD

Fault detector

BBx

Busbar No.x, x is the number of each busbar

BCy

Bus coupler No.y, y is the number of each bus coupler

BSz

Bus section No.z, z is the number of each bus section

feeder m

Feeder No.m, m is the number of each feeder

bay n

Bay No.n (includes each BC/BS and each feeder), n is the number of each bay

VCE

Voltage controlled element

BBP

Busbar differential protection

BFP

Breaker failure protection

BFI

Breaker failure initiation

DZP

Dead zone fault protection

PD

Pole disagreement protection

IDMT

Inverse Definite Minimum Time

SAS

Substation automatic system

RTU

Remote terminal unit

DPFC

Deviation of power frequency component

CT

Current transformer

VT

Voltage transformer

SV

Sampled value


1-4 Date: 2013-12-13

2 Technical Data

2 Technical Data Table of Contents 2 Technical Data ................................................................................... 2-a 2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current ................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage ................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.3 Power Supply ....................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.4 Binary Input .......................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.5 Binary Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Mechanical Specifications.............................................................................. 2-3 2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-3 2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-3 2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-3 2.4.2 Ethernet Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-4 2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ................................................................................................................. 2-4 2.4.4 Print Port .............................................................................................................................. 2-4 2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................. 2-5

2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-5 2.5.1 Environmental Tests............................................................................................................. 2-5 2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................. 2-5 2.5.3 Electrical Tests ..................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................. 2-5

2.6 Certifications ................................................................................................... 2-6 2.7 Protective Functions....................................................................................... 2-6 2.7.1 Busbar Differential Protection .............................................................................................. 2-7 2.7.2 Switch-onto-fault Protection................................................................................................. 2-7 2.7.3 Overcurrent Protection......................................................................................................... 2-7


2-a Date: 2013-12-13

2 Technical Data

2.7.4 Pole Disagreement Protection ............................................................................................. 2-7 2.7.5 Bus Coupler Breaker Failure Protection .............................................................................. 2-7 2.7.6 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection ...................................................................................... 2-7


2-b Date: 2013-12-13

2 Technical Data

2.1 Electrical Specifications 2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current Phase rotation

ABC

Nominal frequency (fn)

50Hz, 60Hz

Rated current (In)

1A

Linear to

0.05In~40In

5A

Thermal withstand -continuously

4In

-for 10s

30In

-for 1s

100In

-for half a cycle

250In

Burden

< 0.15VA/phase @In

Accuracy

±0.5%In

< 0.25VA/phase @In

2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage Phase rotation

ABC

Nominal frequency (fn)

50Hz, 60Hz

Rated voltage (Un)

100V~130V

Linear to

1V~170V

Thermal withstand -continuously

200V

-10s

260V

-1s

300V

Burden at rated

< 0.20VA/phase @Un

Accuracy

±0.5%Un

2.1.3 Power Supply Standard

IEC 60255-11:2008

Rated voltage

110Vdc/125Vdc/220Vdc/250Vdc

Permissible voltage range

88~300Vdc

Permissible AC ripple voltage

≤15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage

Burden Quiescent condition

<40W

Operating condition

<60W

2.1.4 Binary Input Rated voltage

24Vdc

48Vdc

Rated current drain

1.2mA

2.4mA

On value

16.8-28.8Vdc

33.6-57.6Vdc

Off value

<12Vdc

<24Vdc


2-1 Date: 2013-12-13

2 Technical Data Maximum permissible voltage

100Vdc

Withstand voltage

2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)

Response time for logic input

≤1ms

Rated voltage

110Vdc

125Vdc

220Vdc

250Vdc

Rated current drain

1.1mA

1.25mA

2.2mA

2.5mA

On value

77-132Vdc

87.5-150Vdc

154-264Vdc

175-300Vdc

Off value

<55Vdc

<62.5Vdc

<110Vdc

<125Vdc

Maximum permissible voltage

300Vdc

Withstand voltage

2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)

Response time for logic input

≤1ms

2.1.5 Binary Output 1.

Tripping/signaling contact

Output mode

Potential free contact

Maximal system voltage

380Vac, 250Vdc

Continuous carry

8A

Pickup time (Typical)

<8ms (3ms)

Dropoff time

<5ms 0.65A@48Vdc 0.35A@110Vdc

Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms)

0.30A@125Vdc 0.20A@220Vdc 0.15A@250Vdc 12A@3s

Short duration current

18A@1s [email protected] [email protected]

Durability (Loaded contact)

10000 operations

Number

Maximum 55

2.

Signaling contact

Output mode



Maximal system voltage

380Vac, 250Vdc

380Vac, 250Vdc

Continuous carry

8A

8A

Pickup time

<10ms

<10ms

Dropoff time

<6ms

<10ms

0.7A@48Vdc

1.00A@48Vdc

0.4A@110Vdc

0.50A@110Vdc

0.3A@125Vdc

0.40A@125Vdc

0.2A@220Vdc

0.25A@220Vdc

0.15A@250Vdc

0.20A@250Vdc

12A@3s

12A@3s

Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms)

Short duration current


2-2 Date: 2013-12-13

2 Technical Data 15A@1s

15A@1s

[email protected]

[email protected]

[email protected]

[email protected]

Durability (Loaded contact)

10000 operations

10000 operations

Number

Maximum 8

Maximum 3

2.2 Mechanical Specifications Mounting Way

Flush mounted

Housing color

Silver grey

Weight per device

Approx. 35kg (8U chassis) Approx. 10kg (4U extended chassis)

Housing material

Aluminum

Location of terminal

Rear panel of the device

Device structure

Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate

Protection class Standard

IEC 60225-1:2009

Front side

IP40

Other sides

IP30

Rear side, connection terminals

IP20

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range Standard

IEC 60225-1:2009

Operating temperature

-40°C to +70°C (Readability of display may be impaired below -20°C)

Transport and storage temperature range

-40°C to +70°C

Permissible humidity

5%-95%, without condensation

Pollution degree

Ⅱ

Altitude

<3000m

2.4 Communication Port 2.4.1 EIA-485 Port Baud rate

4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s

Protocol

IEC 60870-5-103:1997

Maximal capacity

32

Transmission distance

<500m

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

Twisted pair

Screened twisted pair cable


2-3 Date: 2013-12-13

2 Technical Data

2.4.2 Ethernet Port Connector type

RJ-45

Transmission rate

100Mbits/s

Transmission standard

100Base-TX


<100m

Protocol

IEC 60870-5-103:1997, DNP 3.0 or IEC 61850

Safety level


2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port 2.4.3.1 For Station Level Characteristic

Glass optical fiber

Connector type

ST

Fibre type

Multi mode


<2km

Wave length

1310nm

Transmission power

Min. -20.0dBm

Minimum receiving power

Min. -30.0dBm

Margin

Min +3.0dB

2.4.3.2 For Process Level Characteristic

Glass optical fiber

Connector type

LC

Fibre type

Multi mode


<2km

Wave length

1310nm

Transmission power

Min. -20.0dBm


Min. -30.0dBm

Margin

Min +3.0dB

2.4.3.3 For Synchronization Port Characteristic

Glass optical fiber

Connector type

ST

Fibre type

Multi mode

Wave length

820nm


Min. -25.0dBm

Margin

Min +3.0dB

2.4.4 Print Port Type

RS-232

Baud Rate

4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s

Printer type

EPSON® 300K printer

Safety level



2-4 Date: 2013-12-13

2 Technical Data

2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port Type

RS-485


<500m

Maximal capacity

32

Timing standard

PPS, IRIG-B

Safety level


2.5 Type Tests 2.5.1 Environmental Tests Dry cold test

IEC60068-2-1:2007

Dry heat test

IEC60068-2-2:2007

Damp heat test, cyclic

IEC60068-2-30:2005

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests Vibration

IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I

Shock and bump

IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I

2.5.3 Electrical Tests Standard

IEC 60255-27:2005

Dielectric tests

Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min

Standard

IEC 60255-5:2000

Impulse voltage tests

Test voltage 5kV

Overvoltage category

Ⅲ

Insulation

resistance

measurements

Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VDC

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility IEC 60255-22-1:2007 1MHz burst disturbance test

Common mode: class III 2.5kV Differential mode: class III 1.0kV IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV

Electrostatic discharge test

For contact discharge: 8kV For air discharge: 15kV IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III Frequency sweep Radiated amplitude-modulated

Radio frequency interference tests

10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz Spot frequency Radiated amplitude-modulated 10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz Radiated pulse-modulated


2-5 Date: 2013-12-13

2 Technical Data 10V/m (rms), f=900MHz IEC 60255-22-4:2008 Fast transient disturbance tests

Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns IEC 60255-22-5:2008

Surge immunity test

Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us Common mode: 4kV Differential mode: 2kV

Conducted

RF

Electromagnetic

Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-6:2001 Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150 kHz~80MHz

Power Frequency Magnetic Field

IEC 61000-4-8:2001

Immunity

class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s

Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity

IEC 61000-4-9:2001 class V, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m for 3s

Damped oscillatory magnetic field

IEC 61000-4-10:2001

immunity

class V, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m

Auxiliary power supply performance

IEC60255-11: 2008

- Voltage dips

Up to 500ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset

-Voltage short interruptions

100ms for interruption without rebooting

2.6 Certifications 

ISO9001:2008



ISO14001:2004



OHSAS18001:2007



ISO10012:2003



CMMI L5



EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999



Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1:2001

2.7 Protective Functions The meanings of symbols mentioned in the following sections are given here. In -- rated secondary current of CT Un -- rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT


2-6 Date: 2013-12-13

2 Technical Data

2.7.1 Busbar Differential Protection Current setting range

0.05In~20.00In

Tolerance of current setting

≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

Undervoltage setting range

0 ~Un

Residual voltage setting range

0 ~Un

Negative-sequence voltage setting range

0 ~Un

Accuracy of voltage setting

≤2.5% of setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater

2.7.2 Switch-onto-fault Protection Current setting range

0.05In~20.00In



2.7.3 Overcurrent Protection Current setting range

0.05In~20.00In



Time setting range

0.00~10.00s

Tolerance of time setting

≤1%xSetting + 40ms

2.7.4 Pole Disagreement Protection Residual current setting range

0.05In~20.00In

Negative-sequence current setting range

0.05In~20.00In



Time setting range

0.00~10.00s



2.7.5 Bus Coupler Breaker Failure Protection Current setting range

0.05In~20.00In



Time setting range

0.00~10.00s



2.7.6 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection Phase current setting range

0.05In~20.00In

Residual current setting range

0.05In~20.00In

Negative-sequence current setting range

0.05In~20.00In



Time setting range

0.00~10.00s




2-7 Date: 2013-12-13

2 Technical Data Undervoltage setting range

0 ~Un

Zero-sequence voltage setting range

0 ~Un

Negative sequence voltage setting range

0 ~Un

Accuracy of voltage setting

≤2.5% of setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater


2-8 Date: 2013-12-13

3 Operation Theory

3 Operation Theory Table of Contents 3 Operation Theory .............................................................................. 3-a 3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Supported Busbar Arrangements .................................................................. 3-1 3.3 Market Ordering Table (MOT) Configuration ................................................. 3-7 3.4 Function Configuration ................................................................................ 3-10 3.5 Busbar Differential Protection ..................................................................... 3-13 3.5.1 Fault Detector (FD) Element.............................................................................................. 3-14 3.5.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-15 3.5.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-22 3.5.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-22 3.5.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-25 3.5.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-27

3.6 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection ............................................................. 3-30 3.6.1 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-30 3.6.2 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-32 3.6.3 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-32 3.6.4 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-33 3.6.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-33

3.7 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection (DZP) .................................................. 3-34 3.7.1 Fault Detector Element ...................................................................................................... 3-34 3.7.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-34 3.7.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-35 3.7.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-35 3.7.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-36 3.7.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-37

3-a


3 Operation Theory

3.8 BC/BS Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) Protection ............................................... 3-38 3.8.1 Fault Detector Element ...................................................................................................... 3-38 3.8.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-38 3.8.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-39 3.8.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-39 3.8.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-40 3.8.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-41

3.9 Overcurrent (OC) Protection ........................................................................ 3-42 3.9.1 Fault Detector Element ...................................................................................................... 3-42 3.9.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-43 3.9.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-44 3.9.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-44 3.9.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-46 3.9.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-46

3.10 Pole Disagreement (PD) Protection ........................................................... 3-51 3.10.1 Fault Detector Element .................................................................................................... 3-51 3.10.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-51 3.10.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-51 3.10.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-51 3.10.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-52 3.10.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-53

3.11 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) ................................................... 3-54 3.11.1 Fault Detector Element .................................................................................................... 3-54 3.11.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-55 3.11.3 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 3-56 3.11.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................. 3-56 3.11.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-57 3.11.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-58

3.12 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) .................................................. 3-59 3.12.1 Fault Detector Element .................................................................................................... 3-59 3-b


3 Operation Theory

3.12.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-59 3.12.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-62 3.12.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-63 3.12.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-64 3.12.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-65

3.13 CT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................... 3-68 3.13.1 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-68 3.13.2 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-71 3.13.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-71 3.13.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-76

3.14 VT Circuit Supervision ................................................................................ 3-77 3.14.1 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-77 3.14.2 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-78 3.14.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-78 3.14.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-79

3.15 Position of Disconnector and Circuit Breaker .......................................... 3-79 3.15.1 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-79 3.15.2 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-81 3.15.3 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-84 3.15.4 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-86

3.16 BC/BS Breaker Substitution and Bypass Breaker Substitution.............. 3-86 3.16.1 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-87 3.16.2 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-90

3.17 GOOSE and SV Function ............................................................................ 3-90 3.17.1 The Effect of Data Abnormality ........................................................................................ 3-91 3.17.2 Out of Service of a Bay .................................................................................................... 3-91 3.17.3 Maintenance Binary Input ................................................................................................ 3-92 3.17.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-92 3.17.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-93

3-c


3 Operation Theory

List of Figures Figure 3.2-1 Single BB ................................................................................................................ 3-1 Figure 3.2-2 Single BB with one BS (single CT)....................................................................... 3-2 Figure 3.2-3 Single BB with one BS (dual CTs) ........................................................................ 3-2 Figure 3.2-4 Single BB with two BS (single CT) ....................................................................... 3-3 Figure 3.2-5 Single BB with two BS (dual CTs) ........................................................................ 3-3 Figure 3.2-6 Double BB with one BC (single CT) ..................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3.2-7 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) ...................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3.2-8 Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT) ............................ 3-5 Figure 3.2-9 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT).............................. 3-6 Figure 3.2-10 Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT) .......................... 3-7 Figure 3.2-11 Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs) ............................. 3-7 Figure 3.5-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars with one BC (single CT) arrangement ... 3-14 Figure 3.5-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential element ................................................................................................................................ 3-16 Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of DPFC percentage restraint differential element 3-18 Figure 3.5-4 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault ............................................. 3-21 Figure 3.5-5 Logic of busbar differential protection .............................................................. 3-23 Figure 3.5-6 Logic diagram of voltage controlled element ................................................... 3-25 Figure 3.6-1 Logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection....................................................... 3-33 Figure 3.7-1 Logic of feeder dead zone fault protection ....................................................... 3-36 Figure 3.8-1 Logic of SOTF protection .................................................................................... 3-40 Figure 3.9-1 Logic of overcurrent protection ......................................................................... 3-45 Figure 3.10-1 Logic of pole disagreement protection ........................................................... 3-52 Figure 3.11-1 The logic scheme of BFI of BS ......................................................................... 3-55 Figure 3.11-2 Logic of BC/BS BFP ........................................................................................... 3-56 Figure 3.11-3 Logic of BS BFP (BS is at the edge of the protected zone) .......................... 3-57 Figure 3.12-1 Logic of feeder BFP ........................................................................................... 3-63 Figure 3.13-1 Logic of CT circuit failure.................................................................................. 3-71

3-d


3 Operation Theory

Figure 3.13-2 Logic of BBx differential current low value alarm .......................................... 3-72 Figure 3.13-3 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available) .............................................................................................................................................. 3-72 Figure 3.13-4 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available) .............................................................................................................................................. 3-73 Figure 3.13-5 Logic of CT circuit abnormality ........................................................................ 3-74 Figure 3.13-6 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available) ............................................................................................................................. 3-75 Figure 3.13-7 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available) ............................................................................................................................. 3-76 Figure 3.14-1 Logic of VT circuit failure .................................................................................. 3-78 Figure 3.15-1 Logic of inter-connection mode alarm ............................................................ 3-81 Figure 3.15-2 Logic of disconnector position alarm ............................................................. 3-82 Figure 3.15-3 Logic of automatic correction of disconnector position ............................... 3-83 Figure 3.15-4 Logic of dual-position alarm............................................................................. 3-84 Figure 3.16-1 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB2 ....................................................... 3-88 Figure 3.16-2 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB1 ....................................................... 3-88 Figure 3.16-3 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the inside of the transfer bus disconnector) ......................................................................... 3-89 Figure 3.16-4 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the outside of the transfer bus disconnector)....................................................................... 3-90

List of Tables Table 3.3-1 MOT configuration table in PCS-Explorer software ............................................. 3-8 Table 3.3-2 Contents of the option “Software Version”........................................................... 3-9 Table 3.4-1 Function configuration table in PCS-Explorer software.................................... 3-10 Table 3.5-1 Restraint coefficients of DPFC BBP .................................................................... 3-18 Table 3.5-2 Input signals of busbar differential protection ................................................... 3-25 Table 3.5-3 Output signals of busbar differential protection ................................................ 3-26 Table 3.5-4 Busbar differential protection settings ............................................................... 3-27 Table 3.5-5 Function links of busbar differential protection................................................. 3-30 Table 3.6-1 Input signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection ............................................ 3-33

3-e


3 Operation Theory

Table 3.6-2 Output signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection ......................................... 3-33 Table 3.6-3 BC dead zone fault protection settings ............................................................... 3-34 Table 3.7-1 Input signals of feeder dead zone fault protection ............................................ 3-36 Table 3.7-2 Output signals of feeder dead zone fault protection ......................................... 3-37 Table 3.7-3 Feeder dead zone fault protection settings ........................................................ 3-37 Table 3.7-4 Function links of feeder dead zone fault protection .......................................... 3-38 Table 3.8-1 Input signals of BC/BS SOTF protection............................................................. 3-40 Table 3.8-2 Output signals of BC/BS SOTF protection ......................................................... 3-41 Table 3.8-3 Switch-onto-fault protection settings .................................................................. 3-41 Table 3.8-4 Function links of BC/BS SOTF protection .......................................................... 3-42 Table 3.9-1 Input signals of overcurrent protection .............................................................. 3-46 Table 3.9-2 Output signals of overcurrent protection ........................................................... 3-46 Table 3.9-3 Overcurrent protection settings........................................................................... 3-46 Table 3.9-4 Function links of overcurrent protection ............................................................ 3-50 Table 3.10-1 Input signals of pole disagreement protection ................................................ 3-52 Table 3.10-2 Output signals of pole disagreement protection ............................................. 3-53 Table 3.10-3 PD protection settings ........................................................................................ 3-53 Table 3.10-4 Function links of pole disagreement protection .............................................. 3-54 Table 3.11-1 Input signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection ........................................... 3-57 Table 3.11-2 Output signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection ........................................ 3-58 Table 3.11-3 BC/BS breaker failure protection settings ........................................................ 3-58 Table 3.12-1 Input signals of feeder breaker failure protection............................................ 3-64 Table 3.12-2 Output signals of feeder breaker failure protection ........................................ 3-65 Table 3.12-3 Feeder breaker failure protection settings ....................................................... 3-65 Table 3.12-4 Function links of feeder breaker failure protection ......................................... 3-68 Table 3.13-1 Output signal of CT circuit supervision ............................................................ 3-76 Table 3.14-1 Output signal of VT circuit supervision ............................................................ 3-79 Table 3.15-1 Position status of disconnector ......................................................................... 3-80 Table 3.15-2 Position status of circuit breaker ....................................................................... 3-80 Table 3.15-3 Input signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker ....................... 3-84 3-f


3 Operation Theory

Table 3.15-4 Output signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker .................... 3-85 Table 3.15-5 Function link of circuit breaker .......................................................................... 3-86 Table 3.16-1 Input signal of breaker substitution .................................................................. 3-90 Table 3.16-2 Output signal of breaker substitution ............................................................... 3-90 Table 3.17-1 Output signal of GOOSE and SV function ........................................................ 3-92 Table 3.17-2 Function link ......................................................................................................... 3-93 Table 3.17-3 GOOSE sending link ............................................................................................ 3-93

3-g


3 Operation Theory

3.1 Overview PCS-915 can provide busbar differential protection (BBP), bus coupler/section protection (includes overcurrent protection, switch-onto-fault protection, pole disagreement protection, dead zone fault protection and breaker failure protection), feeder protection (includes overcurrent protection, pole disagreement protection, dead zone fault protection and breaker failure protection), CT circuit supervision and VT circuit supervision. For a specific project, some functions maybe not configured or disabled according to user’s requirement. The device has 2 plug-in modules (protection DSP module and fault detector DSP module) to perform calculation. The protection DSP module is responsible for calculation of protection elements, and fault detector DSP module is responsible for calculation of fault detectors. Any fault detector on fault detector DSP module picks up to provide positive supply of output relays. The relays will trip only if the fault detector and the corresponding protection element operate simultaneously. On the premise of 24 samples per cycle, all data measurement, calculation and logic discrimination can be processed within one sampling period. The event recording and protection logic calculation are completed simultaneously.

3.2 Supported Busbar Arrangements The following figures show the applications of PCS-915 for several typical busbar arrangements. BB: busbar; BC: bus coupler; BS: bus section.

Panel A PCS-915

*

*

*

……

*

*

*

VT1

BB1

Figure 3.2-1 Single BB

3-1


3 Operation Theory

Panel A

*

BS1

……

……

VT1

*

*

*

*

PCS-915

VT2

BB1

BB2

Figure 3.2-2 Single BB with one BS (single CT)

Panel A

……

CT2

BS1

……

*

*

VT1

*

*

*

*

PCS-915

VT2

CT1

BB1

BB2

Figure 3.2-3 Single BB with one BS (dual CTs)

3-2


3 Operation Theory

Panel A PCS-915

*

*

*

*

……

……

VT1

VT2

VT3

*

* BS2

BS1 BB1

BB2

BB3

Figure 3.2-4 Single BB with two BS (single CT)

Panel A PCS-915

*

*

*

*

……

……

VT1

VT2 * CT2

* BS1

BB1

CT1

VT3 *

* CT2

BS2 CT1

BB2

BB3

Figure 3.2-5 Single BB with two BS (dual CTs)

3-3


3 Operation Theory

Panel A PCS-915

*

*

……

*

*

VT1

BB1

* VT2

BC1

BB2

Figure 3.2-6 Double BB with one BC (single CT)

Panel A PCS-915

*

*

……

*

*

VT1

*

CT2

BB1 VT2

BC1 *

CT1

BB2

Figure 3.2-7 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs)

3-4


3 Operation Theory

Panel A PCS-915-A

Panel B PCS-915-B

*

……

*

*

*

* BS1

VT1

…… * VT1

BB1

BB1

*

* BC1

VT2 BC2

VT2

BB2

BB2

*

*

BS2

Figure 3.2-8 Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT)

3-5


3 Operation Theory

Panel A PCS-915-A

Panel B PCS-915-B

*

……

*

*

*

* BS1

VT1

…… * VT1

BB1

BB1 *

CT2

CT2 *

BC1 * CT1

VT2 BC2

VT2

BB2

BB2

*

*

BS2

CT1 *

Figure 3.2-9 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT)

3-6


3 Operation Theory

Panel A PCS-915

*

*

*

……

VT1

……

VT3

* BS1 *

BB1

BB3 VT2

BC1

*

BC2

BB2

Figure 3.2-10 Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT)

Panel A PCS-915

* VT1

*

*

……

……

VT3

* BS1 BB1 *

BB3

CT2

CT2

VT2

BC1 *

*

BC2

CT1

CT1

BB2

*

Figure 3.2-11 Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs)

3.3 Market Ordering Table (MOT) Configuration PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customer’s demand on functions of UAPC platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. Please refer to Chapter 9 for detailed configuration method about PCS-Explorer software. MOT is provided for users to order the device. According to the selected series number of MOT, the applied busbar arrangement, some software and hardware related function can be configured via the PCS-Explorer software (Please refer to Chapter 9 for detailed configuration method).

3-7


3 Operation Theory Table 3.3-1 MOT configuration table in PCS-Explorer software Application

Remark

A: Single BB, 1½ Breakers B: Single BB with one BS (single CT) C: Single BB with one BS (dual CTs) D: Single BB with two BS (single CT) E: Single BB with two BS (dual CTs)

BB: busbar;

F: Double BB with one BC (single CT)

BC: bus coupler;

G: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs)

BS: bus section.

H: Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT) I: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT) J: Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT) K: Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs) The option is reserved for other busbar L: Other

arrangement, further modifications for the program are required

Software Version A: Standard 1

Please refer to Table 3.3-2 for concrete

B: Standard 2

contents

Language C: English + Chinese F: English + French R: English + Russian S: English + Spanish Protocol A: IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS & GOOSE) B: IEC 60870-5-103 (Ethernet, Serial port) C: DNP 3.0 (Ethernet) Number of Terminals A: 1~16 (use 8U device)

B: 17~25 (use 8U+4U device)

Only a 8U chassis

Each

is available

(double CTs are

A

available) will take

4U

extended

chassis is added

BC/BS

up two terminals

Dual-position Binary Inputs (BI) X: Not required A: Dual-position BI for disconnector B: Dual-position BI for circuit breaker C: Dual-position BI for disconnector and circuit breaker Voltage Concerned Functions A: With voltage concerned functions B: Without voltage concerned functions Communication Ports&Time Synchronization Mode

3-8


3 Operation Theory A: 3 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x RS-485 + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer)

The MON plug in module is NR1101F module

B: 4 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer)

The MON plug in module is NR1102M module

C: 2 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x 100Base-FX (ST-Connector) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer)

The MON plug in module is NR1102N module

AC Input A: CT 1A B: CT 5A Power Supply for Device A: 110~250Vdc

1)

“Voltage Concerned Functions”

If “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected, all the voltage related functions will quit (DPFC voltage FD element and VT circuit supervision will not function, busbar differential protection and breaker failure protection will not controlled by respective voltage controlled element), and all settings and information related to voltage will be hidden. If “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions”, voltage related settings and information can be displayed, but all the voltage related function will be controlled by the device setting [En_Volt_BB] (refer to Section 7.1). If [En_Volt_BB] is set as “0”, all the voltage related functions will be disabled (DPFC voltage FD element and VT circuit supervision will not function, busbar differential protection and breaker failure protection will not controlled by respective voltage controlled element); if [En_Volt_BB] is set as “1”, DPFC voltage FD element and VT circuit supervision are enabled, voltage controlled element of busbar differential protection and breaker failure protection will be controlled by respective logic setting ([87B.VCE.En] and [50BF.VCE.En]). 2)

“Dual-position Binary Inputs (BI)”

In this option, if dual-position BI for disconnector is enabled, the device will get both normally closed auxiliary contact and normally open auxiliary contact of a disconnector to indicate the position of the disconnector. If dual-position BI for disconnector is disabled, the device will only get normally open auxiliary contact of a disconnector to indicate the position of the disconnector. If dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled, the device will get both normally closed auxiliary contact and normally open auxiliary contact of a breaker to indicate the position of the breaker. If dual-position BI for circuit breaker is disabled, the device will only get normally closed auxiliary contact of a breaker to indicate the position of the breaker. The concrete contents about the two options of “Software Version” are listed in following table. Table 3.3-2 Contents of the option “Software Version” Function

Standard 1

Standard 2

Busbar differential protection

√

√

BC/BS dead zone fault protection

√

√

3-9


3 Operation Theory BC/BS breaker failure protection

√

√

BC/BS pole disagreement protection

√

√

BC/BS overcurrent protection

√

√

BC/BS switch-onto-fault protection

√

√

Feeder breaker failure protection

√

√

Feeder dead zone fault protection

√

Feeder pole disagreement protection

√

Feeder overcurrent protection

√

Configurable I/O, LED and programmable logic

√

√

CT and VT circuit failure supervision (CTS, VTS)

√

√

Timing standard: PPS, PPM, IRIG-B, SNTP

√

√

NOTICE! If “Standard 1” is selected for “Software Version”, feeder dead zone fault protection, feeder pole disagreement protection and feeder overcurrent protection are disabled, and all the related settings and information are hidden.

3.4 Function Configuration The ancillary protection functions also can be configured via the PCS-Explorer software (Please refer to Chapter 9 for detailed configuration method). Table 3.4-1 Function configuration table in PCS-Explorer software Basic information configuration 1

All protective function

Enable/Disable

2

Phase-segregated breaker position

Enable/Disable

3

Phase-segregated binary input for initiating BFP

Enable/Disable

4

Enforced disconnector position

Enable/Disable

5

BC/BS breaker substitution

Enable/Disable

6 7

Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each bay

Enable/Disable Enable/Disable

Protective function configuration 8

Breaker failure protection re-tripping function

Enable/Disable

9

Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection

Enable/Disable

10

IDMT overcurrent characteristic

Enable/Disable DNP3.0

11

TCP1

Enable/Disable

12

TCP2

Enable/Disable

13

TCP3

Enable/Disable

14

TCP4

Enable/Disable

3-10


3 Operation Theory

1)

“All protective function”

If it is set as “Enable”, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are enabled. All the protective function will be controlled by [BI_En_Prot], [Link_Prot], their respective enabling binary input and function link. If [BI_En_Prot] is de-energized or [Link_Prot] is set as “0”, all the protective functions are disabled. If it is set as “Disable”, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are not configured. All the protective function will only be controlled by their respective enabling binary input and function link. Takes BBP as an example, if “All protective function” is set as “Enable”, BBP can be enabled only if [BI_En_Prot] and [87B.BI_En] are all energized and the function links [87B.Link] and [Link_Prot] are set as “1”. If any condition is not met, BBP is disabled. If “All protective function” is set as “Disable”, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are not configured, and all the protective functions will not be controlled by them. 2)

“Phase-segregated breaker position”

If it is set as “Enable”, phase-segregated breaker position binary input is configured, if it is set as “Disable”, three-phase breaker position binary input is configured. 3)

“Phase-segregated binary input for initiating BFP”

If it is set as “Enable”, phase-segregated tripping contact and three-phase tripping contact for initiating breaker failure protection are configured, if it is set as “Disable”, only three-phase tripping contact for initiating breaker failure protection is configured. 4)

“Enforced disconnector position”

If it is set as “Enable”, and the corresponding enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”, the disconnector position of bay n will be decided by function link(s) [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] (x=1, 2 …..), if [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] is set as “1”, BBx disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly, When [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”, if [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBn] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBm] are set as “1” at the same time (n≠m), the corresponding alarm signal [Alm_IntLinkx] will be issued. If the enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”, [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] (x=1, 2 …..) are all set as “0”, but current is detected in bay n, disconnector position alarm [@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued simultaneously. If it is set as “Disable”, the position status of disconnector is identified according to normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector. 5)

BC/BS breaker substitution

For the busbar system arrangement that BC/BS breaker can be used temporarily to substitute one of feeder breakers through transfer bus, it should be set as “Enable”, otherwise it should be set as “Disable”. 6)

Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay

3-11


3 Operation Theory

When it is set as “Enable”, the enabling binary inputs and function links of feeder dead zone fault protection, switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection are configured according to each bay. For each bay, disabling binary input is not configured. When it is set as “Disable”, there is only one enabling binary input and function link of feeder dead zone fault protection, switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection for all bays. Takes overcurrent protection as an example, if it is set as “Enable”, the enabling binary input and function link of overcurrent protection is [@Bayn.50/51.BI_En] and [@Bayn.50/51.Link] respectively (one for per bay); if it is set as “Disable”, the enabling binary input and function link of overcurrent protection is [50/51.BI_En] and [50/51.Link] respectively (one for all bays). 7)

Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each bay

When it is set as “Enable”, the logic setting of feeder dead zone fault protection, switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection are configured according to each bay. When it is set as “Disable”, there is only one logic setting of feeder dead zone fault protection, switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection for all bays. Takes overcurrent protection as an example, if it is set as “Enable”, the logic setting of overcurrent protection is [@Bayn.50/51P.En] (phase overcurrent protection) and [@Bayn.50/51G.En] (ground overcurrent protection) (one for per bay); if it is set as “Disable”, the logic setting of overcurrent protection is [50/51P.En] (phase overcurrent protection) and [50/51G.En] (one for all bays). 8)

“Breaker failure protection re-tripping function”

When it is set as “Enable”, breaker failure protection re-tripping function will be enabled, once BFP operates, it will operate to re-trip concerned breaker after the time delay of [50BF.t_ReTrp]. If it is set as “Disable”, breaker failure protection re-tripping function will be disabled and the time setting for BFP [50BF.t_ReTrp] will be hidden. 9)

“Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection”

When it is set as “Enable”, the binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection is enabled. Then if the releasing voltage controlled element binary input is energized and the corresponding logic setting [Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] is set as “1”, the voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection for the bay will be released. If the releasing voltage controlled element binary input is energized for over 10s, it will be invalid and an alarm signal will be issued. When it is set as “Disable”, the binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection is disabled. 10) “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” When “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” is set as “Enable”, there will be an option of IDMT characteristic for both BC/BS overcurrent protection and feeder overcurrent protection. When “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” is set as “Disable”, all settings related to IDMT characteristic will 3-12


3 Operation Theory

be hidden. 11) “TCPx” When it is set as “Enable”, network No.x DNP client is enabled, then the related DNP communication settings correspond to network No.x will be released. When it is set as “Disable”, network No.x DNP client is disabled, then the related DNP communication settings correspond to network No.x will be hidden. If DNP3.0 protocol is not adopted, “TCPx” (x=1, 2, 3 and 4) should be set as “disable”.

3.5 Busbar Differential Protection NOTICE! The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the corresponding label settings. In Section 3.5, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. For a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus coupler. For a bus section bay, “@BSz” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus section. The primary protection of PCS-915 is phase-segregated percentage restraint differential protection. The differential circuits include check zone differential circuit and discriminating zone differential circuits of each busbar zone. The check zone differential element is used to distinguish between internal and external fault of the overall busbar system, it measures the current from all the circuits connected to the busbar system except BC and BS (For the occasion that BS is at the edge of the protected zone, BS will be taken as an feeder bay, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure 3.2-9, the BS current will be included in check zone differential element). The discriminating zone differential elements are used to select faulty zone by measuring the current of all the circuits connected to individual zones of the busbar system separated by BC and BS. Figure 3.5-1 shows a primary power system of double busbars with one BC (single CT) arrangement, the two busbars are defined as busbar No.1 (BB1) and busbar No.2 (BB2) respectively. The polarity mark of feeder CT is on the busbar side, and the polarity mark of BC CT is on BB1 side. For usual busbar system arrangement, the polarity mark definition are shown in Figure 3.2-1 to Figure 3.2-11.

3-13


3 Operation Theory

Discriminative zone No.1

Discriminative zone No.2

Check zone

…… *

*

*

*

BB1

* BC1

BB2

Figure 3.5-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars with one BC (single CT) arrangement

NOTICE! The protective device ONLY identifies the physical position of busbar, ignoring the number of busbar, takes the busbar arrangement in Figure 3.5-1 as an example, if only one CT is available at BC1, the protective device will refer the busbar of which the polarity of BC1 CT is towards as BB1. Discriminative zone No.1 is defined as discriminative differential element of BB1. Discriminative zone No.2 is defined as discriminative differential element of BB2. 3.5.1 Fault Detector (FD) Element PCS-915 provides three independent FD elements for busbar differential protection, which are DPFC voltage FD element, DPFC current FD element and differential current FD element. If any of these three elements picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal from busbar differential protection. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the corresponding fault detector element drop off. 1.

DPFC voltage FD element

When DPFC voltage of any phase of any busbar is larger than the threshold, DPFC voltage FD element picks up, the operating criterion is: Δu>ΔUFloat+0.05Un

Equation 3.5-1

Where: Δu: Instantaneous value of phase-to-ground DPFC voltage ΔUFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually voltage changing 3-14


3 Operation Theory

0.05Un: Fixed threshold value, Un is the rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage. If “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) or the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “0” or VT circuit failure is detected, DPFC voltage FD element will quit automatically. 2.

DPFC current FD element

If DPFC check zone restraint current is larger than the threshold, DPFC current fault detector element will operate, the operating criterion is: Δsi>ΔSIFloat+0.5In

Equation 3.5-2

Where: Δsi: Instantaneous value of DPFC check zone restraint current of any phase (scalar sum of current change of all circuits/bays for check zone) ΔSIFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually current changing 0.5In: Fixed threshold value, In is the rated secondary current of reference CT. 3.

Differential current FD element

When any phase of the check zone differential current is larger than the setting, this element will operate. The operating criterion is:

ID> [87B.I_Pkp]

Equation 3.5-3

Where: ID: Differential phase current of check zone [87B.I_Pkp]: Current setting of busbar differential protection 3.5.2 Function Description 3.5.2.1 Percentage Restraint Differential Element The percentage restraint differential element includes steady-state percentage restraint differential element and DPFC percentage restraint differential element. 

Steady-state percentage restraint differential element m

The differential current: ID =

I j1

j

m

The restraint current: IR =

I j1

j

3-15


3 Operation Theory

The operating criterion is:

I D  [87B.I _ Pkp]  I D  KI R 

Equation 3.5-4

Where: K: Restraint coefficient of steady-state differential element Ij: The current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected [87B.I_Pkp]: Current setting of busbar differential protection The operation characteristic is shown as Figure 3.5-2.

ID

ID=IR

Operation region

ID=kIR [87B.I_Pkp]

IR

Figure 3.5-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential element

Take into consideration both the CT anti-saturation capability and the sensitivity of steady-state check zone differential element for a fault occurred in the weak source bus zone when the BC breaker is open, dual restraint coefficients [87B.SlopeH_CZ, 87B.SlopeL_CZ] and [87B.SlopeH_DZ, 87B.SlopeL_DZ] are adopted for steady-state check zone and discriminative zones respectively. When one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar steady-state percentage restraint differential protection will operate. 1.

Steady-state check zone differential element with high restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeH_CZ], 0.5 is recommended) operates and steady-state discriminative zone differential element with low restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeL_DZ], 0.5 is recommended) operates.

2.

Steady-state check zone differential element with low restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeL_CZ], 0.3 is recommended) operates and steady-state discriminative zone differential element with

3-16


3 Operation Theory

high restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeH_DZ], 0.6 is recommended) operates. 

DPFC percentage restraint differential element

The DPFC percentage restraint differential element is adopted to enhance the performance of busbar protection against high impedance fault and the influence of heavy loading condition. The busbar DPFC differential protection is formed by DPFC percentage restraint differential element and steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint coefficient 0.2. m

The DPFC differential current: ΔID =

 ΔI j1

j

m

The DPFC restraint current: ΔIR =

 ΔI j1

j

The operating criterion is:

ΔID  ΔIDFloat  I DP ickup  I D  0.2I R  ΔID  K / ΔIR 

Equation 3.5-5

Where: K': DPFC restraint coefficient ΔIj: DPFC current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected ΔIDFloat: Float threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current IDPickup: Fixed threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current, which derives from the setting of [87B.I_Pkp] The operation characteristic is shown as Figure 3.5-4.

3-17


3 Operation Theory ΔID

ΔID=ΔIR Operation region ΔID=k'ΔIR

[87B.I_Pkp]

ΔIR IRSet

Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of DPFC percentage restraint differential element

Similar to steady-state percentage restraint differential element, dual restraint coefficients are also introduced to DPFC differential element. The restraint coefficients are fixed at [0.65, 0.3] and [0.65, 0.5] for DPFC check zone and discriminating zones respectively. When the steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint coefficient of 0.2 operates, if one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar DPFC percentage restraint differential protection will operate. 1.

DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with high restraint coefficient (0.65) operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient (0.5) operates.

2.

DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient (0.3) operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with high restraint coefficient (0.65) operates.

Following table shows the restraint coefficients for DPFC differential element. Table 3.5-1 Restraint coefficients of DPFC BBP

PCS-915IC DPFC differential element

Check Zone High 0.65

Low 0.3

Discriminative Zone High

Low

0.65

0.5

3.5.2.2 Voltage Controlled Element of Busbar Differential Protection (VCE_BBP) Voltage controlled element is used as an auxiliary condition. The operating criteria are: UP ≤ [87B.VCE.U_Set]

Equation 3.5-6

3-18


3 Operation Theory

3U0 ≥ [87B.VCE.3U0_Set]

Equation 3.5-7

U2 ≥ [87B.VCE.U2_Set]

Equation 3.5-8

Where: UP: Phase voltage 3U0: Residual voltage (calculated internally) U2: Negative sequence voltage [87B.VCE.U_Set]: Phase voltage setting for blocking BBP [87B.VCE.3U0_Set]: Residual voltage setting for blocking BBP [87B.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BBP When the protective device is applied to an unearthed system, i.e. the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, the criteria of voltage control element will change. UPP ≤[87B.VCE.U_Set]

Equation 3.5-9

U2 ≥[87B.VCE.U2_Set]

Equation 3.5-10

Where: UPP: Phase-to-phase voltage U2: Negative sequence voltage [87B.VCE.U_Set]: Phase-to-phase voltage setting for blocking BBP [87B.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BBP VCE_BBP will be controlled by the logic setting [87B.VCE.En], if it is set as “0”, VCE_BBP will be disabled and busbar differential protection will not controlled by VCE_BBP If “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), VCE_BBP will quit and related settings will be hidden, busbar differential protection will not controlled by voltage element. If the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “0” (refer to Section 7.1), VCE_BBP is invalid no matter the logic setting [87B.VCE.En] is set as “1” or not, busbar differential protection will not controlled by voltage element. Only if “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “1” and the logic setting [87B.VCE.En] is set as “1”, VCE_BBP is enabled. If VCE_BBP (or VCE_BFP) of BBx operates for over 3s, an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VCE] will be 3-19


3 Operation Theory

issued. 3.5.2.3 Faulty Busbar Zone Discrimination The check zone differential element calculates the current from all circuits connected to the entire busbar system except BC and BS to distinguish between internal and external fault. The discriminating zone differential elements calculate the current of all the circuits connected to individual zones via replica image of disconnector position to determine faulty zone. When the operation criterion of check zone differential element (steady-state check zone differential element is supervised by CT saturation detector 2 and DPFC check zone differential element is supervised by CT saturation detector 1, to be described in the following section) and any discriminating zone differential element is fulfilled, voltage controlled element of BBP of any connected busbar is released, the busbar differential protection will operate to trip all bays connected to the faulty busbar. The protection has a feature of “inter-connection operation mode”, the feature will be effective automatically under the following conditions. 1. A binary input [BI_En_IntLinkx] (x=1, 2, ……) is energized, it should be energized when two bus zones are coupled together and unable to detach for a particular system operation condition. 2. On-load transfer condition (when two busbar disconnectors of one feeder are closed at the same time). Under the inter-connection operation mode, the discriminating zone differential elements measure the current signals are the same as that of check zone differential element. The coupled busbars will be tripped simultaneously when there is a fault. 3.5.2.4 Backup Busbar Differential Elements If only the check zone percentage restraint differential element (supervised by CT saturation detector 2) operates, two stages of backup protection with fixed time delay are applied to trip the corresponding circuit breakers (controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_Dly_Biased]). Stage 1 of backup protection will trip BC/BS (when voltage controlled element of any busbar connected with the BC/BS is released or voltage controlled element is disabled) and the feeders of which current is larger than 0.04*In and does not have disconnector position after 240ms. Stage 2 of backup protection will trip the feeders connected to the busbar of which voltage controlled element has been released (or voltage controlled element is disabled) and the feeders with current larger than 2*In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) after 480ms. 3.5.2.5 Detection of CT Saturation Two detectors are used to prevent unwanted tripping caused by severe CT saturation during external close up fault. If the differential current is determined to be caused by CT saturation, the device will block busbar differential protection to prevent mal-operation. 

CT saturation detector 1

When DPFC voltage or current FD element operates, the adaptive weighted algorithm for CT 3-20


3 Operation Theory

saturation detector will be activated. In case of busbar fault occurs, DPFC differential element will operate almost at the same time with DPFC voltage FD element or DPFC current FD element, whereas for external fault, DPFC differential element will not operate before CT saturation at the fault incipient stage, it will only operate after DPFC voltage element and DPFC current element in case CT is saturated. Adaptive weighted algorithm for CT saturation detector is derived from the difference of operating time among these DPFC elements. In coordination with DPFC differential element, it has performed excellently to distinguish between internal and external fault with CT saturation. 


Harmonic restraint element is used in CT saturation detector 2 by analyzing the waveforms of differential current harmonics. The detector enables the busbar differential element to remain stable for an external fault with CT saturation while to maintain fast tripping for the external fault evolved to internal fault on the same phase. The blocking signal of CT saturation detector 2 will only last for 500ms. After that the busbar differential element is released to operate for complicated fault conditions and minimized affected area. In practical cases, CT transient saturation will not be more than 500ms.

Figure 3.5-4 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault

Figure 3.5-4 shows the current waveforms recorded in dynamic simulation with heavy CT saturation during external phase-to-phase fault. Protection stability is well achieved in this extreme case. 3.5.2.6 External Block Signal PCS-915 provides a binary input [87B.BI_ExtBlk] to block BBP through external binary signal (controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_BI_ExtBlk]). If [87B.En_BI_ExtBlk] is set as “1”, BBP will be blocked if the binary input [87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized. However, if the binary input [87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized for over 1 second, PCS-915IC will issue an alarm 3-21


3 Operation Theory

[87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk] and the blocking for BBP is released. 3.5.2.7 Closing Binary Input If feeder dead zone fault protection is enabled, in order to prevent BBP from mal-operation when closing onto the fault, when breaker of a feeder is open, the feeder current is included in differential circuit instantaneously if the closing binary input of the feeder [@Bayn.BI_Cls] changes from “0” to “1”. However, if the binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10s, an alarm [@Bayn.Alm_Cls] will be issued. 3.5.3 Function Block Diagram 87B 87B.BI_ExtBlk 87B.BI_En 87B.BI_Blk Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx @Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx @Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx @Bayn.BI_52a @Bayn.BI_52b @Bayn.BI_A_52a @Bayn.BI_B_52a @Bayn.BI_C_52a @Bayn.BI_A_52b @Bayn.BI_B_52b @Bayn.BI_C_52b AlmH_CTS @BBx.AlmH_Diff @BCy.AlmH_CTS @BSz.AlmH_CTS @Bayn.BI_Cls

87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_DPFC 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_DPFC 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_DPFC 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_Biased 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_Biased 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_Biased 87B.Op_Trp@BCy 87B.Op_A_Trp@BCy 87B.Op_B_Trp@BCy 87B.Op_C_Trp@BCy 87B.Op_DPFC 87B.Op_Biased 87B.Op_Trp@BBx 87B.Op 87B.Op_Dly1_Biased 87B.Op_A_Dly1_Biased 87B.Op_B_Dly1_Biased 87B.Op_C_Dly1_Biased 87B.Op_Dly2_Biased 87B.Op_A_Dly2_Biased 87B.Op_B_Dly2_Biased 87B.Op_C_Dly2_Biased 87B.FD 87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk 87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased @BBx.Alm_VCE 87B.Alm_Off @Bayn.Alm_Cls

For a BS, Just use “BSz” to instead of “BCy” in the above function block diagram. 3.5.4 Logic BB1 logic is shown as follows as an example, logic of other bus zone(s) is(are) similar.

3-22


3 Operation Theory

SIG

Disconnector position abnormality

EN

[87B.En_DSAlm_Blk]

EN

[87B.En_BI_ExtBlk]

&

0

1s

≥1

& BI

[87B.BI_ExtBlk]

SIG

CT circuit failure

EN

[87B.En_CTS_Blk]

SIG

DPFC DIF

SIG

DPFC DIF 1

SIG

DPFC current FD element

&


&

≥1 SIG

DPFC voltage FD element

SIG

SP DIF (K=0.2)

SIG

SP DIF 1 (K=0.2)

SIG

HM REL 1

&

87B.Op_Trp@BB1_DPFC

&

87B.Op_Trp@BB1_Biased

&

≥1 500ms

0 &

SIG

SIG

SP DIF 1

&

HM REL ≥1 500ms

Diff_BB1

≥1

0 &

SIG

SP DIF

SIG

87B is enabled

SIG

Voltage_Rls_BBP 1

SIG

Voltage_Rls_BBP x

SIG

SP DIF x

&

& SIG

Voltage_Rls_BBP x & BBx is in service

SIG

Δsi>ΔSIFloat+0.5In

SIG

Δu>ΔUFloat+0.05Un

SET

ID>[87B.I_Pkp]

&

240ms

0

480ms

0

87B.Op_Trp@BC1

87B.Op_Dly1

87B.Op_Dly2

87B.FD

≥1

Figure 3.5-5 Logic of busbar differential protection

Where: Disconnector position abnormality: if current is detected in a bay but the bay has no disconnector positions for any busbars.

3-23


3 Operation Theory

DPFC current FD element: please refer to Section 3.5.1. DPFC voltage FD element: please refer to Section 3.5.1. DPFC DIF: DPFC percentage restraint differential element for check zone. DPFC DIF1: DPFC percentage restraint differential element for bus zone No.1. SP DIF: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for check zone. SP DIF 1: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for bus zone No.1. SP DIF x: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for any bus zone. HM REL: Harmonic release element for check zone. HM REL1: Harmonic release element for bus zone No.1. 87B is enabled: busbar differential protection is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input [87B.BI_En] is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [87B.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link [87B.Link] and logic setting [87B.En] are set as “1”). Voltage_Rls_BBP 1: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage controlled element of BBP of BB1 operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2 for details. Voltage_Rls_BBP x: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage controlled element of BBP of any busbar operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2. Voltage_Rls_BBP x & BBx is in service: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage controlled element of BBP of any energized busbar operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2. Diff_BB1: Differential element of BB1 (not controlled by voltage controlled element) operates. Δu>ΔUFloat+0.05Un， Δsi>ΔSIFloat+0.5In， ID> [87B.I_Pkp]: Please refer to Section 3.5.1. 87B.FD: Any FD element for busbar differential protection picks up. Different from BC, busbar differential protection operating to trip BS is not controlled by VCE_BBP.

3-24


3 Operation Theory SIG

BBx is in service

SIG

Ua<87B.VCE.U_Set

SIG

Ub<87B.VCE.U_Set

BBx is in service

&

3s

0

@BBx.Alm_VCE

VCE_BBP x

SIG

UC<87B.VCE.U_Set

SIG

3U0>87B.VCE.3U0_Set

SIG

U2>87B.VCE.U2_Set

SIG

Ua<50BF.VCE.U_Set

SIG

Ub<50BF.VCE.U_Set

≥1

≥1

SIG

UC<50BF.VCE.U_Set

SIG

3U0>50BF.VCE.3U0_Set

SIG

U2>50BF.VCE.U2_Set

SIG

50BF is enabled

≥1

VCE_BFP x

&

Figure 3.5-6 Logic diagram of voltage controlled element

Where: BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1. 50BF is enabled: Please refer to Section 3.12.4. VCE_BBP x: Voltage controlled element of busbar differential protection of BBx operates. VCE_BFP x: Voltage controlled element of breaker failure protection of BBx operates. @BBx.Alm_VCE: VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up for over 3s 3.5.5 I/O Signal Table 3.5-2 Input signals of busbar differential protection No.

Signal

Description

1

87B.BI_En

Binary input of enabling BBP

2

87B.BI_Blk

Binary input of disabling BBP

3

BI_En_IntLinkx

4

87B.BI_ExtBlk

External binary input of blocking BBP

5

AlmH_CTS

CT circuit failure

6

@BCy.AlmH_CTS

BCy CT circuit failure

7

@BSz.AlmH_CTS

BSz CT circuit failure

8

@BBx.AlmH_Diff

9

@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx

Normally open auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n

10

@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx

Normally closed auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n

11

@Bayn.BI_52a

Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n

12

@Bayn.BI_52b

Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n

Binary input indicating that two busbars are under the inter-connected operation mode

Differential current high value alarm signal of BBx, discriminating zone differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS] for over 5s.

3-25


3 Operation Theory Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay

13

@Bayn.BI_A_52a

14

@Bayn.BI_B_52a

15

@Bayn.BI_C_52a

16

@Bayn.BI_A_52b

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n

17

@Bayn.BI_B_52b

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n

18

@Bayn.BI_C_52b

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n

19

@Bayn.BI_Cls

Binary input of closing circuit breaker of bay n

n Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n

Table 3.5-3 Output signals of busbar differential protection No.

Signal

Description

1

87B.Op_Dly1_Biased

Stage 1 of backup protection operates

2

87B.Op_Dly2_Biased

Stage 2 of backup protection operates

3

87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased

Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx

4

87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC

DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx

5

87B.Op_A_Dly1_Biased

Phase-A stage 1 of backup protection operates

6

87B.Op_B_Dly1_Biased

Phase-B stage 1 of backup protection operates

7

87B.Op_C_Dly1_Biased

Phase-C stage 1 of backup protection operates

8


Phase-A stage 2 of backup protection operates

9


Phase-B stage 2 of backup protection operates

10


Phase-C stage 2 of backup protection operates

11

87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_Biased

12

87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_Biased

13

87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_Biased

14

87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_DPFC

Phase-A DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx

15

87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_DPFC

Phase-B DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx

16

87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_DPFC

Phase-C DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx

17

87B.Op_Trp@BCy

Busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy

18

87B.Op_Trp@BSz

Busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz

19

87B.Op_A_Trp@BCy

Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy

20

87B.Op_B_Trp@BCy

Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy

21

87B.Op_C_Trp@BCy

Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy

22

87B.Op_A_Trp@BSz

Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz

Phase-A steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx Phase-B steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx Phase-C steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx

3-26


3 Operation Theory 23

87B.Op_B_Trp@BSz

Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz

24

87B.Op_C_Trp@BSz

Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz

25

87B.Op_Biased

Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar

26

87B.Op_DPFC

DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar

27

87B.Op_Trp@BBx

28

87B.Op

29

87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk

30

87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased

31

@BBx.Alm_VCE

DPFC busbar differential protection or steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx DPFC busbar differential protection or steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar External binary input of blocking BBP is energized for over 1s Alarm signal indicating that differential current FD element picks up for over 10s VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up for over 3s Alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled. If the logic setting [87B.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once BBP is disabled (BBP can be

32

87B.Alm_Off

disabled by the corresponding enabling binary input, function link or enabling logic setting), the alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled will be issued

33

@Bayn.Alm_Cls

Closing binary input [BI_Cls_@Bayn] is energized for over 10s

3.5.6 Settings Busbar Protection Setting



Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBBP Settings Table 3.5-4 Busbar differential protection settings No.

Name

Range

Step

1

87B.I_Pkp

0.05In ~20.00In

0.01A

2

87B.SlopeH_CZ

0.50-0.80

0.01

Remark Pickup value of differential current High restraint coefficient for steady-state check zone, 0.5 is recommended, less than 0.3 is not recommended Low restraint coefficient for steady-state

3

87B.SlopeL_CZ

0.30-0.80

0.01

check zone, 0.3 is recommended, less than 0.3 is not recommended High restraint coefficient for steady-state

4

87B.SlopeH_DZ

0.50-0.80

0.01

discriminative zone, 0.6 is recommended, less than 0.3 is not recommended Low restraint coefficient for steady-state

5

87B.SlopeL_DZ

0.50-0.80

0.01

discriminative zone, 0.5 is recommended, less than 0.3 is not recommended

6

I_AlmH_CTS

0.05In ~20.00In

0.01A

Current setting of CT circuit failure

7

I_AlmL_CTS

0.05In ~20.00In

0.01A

Current setting of CT circuit abnormality 3-27



87B.VCE.U_Set

0~Un

0.01V

Under voltage setting of VCE for BBP

9

87B.VCE.3U0_Set

0~Un

0.01V

Residual voltage setting of VCE for BBP

10

87B.VCE.U2_Set

0~Un

0.01V

11

87B.En

0,1

1

Negative-sequence voltage setting of VCE for BBP 1: Enabling busbar differential protection 0: Disabling busbar differential protection 1: Alarm signal will be issued if BBP is

12

87B.En_Alm_Off

0,1

1

disabled 0: Alarm signal will not be issued if BBP is disabled 1: two stages of backup busbar differential

13

87B.En_Dly_Biased

0,1

1

protection is enabled 0: two stages of backup busbar differential protection is disabled 1: breaker failure protection is initiated if busbar differential protection operates to

14

87B.En_Init50BF

0,1

1

trip 0: breaker failure protection can not be initiated by busbar differential protection 1: BBP is controlled by the binary input [87B.BI_ExtBlk], once [87B.BI_ExtBlk] is

15

87B.En_BI_ExtBlk

0,1

1

energized, BBP will be blocked. 0: BBP will not be controlled by the binary input [87B.BI_ExtBlk] 1: the CT circuit failure alarm signal can be reset automatically after the CT circuit

16

En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS

0,1

1

returns to normal condition 0: the CT circuit failure alarm signal can not be reset automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition 1: the CT circuit abnormality alarm signal can be reset automatically after the CT

17

En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS

0,1

1

circuit returns to normal condition 0: the CT circuit abnormality alarm signal can not be reset automatically since the CT circuit returns to normal condition 1: If any disconnector position alarm is issued,

18

En_AutoRecov_DS

0,1

1

once

the

abnormality

of

disconnector position disappears, the alarm will be reset automatically. 0: If any disconnector position alarm is issued, the alarm can not be reset unless

3-28


3 Operation Theory energizing

the

disconnector

position

confirm binary input [BI_ConfirmDS] Enabling busbar differential protection being blocked by disconnector position abnormality. 1: if current is detected in a feeder but the feeder has no disconnector positions for 19

87B.En_DSAlm_Blk

0,1

1

any busbars, busbar differential protection will be blocked. 0: busbar differential protection will not be blocked for the disconnector position abnormality condition. “0” is recommended. If it is not configured for a project, its default value is “0”. 1: busbar differential protection is blocked if CT circuit fails

20

87B.En_CTS_Blk

0,1

1

0: busbar differential protection is not controlled by CT circuit failure If it is not configured for a project, its default value is “0”.

21

87B.VCE.En

0,1

1

1: BBP is controlled by VCE 0: BBP will not be controlled by VCE

Un: Rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT. 1.

[87B.I_Pkp]

It should ensure busbar differential protection sensitive enough under minimum fault level condition and should be larger than maximum load current of its outlets (in order to prevent BBP from mal-operation when CT secondary circuit fails). 2.

[I_AlmL_CTS]

This setting is applied to better identifying the abnormality of CT circuit of light load feeder and shunt of CT circuit, etc. It should be smaller than [I_AlmH_CTS] and can be set as 0.75*[I_AlmH_CTS]. 3.

[I_AlmH_CTS]

It should be larger than unbalance current in normal operation mode. The recommended value is 0.06In~0.1In. 4.

[87B.VCE.U_Set]

It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is a symmetric fault occurring in the busbar zone. The recommended value is 0.7Un (Un: Rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT). If the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, the setting should be set as phase-to-phase voltage. Please refer to Section “System Settings” in Chapter 7. 3-29


3 Operation Theory

5.

[87B.VCE.3U0_Set]

It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar zone and it should be larger than maximum residual voltage in normal operation mode. It is invalid if the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”. 6.

[87B.VCE.U2_Set]

It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar zone and it should be larger than the maximum negative sequence voltage in normal operation mode. 

Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links Table 3.5-5 Function links of busbar differential protection No.

Symbol

1

87B.Link

2

Link_IntLinkx

Remark 1: Enabling busbar differential protection 0: Disabling busbar differential protection 1: Two busbars are under inter-connected operation mode 0: Two busbars are not under inter-connected operation mode

For BBP, the relation is “AND” among the function link [87B.Link], the corresponding enabling binary input [87B.BI_En] and the corresponding logic setting [87B.En]. For [Link_IntLinkx], the relation is “OR” among the function link and the corresponding enabling binary input [BI_En_IntLinkx].

3.6 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection NOTICE! The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the corresponding label settings. In Section 3.6, for a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus coupler, for a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus section. 3.6.1 Function Description One CT or two CTs can be configured for BC/BS. BC/BS dead zone fault protection can operate under two conditions: BC/BS breaker is open or BC/BS breaker is closed. 3.6.1.1 One CT BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection For BC/BS that only one CT is available, there will be a blind spot for a fault occurs between BC/BS breaker and BC/BS CT, the fault can not be cleared after busbar on the breaker side is

3-30


3 Operation Theory

tripped. In order to clear the fault quickly, BC/BS dead zone fault protection is provided. 

Under the condition that BC/BS breaker is closed

After busbar differential protection sends the command to trip BC/BS, if the BC/BS breaker has been tripped but the BC/BS current is still detected, then after a time delay of [BC.50DZ.t_Op], the BC/BS dead zone fault protection will operate to issue a signal and the BC/BS current will be excluded from discriminating zone percentage restraint differential elements of the two connected busbars. 

Under the condition that BC/BS breaker is open

If the two connected busbars are in service and BC/BS breaker is open, in order to prevent both busbars from tripping for an dead zone fault, the BC/BS current will be excluded from discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element of the connected two busbars, busbar differential protection will operate to trip the busbar directly connected to the CT to clear the dead zone fault. 3.6.1.2 Two CTs BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection For BC/BS that double CTs are available, if BC/BS breaker is closed, there is no blind spot for a internal fault, so BC/BS dead zone fault protection will not function. If BC/BS breaker is open, BC/BS dead zone fault protection will function as same as that of one CT BC/BS under the condition that BC/BS is open. 3.6.1.3 Special Situation If BS current can affect the check zone differential current (such as BS in Figure 3.2-9, the BS current will be calculated in check zone and discriminating zone differential current), dead zone fault protection is not configured for the BS (the fault can be cleared by BS breaker failure protection, refer to Section 3.11). The reason is: if the load current of BS CT is small, and the breaker position of BS is abnormal (the actual breaker position is closed, but it is identified as open for the device), then if dead zone fault protection is configured (the BS current is excluded from discriminating zone percentage restraint differential elements of the two connected busbars), it will lead the busbar differential protection mal-operate for an external fault.

3-31


3 Operation Theory

BB1 BC/BS CT

Dead zone fault

BC/BS Breaker BB2

3.6.2 Function Block Diagram BC/BS 50DZ 87B.Op_Trp@BCy

50DZ.Op_@BCy

Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx @BCy.BI_52a @BCy.BI_52b @BCy.BI_A_52a @BCy.BI_B_52a @BCy.BI_C_52a @BCy.BI_A_52b @BCy.BI_B_52b @BCy.BI_C_52b 87B.Op_Trp@BBx

For a BS, Just use “BSz” to instead of “BCy” in the above function block diagram. 3.6.3 Logic The logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).

3-32


3 Operation Theory

SIG

BB1 is in service

SIG

BB2 is in service

SIG

Ia_BC1<0.04In

&

SIG

Ib_BC1<0.04In

SIG

Ic_BC1<0.04In

0 400ms

& &

&

Breaker of BC1 is open

SIG

≥1 SIG

87B.Op_Trp@BC1

SIG

DIF_CZ

SIG

Ia_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set]

SIG

Ib_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set]

SIG

Ic_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set]

SIG

87B.Op_Trp@BBx

BC1 current is excluded from discriminating zone percentage differential circuit

&

BC.50DZ.t_Op

&

0

≥1

&

@BC1.50DZ.Op

Figure 3.6-1 Logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection

BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1; Breaker of BC1 is open: please refer to Section 0; DIF_CZ: Check zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient. 3.6.4 I/O Signal Table 3.6-1 Input signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection No.

Signal

Description

1

87B.Op_Trp@BCy


2

87B.Op_Trp@BSz


3

87B.Op_Trp@BBx

Busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx

Table 3.6-2 Output signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection No.

Signal

Description

1

@BCy.50DZ.Op

Dead zone fault protection of BCy operates

2

@BSz.50DZ.Op

Dead zone fault protection of BSz operates

3.6.5 Settings 

BC Dead Zone Fault Protection Setting

Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt Settings50DZ Settings

3-33


3 Operation Theory Table 3.6-3 BC dead zone fault protection settings No.

Name

Range

Step

1

BC.50DZ.I_Set

0.05In ~20.00In

0.01A

2

BC.50DZ.t_Op

0.00~10.00s

0.01s

Remark Current setting for BC/BS dead zone fault protection, 0.1In is recommended. Time delay for BC/BS dead zone fault protection, 150ms is recommended.

3.7 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection (DZP) NOTICE! The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings and sampled values related with each bay will change with the corresponding label settings. In Section 3.7, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding feeder bay. 3.7.1 Fault Detector Element Feeder dead zone fault protection is provided for each feeder bay. PCS-915 provides independent FD element for feeder DZP ([50DZ.FD]), as shown in Figure 3.7-1, if any phase current of feeder bay n is larger than [Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] and current of feeder bay n is excluded from differential current, FD element for feeder DZP picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal from feeder DZP. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off. 3.7.2 Function Description If a fault occurs between breaker and busbar CT of a feeder bay, the fault can not be cleared even the breaker is tripped. In order to clear the fault quickly, dead zone fault protection for each feeder bay is provided. If the breaker of a feeder is open, and three phase currents of the feeder are all smaller than 0.04I n, then the feeder current will be excluded from differential elements which prevent BBP from mal-operation for the fault in the dead zone. For a fault occurred between circuit breaker and CT, FD element of feeder DZP picks up for over 20ms, dead zone fault protection will operates and initiates transfer trip to trip remote circuit breaker. In order to prevent BBP from mal-operation when closing onto the fault, when breaker of a feeder is open, the feeder current is included in differential circuit instantaneously if the closing binary input of the feeder [@Bayn.BI_Cls] changes from “0” to “1”. However, if the binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10 second, an alarm [@Bayn.Alm_Cls] will be issued.

3-34


3 Operation Theory

Busbar

Feeder breaker

Dead zone fault

Feeder CT

3.7.3 Function Block Diagram Feeder 50DZ Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn

@Bayn.50DZ.Op

@Bayn.BI_52a

@Bayn.Op_TT

@Bayn.BI_52b

@Bayn.Alm_Cls

@Bayn.BI_A_52a @Bayn.BI_B_52a

@Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp

@Bayn.BI_C_52a @Bayn.BI_A_52b @Bayn.BI_B_52b @Bayn.BI_C_52b @Bayn.Alm_52b @Bayn.BI_Cls Fdr.50DZ.BI_En or @Bayn.50DZ.BI_En Fdr.50DZ.BI_Blk

3.7.4 Logic The logic of dead zone fault protection is shown as Figure 3.7-1.

3-35


3 Operation Theory

SIG

Ia_Bayn<0.04In

SIG

Ib_Bayn<0.04In

SIG

Ic_Bayn<0.04In

BI

≥1 &

0

[@Bayn.BI_Cls]

SIG

[@Bayn.Alm_52b]

SIG

TBD of bay n is closed

SIG

Breaker of bay n is open

SIG

Ia_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set]

SIG

Ib_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set]

SIG

Ic_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set]

SIG

Bayn.50DZ is enabled

1s

&

Bay n current is not included in differential current

@Bayn.50DZ.FD ≥1

&

Fdr.50DZ.t_Op 0

[@Bayn.50DZ.Op] [@Bayn.Op_TT]

Figure 3.7-1 Logic of feeder dead zone fault protection

Where: @Bayn.50DZ.FD: FD element for feeder bay n dead zone fault protection picks up. TBD of bay n is closed: transfer bus disconnector (TBD) of bay n is closed. Bayn.50DZ is enabled: dead zone fault protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input ([Fdr.50DZ.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50DZ.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [50DZ.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link ([Fdr.50DZ.Link] or [@Bayn.50DZ.Link]) and logic setting ([Fdr.50DZ.En] or [Bayn.50DZ.En]) are set as “1”). 3.7.5 I/O Signal Table 3.7-1 Input signals of feeder dead zone fault protection No.

Signal

Description Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is

1

Fdr.50DZ.BI_En

configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it is

2

@Bayn.50DZ.BI_En

configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

3

Fdr.50DZ.BI_Blk

4

@Bayn.Alm_52b

Binary input of disabling feeder dead zone fault protection Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is energized but current can still be detected in bay n

3-36



@Bayn.BI_Cls

Binary input of closing circuit breaker of bay n Table 3.7-2 Output signals of feeder dead zone fault protection

No.

Signal

Description

1

@Bayn.50DZ.Op

2

@Bayn.Op_TT

3

@Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp

4

@Bayn.Alm_Cls

DZP of bay n operates DZP or BFP of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit breaker Alarm signal indicating that feeder DZP FD element of bay n picks up for over 10s Closing binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10s

3.7.6 Settings Dead Zone Fault Protection Setting



Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt Settings50DZ Settings Table 3.7-3 Feeder dead zone fault protection settings No.

Name

Range

Step

1

Fdr.50DZ.I_Set

0.05In ~20.00In

0.01A

2

Fdr.50DZ.t_Op

0.00~4.90s

0.01s

Remark Current setting for feeder dead zone fault protection, 0.1In is recommended. Time delay for feeder dead zone fault protection, 20ms is recommended. Logic setting of feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n, it is configured when the basic information configuration “Logic setting of

3

Bayn.50DZ.En

0,1

1

a

protective element

is configured

according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4) 1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n 0:

Disabling

feeder

dead

zone

fault

protection of bay n Logic setting of feeder dead zone fault protection, it is configured when the basic information configuration “Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to 4

Fdr. 50DZ.En

0,1

1

each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4) 1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection 0:

Disabling

feeder

dead

zone

fault

protection 

Function Link 3-37


3 Operation Theory

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links Table 3.7-4 Function links of feeder dead zone fault protection No.

Symbol

Remark Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling

1

Fdr.50DZ.Link

binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection 0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is

2

@Bayn.50DZ.Link

configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n 0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n

For feeder dead zone fault protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the corresponding enabling binary input and the corresponding logic setting.

3.8 BC/BS Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) Protection NOTICE! The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the corresponding label settings. In Section 3.8, for a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus coupler, for a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus section. 3.8.1 Fault Detector Element PCS-915 provides independent FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection, if any phase current of BC/BS is larger than the current setting [50SOTF.I_Set], FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection (@BCy.50SOTF.FD or @BSz.50SOTF.FD) picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal from BC/BS SOTF protection. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off. 3.8.2 Function Description If a busbar is first energized via a BC or BS after maintenance or newly installed, a feature of BC/BS SOTF is incorporated in the PCS-915 to trip the BC/BS immediately when it is closed on to a fault. SOTF protection is enabled if the following conditions are met. 3-38


3 Operation Theory

1.

The BC/BS CB status is in open position

2.

BC/BS three phase-currents are smaller than 0.04In.

3.

Any of the two connected busbars is out of service.

If any of the following conditions is met, SOTF protection will be disabled after 300ms 1.

The position status of BC/BS breaker changes from open to closed.

2.

BC current changes from being smaller than 0.04In to being larger than 0.04In.

3.

Both connected busbars are in service.

If FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection picks up in the duration when SOTF protection is enabled, BC/BS SOTF protection will operate to trip BC/BS breaker without controlled by voltage controlled element. 3.8.3 Function Block Diagram 50SOTF Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn

@BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp

Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx

@BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp

@BCy.BI_52a @BCy.BI_52b @BCy.BI_A_52a @BCy.BI_B_52a @BCy.BI_C_52a @BCy.BI_A_52b @BCy.BI_B_52b @BCy.BI_C_52b 50SOTF.BI_Blk

50SOTF.BI_En or @BCy.50SOTF.BI_En

For a BS, Just use “BSz” to instead of “BCy” in the above function block diagram. 3.8.4 Logic The logic of BC/BS SOTF protection is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).

3-39


3 Operation Theory

SIG

Breaker of BC1 is open

SIG

BB1 is in service &

SIG

BB2 is in service

SIG

Ia_BC1>0.04In

SIG

Ib_BC1>0.04In

SIG

Ic_BC1>0.04In

&

0 300ms & & &

@BC1.50SOTF.Op_Trp

≥1

SIG

@BC1.50SOTF is enabled

SET

Ia_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set]

SET

Ib_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set]

SET

Ic_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set]

&

@BC1.50SOTF.FD

≥1

Figure 3.8-1 Logic of SOTF protection

Where: @BC1.50SOTF.FD: FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection picks up BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1. @BC1.50SOTF is enabled: SOTF protection of BC1 is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input ([50SOTF.BI_En] or [@BC1.50SOTF.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [50SOTF.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link ([50SOTF.Link] or [@BC1.50SOTF.Link]) and logic setting ([50SOTF.En] or [@BC1.50SOTF.En]) are set as “1”). 3.8.5 I/O Signal Table 3.8-1 Input signals of BC/BS SOTF protection No.

Signal

Description Binary input of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when

1

50SOTF.BI_En

the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) Binary input of enabling SOTF of BCy (it is configured when the basic

2

@BCy.50SOTF.BI_En

information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) Binary input of enabling SOTF of BSz (it is configured when the basic

3

@BSz.50SOTF.BI_En

information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

3-40



50SOTF.BI_Blk

Binary input of disabling BC/BS SOTF protection Table 3.8-2 Output signals of BC/BS SOTF protection

No.

Signal

Description

1

@BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp

SOTF protection of BCy operates

2

@BSz.50SOTF.Op_Trp

SOTF protection of BSz operates

3

@BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp

4

@BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp

Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of BCy picks up for over 10s Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of BSz picks up for over 10s

3.8.6 Settings Switch-onto-fault Protection Setting



Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsSOTF Settings Table 3.8-3 Switch-onto-fault protection settings No. 1

Name 50SOTF.I_Set

Range

Step

0.05In ~20.00In

0.01A

Remark Current setting for BC/BS SOTF protection Logic setting of SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay), it is configured when the basic information configuration “Logic setting

2

Bayn.50SOTF.En

0,1

1

of

a

protective

element

is

configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4) 1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay) 0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay) Logic setting of BC/BS SOTF protection, it is configured when the basic information configuration “Logic setting of a protective

3

50SOTF.En

0,1

1

element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4) 1: Enabling BC/BS SOTF protection 0: Disabling BC/BS SOTF protection



Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

3-41


3 Operation Theory Table 3.8-4 Function links of BC/BS SOTF protection No.

Symbol

Remark Function link of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and

1

50SOTF.Link

function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling BC/BS SOTF protection 0: Disabling BC/BS SOTF protection Function link of enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay) (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is

2

@Bayn.50SOTF.Link

configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay) 0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)

For BC/BS SOTF protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the corresponding enabling binary input and the corresponding logic setting.

3.9 Overcurrent (OC) Protection NOTICE! The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings and sampled values related with each bay will change with the corresponding label settings. In Section 3.9, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. 3.9.1 Fault Detector Element PCS-915 provides two independent FD elements for OC protection of each bay (includes BC/BS and each feeder), which are phase overcurrent FD element and ground overcurrent FD element. If any of the two elements picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal from OC protection element. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the corresponding fault detector element drop off. 

Phase overcurrent FD element

When any phase current of bay n is larger than the threshold, phase overcurrent FD element (@Bayn.50/51P.FD) picks up, the operating criterion is: Max(Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn) > [Bayn.50/51P.I_Set] 

Ground overcurrent FD element

When residual current of bay n is larger than the threshold, ground overcurrent FD element (@Bayn.50/51G.FD) picks up, the operating criterion is:

3-42


3 Operation Theory

3I0_Bayn > [Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set] 3.9.2 Function Description Overcurrent protection (50/51) includes phase overcurrent element (50/51P) and ground overcurrent element (50/51G), if “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” in protective function configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4), the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/ [Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] is released, each overcurrent element can be configured as inverse-time overcurrent protection (IDMT) or definite-time overcurrent protection by the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/ [Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] (0: definite-time characteristic, 1: normal inverse-time characteristic, 2: very inverse-time characteristic, 3: extremely inverse-time characteristic, 4: long-time inverse-time characteristic, 5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic). For overcurrent protection, the inverse-time characteristic complies with the following formula (based on IEC60255-3 standard).

t(I ) 

Kt I ( )  1 Ib

TMS

Where:

Ib

is

current

setting.

For

ground

overcurrent

protection,

it

is

the

setting

[Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]. For phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.I_Set].

K t is time constant. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.K]. For phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.K]. When inverse-time characteristic is chosen as “user-defined inverse-time characteristic”, user has to input the setting according to the application.

TMS is time multiplier. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.TMS]. For phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.TMS].

 is exponent. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.Alpha]. For phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]. when inverse-time characteristic is chosen as “user-defined inverse-time characteristic”, user has to input the setting according to the application. I for ground overcurrent protection, it is actual value of calculated residual current of bay n. For

phase overcurrent protection, it is actual value of measured maximum phase current of bay n.

t (I ) is calculated operating time of inverse-time overcurrent protection. For phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection, definite-time, four IEC inverse-time characteristics and one user-defined inverse-time characteristic are available for selection. It can be shown in the following table. 3-43


3 Operation Theory Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve



Kt

(Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve) 0: definite-time characteristic

-

-

1: normal inverse-time characteristic

0.14

0.02

2: very inverse-time characteristic

13.5

1

3: extremely inverse-time characteristic

80

2

4: long-time inverse-time characteristic

120

1

Bayn.50/51P.K

Bayn.50/51P.Alpha

(Bayn.50/51G.K)

(Bayn.50/51G.Alpha)

5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic

3.9.3 Function Block Diagram

50/51 Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn

@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp

50/51.BI_Blk

@Bayn.50/51P.Alm_Pkp

50/51.BI_En or (@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En @Bayn.50/51G.Alm_Pkp and @Bayn.50/51G.BI_En)

3.9.4 Logic The logic of overcurrent protection is shown as bellow.

3-44


3 Operation Theory

&

@Bayn.50/51P.FD

≥1

SET

SET

SET

[Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]=0 &

[Bayn.50/51P.t_Op]

0

&

[Bayn.50/51P.t_Op]

0

[Bayn.50/51P.t_Op]

0

Ia_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]

≥1

Ib_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]

& SET

Ic_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]

SIG

Bayn.50/51P is enabled

≥1 &

@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp

IDMT (Ia_Bayn)

& [Bayn.50/51P.tmin]

&

0

IDMT (Ib_Bayn)


&

≥1

0

IDMT (Ic_Bayn)


SIG

Bayn.50/51G is enabled

SET

3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]

&

0

[Bayn.50/51G.t_Op] 0

≥1 & SET

@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp

IDMT (3I0_Bayn)

&

[Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve]=0 [Bayn.50/51G.tmin]

&

0

@Bayn.50/51G.FD

Figure 3.9-1 Logic of overcurrent protection

Where: Bayn.50/51P.FD: Bay n phase overcurrent FD element picks up Bayn.50/51G.FD: Bay n ground overcurrent FD element picks up Bayn.50/51P is enabled: phase overcurrent protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input ([50/51.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [50/51.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link ([50/51.Link] or [@Bayn.50/51P.Link]) and logic setting ([50/51.En] or [Bayn.50/51P.En]) are set as “1”). Bayn.50/51G is enabled: ground overcurrent protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input ([50/51.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50/51G.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [50/51.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link 3-45


3 Operation Theory

([50/51.Link] or [@Bayn.50/51G.Link]) and logic setting ([50/51.En] or [Bayn.50/51G.En]) are set as “1”). 3.9.5 I/O Signal Table 3.9-1 Input signals of overcurrent protection No.

Signal

Description Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the

1

basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of

50/51.BI_En

a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) Binary input of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

2

configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary

@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En

input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) Binary input of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

3

@Bayn.50/51G.BI_En


4

50/51.BI_Blk

Binary input of disabling overcurrent protection Table 3.9-2 Output signals of overcurrent protection

No.

Signal

Description

1

@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp

phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates

2

@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp

ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates

3


4

@Bayn.50/51G.Alm_Pkp

Alarm signal indicating that phase overcurrent FD element of bay n picks up for over 10s Alarm signal indicating that ground overcurrent FD element of bay n picks up for over 10s

3.9.6 Settings Overcurrent Protection Setting



Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsOC Settings Table 3.9-3 Overcurrent protection settings No.

Name

Range

Step

1

Bayn.50/51P.I_Set

0.05In~20.00In

0.01A

2

Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set

0.05In~20.00In

0.01A

3

Bayn.50/51P.t_Op

0.00~10.00s

0.01s

Remark Current

setting

for

phase

overcurrent

for

ground

overcurrent

delay

setting

for

protection of bay n Current

setting

protection of bay n Definite

3-46

time

phase


3 Operation Theory No.

Name

Range

Step

Remark overcurrent protection of bay n

4

Bayn.50/51G.t_Op

0.00~10.00s

0.01s

Definite time delay setting for ground overcurrent protection of bay n Operating characteristic selection for phase overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting

5

Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve

0~5

1

is

displayed

characteristic”

if

“IDMT

in

protective

overcurrent function

configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Minimum time delay for inverse-time phase overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting 6

Bayn.50/51P.tmin

0.00~10.00s

0.01s

is

displayed

characteristic”

if

“IDMT

in

protective


configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Time

constant

for

inverse-time

phase

overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting 7

Bayn.50/51P.K

0~10000

0.01

is

displayed

characteristic”

if

“IDMT

in

protective


configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Time multiplier

for

inverse-time

phase


Bayn.50/51P.TMS

0.01~200

0.01

is

displayed

characteristic”

if

“IDMT

in

protective


configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Exponent for inverse-time phase overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting is displayed 9

Bayn.50/51P.Alpha

0.01~200

0.01

if

“IDMT

overcurrent

characteristic”

in

protective function configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Operating characteristic selection for ground overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting 10

Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve

0~5

1

is

displayed

characteristic”

if

“IDMT

in

protective


configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Minimum time delay for inverse-time ground 11

Bayn.50/51G.tmin

0.00~10.00s

0.01s

overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting is

displayed

if

“IDMT

overcurrent

3-47



Name

Range

Step

Remark characteristic”

in

protective

function

configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Time constant

for

inverse-time ground


Bayn.50/51G.K

0~10000

0.01

is

if

“IDMT

in

protective

displayed

characteristic”


configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Time multiplier for inverse-time ground overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting 13

Bayn.50/51G.TMS

0.01~200

0.01

is

if

“IDMT

in

protective

displayed

characteristic”


configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Exponent

for

inverse-time

ground


Bayn.50/51G.Alpha

0.01~200

0.01

is

if

“IDMT

in

protective

displayed

characteristic”


configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). 1: Enabling overcurrent protection operates 15

50/51.En_Init50BF

0,1

1

to initiate BFP 0: Disabling overcurrent protection operates to initiate BFP Logic setting of phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection, it is configured

when

the basic information

configuration “Logic setting of a protective 16

50/51.En

0,1

1

element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4) 1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection 0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection Logic setting of phase overcurrent protection of bay n, it is configured when the basic information configuration “Logic setting of a

17

Bayn.50/51P.En

0,1

1

protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4) 1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of

3-48



Name

Range

Step

Remark bay n 0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n Logic

setting

of

ground

overcurrent

protection of bay n, it is configured when the basic information configuration “Logic setting of 18

Bayn.50/51G.En

0,1

a protective element

is configured

according to each bay” is set as “Enable”

1

(refer to Section 3.4) 1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n 0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n

In: Rated secondary current of reference CT 1.

[Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]

The parameters of each characteristic are listed in the following table.



Kt

Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve 0: definite-time

-

-


0.14

0.02


13.5

1


80

2


120

1


Bayn.50/51P.K

Bayn.50/51P.Alpha

2.

[Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve]

The parameters of each characteristic are listed in the following table.



Kt

Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve 0: definite-time

-

-


0.14

0.02


13.5

1


80

2


120

1


Bayn.50/51G.K

Bayn.50/51G.Alpha

3.

[Bayn.50/51P.tmin]/[Bayn.50/51G.tmin]

3-49


3 Operation Theory

This is the minimum delay of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection. Recommended value: 0.1s. 4.

[Bayn.50/51P.TMS]/[Bayn.50/51G.TMS]

This is the time multiplier setting ( TMS ) of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection. If inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection coordinates with a line, the setting should be graded with the inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection of the line. If inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection is used independently, it can be set according to the actual requirement. 5.

[Bayn.50/51P.K]/[Bayn.50/51G.K], [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]/[Bayn.50/51G.Alpha]

[Bayn.50/51P.K]/[Bayn.50/51G.K] and [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]/[Bayn.50/51G.Alpha] are respectively the time constant ( K t ) and the exponent (  ) of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection, which are set according to the model of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection. They are valid only when the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/[Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] is set as “5” (i.e. user-defined inverse-time characteristic is selected). 

Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links Table 3.9-4 Function links of overcurrent protection No.

Symbol

Remark Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as

1

50/51.Link

“Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection 0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling

2

@Bayn.50/51P.Link

binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n 0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n Function link of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling

3

@Bayn.50/51G.Link

binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n

3-50



Symbol

Remark 0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n

For overcurrent protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the corresponding enabling binary input and the corresponding logic setting.

3.10 Pole Disagreement (PD) Protection NOTICE! The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings and sampled values related with each bay will change with the corresponding label settings. In Section 3.10, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. 3.10.1 Fault Detector Element PCS-915 provides independent pole disagreement FD element for PD protection of each bay (includes BC/BS and each feeder). If pole disagreement binary input of bay n [@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized, FD element for PD protection of bay n (@Bayn.62PD.FD) picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal from PD protection element. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off. 3.10.2 Function Description For each bay, PD protection is necessary when pole disagreement of corresponding breaker is detected due to three phases not in same status. Pole disagreement protection is initiated by series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of breaker i.e. the binary input [@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD]. In addition to series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of breaker, residual and negative sequence current are used as auxiliary criteria. 3.10.3 Function Block Diagram 62PD Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn

@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp

@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD

@Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp

62PD.BI_En or @Bayn.62PD.BI_En 62PD.BI_Blk

3.10.4 Logic The logic of pole disagreement protection is shown as follows.

3-51


3 Operation Theory

BI

SET

[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] &

3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set]

≥1 SET

I2_Bayn>[Bayn.62PD.I2_Set]

SIG

Bayn.62PD is enabled

&

&

52b_A

52a_A

52b_B

52a_B

52b_C

52a_C

[@Bayn.62PD.t_Op] 0

@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp

@Bayn.62PD.FD

[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD]

Figure 3.10-1 Logic of pole disagreement protection

Where: @Bayn.62PD.FD: FD element for PD protection of bay n picks up. 3I0_Bayn, I2_Bayn: residual and negative sequence current of bay n. Bayn.62PD is enabled: PD protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input ([62PD.BI_En] or [@Bayn.62PD.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [62PD.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link ([62PD.Link] or [@Bayn.62PD.Link]) and logic setting ([62PD.En] or [Bayn.62PD.En]) are set as “1”). 3.10.5 I/O Signal Table 3.10-1 Input signals of pole disagreement protection No. 1

Signal @Bayn.62PD.BI_PD

Description Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement status Binary input of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the basic

2

62PD.BI_En

information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) Binary input of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured when the

3

@Bayn.62PD.BI_En

basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

4

62PD.BI_Blk

Binary input of disabling PD protection

3-52


3 Operation Theory Table 3.10-2 Output signals of pole disagreement protection No. 1

Signal

Description

@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp

PD protection of bay n operates Alarm signal indicating that PD protection FD element of bay n picks up

2

@Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp

for over 10s (i.e. pole disagreement binary input of bay n [@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized for over 10s)

3.10.6 Settings Protection Settings



Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsPD Settings Table 3.10-3 PD protection settings No.

Name

Range

Remark

Step

1

Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set

0.05In~20.00In

0.01A

2

Bayn.62PD.I2_Set

0.05In~20.00In

0.01A

3

Bayn.62PD.t_Op

0.00~10.00s

0.01s

Residual current setting for PD protection Negative-sequence current setting for PD protection Time delay of PD protection Logic setting of PD protection of bay n, it is configured

when

the

basic

information

configuration “Logic setting of a protective 4

Bayn.62PD.En

0, 1

1

element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4) 1: Enabling PD protection of bay n 0: Disabling PD protection of bay n Logic setting of PD protection, it is configured when the basic information configuration “Logic setting of a protective element is

5

62PD.En

0, 1

1

configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4) 1: Enabling PD protection 0: Disabling PD protection 1: Enabling PD protection operates to initiate

6

62PD.En_Init50BF

0,1

1

BFP 0: Disabling PD protection operates to initiate BFP


[Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set]

It should be larger than maximum residual current under maximum fault level condition. 2.

[Bayn.62PD.I2_Set] 3-53


3 Operation Theory

It should be greater than maximum unbalance negative sequence current under maximum fault level condition. 3.

[Bayn.62PD.t_Op]

It should be greater than maximum inconsistent time of three phase interrupters when breaker is in the process of being closed. 

Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links Table 3.10-4 Function links of pole disagreement protection No.

Symbol

Remark Function link of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and

1

62PD.Link

function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling PD protection 0: Disabling PD protection Function link of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input

2

@Bayn.62PD.Link

and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling PD protection of bay n 0: Disabling PD protection of bay n

For pole disagreement protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the corresponding enabling binary input and the corresponding logic setting.

3.11 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) NOTICE! The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the corresponding label settings. In Section 3.11, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar. For a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus coupler. For a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus section. 3.11.1 Fault Detector Element PCS-915 provides independent FD element for BC/BS BFP, if any of the following conditions is fulfilled, FD element for BC/BS BFP (@BCy.50BF.FD or @BSz.50BF.FD) picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal from BC/BS BFP. The

3-54


3 Operation Theory

fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off. 1.

BBP operates to trip BC/BS

2.

Breaker failure initiating (BFI) binary inputs [@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] and common BFI binary input [@BCy.BI_ChkBFI]/[@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] are energized at the same time

3.

BC/BS overcurrent protection operates (controlled by the logic setting [50/51.En_Init50BF])

4.

BC/BS pole disagreement [62PD.En_Init50BF])

protection

operates

(controlled

by

the

logic

setting

BFI binary input [@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] can be connected to an external tripping contact. [@BCy.BI_ChkBFI]/[@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] is a common BFI binary input, it will be energized if [@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] is energized. 3.11.2 Function Description When tripping signal has been delivered to BC/BS breaker, while the breaker is failed to open checked by the BC/BS current check element setting [BC.50BF.I_Set], BFP will operate to trip all feeders connected to the two busbars (connected with the faulty BC/BS) after time delay of [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]. BC/BS breaker failure protection is controlled by voltage controlled element of BBP (Please refer to Section 3.5.2.2) if busbar voltage is available and applied. For the occasion that BS is at the edge of the protected zone, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure 3.2-9, BS breaker failure initiating (BFI) logic is applied and it can output a contact to energize the breaker failure initiating binary inputs [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of another PCS-915. Takes BS1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example, for PCS-915-A, if differential element of BB1 operates and BS current of any phase is larger than 0.04In, the BS breaker failure initiating contact will operate and it can energize the binary inputs [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of PCS-915-B. Ia_BS1>0.04In ≥1

Ib_BS1>0.04In Ic_BS1>0.04In

&

@BS1.BO_BFI

Diff_BB1

Figure 3.11-1 The logic scheme of BFI of BS

Where: [@BSz.BO_BFI]: BS1 breaker failure initiating contact operates, it can be used to energize the binary input [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of another PCS-915. Ia_BS1: Phase A current of BS1. Ib_BS1: Phase B current of BS1.

3-55


3 Operation Theory

Ic_BS1: Phase C current of BS1. Diff_BB1: Differential element of BB1 (not controlled by VEC_BBP) operates, please refer to Figure 3.5-5. The logic scheme of BFI of BS2 is similar to it. 3.11.3 Function Block Diagram BC/BS 50BF @BCy.BI_BFI

@BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB

@BCy.BI_ChkBFI

50BF.Op_Trp@BBx

Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn

@BCy.Alm_BI_BFI


@BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI

87B.Op_Trp@BCy

@BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp

@BCy.50/51P.Op_Trp

BO_BFI_@BSz

@BCy.50/51G.Op_Trp

50BF.Op

@BCy.62PD.Op_Trp

For a BS, Just use “BSz” to instead of “BCy” in the above function block diagram. 3.11.4 Logic The logic of BC BFP is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).

SIG

Voltage_Rls_BBP 1

SET

Ia_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]

SET

Ib_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]

SET

Ic_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]

SIG

87B.Op_Trp@BC1

EN

[62PD.En_Init50BF]

SIG

@BC1.62PD.Op_Trp

EN

[50/51.En_Init50BF]

≥1

&

@BC1.50BF.Op_TrpBB &

[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]

50BF.Op_Trp@BB1

& SIG

BI

@BC1.50/51.Op_Trp

&

@BC1.50BF.Op_TrpBB

≥1

[@BC1.BI_BFI] &

BI

[@BC1.BI_ChkBFI]

SIG

Voltage_Rls_BBP 2

&

[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]

50BF.Op_Trp@BB2

@BC1.50BF.FD

Figure 3.11-2 Logic of BC/BS BFP

Where: @BC1.50BF.FD: FD element for BC1 BFP picks up Voltage_Rls_BBP 1: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage 3-56


3 Operation Theory

controlled element of BBP of BB1 operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2 for details. Voltage_Rls_BBP 2: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage controlled element of BBP of BB2 operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2 for details. @BC1.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of BC1 operates ([@BC1.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@BC1.50/51G.Op_Trp]). For the occasion that BS is at the edge of the protected zone, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure 3.2-9, the logic of BS BFP is shown as follows (Takes BS1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).

SIG

Voltage_Rls_BBP 1

SET

Ia_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]

SET

Ib_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]

SET

Ic_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]

SIG

87B.Op_Trp@BS1

EN

[62PD.En_Init50BF]

SIG

@BS1.62PD.Op_Trp

EN

[50/51.En_Init50BF]

≥1

&

@BS1.50BF.Op_TrpBB &

[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]

50BF.Op_Trp@BB1

& SIG

@BS1.50/51.Op_Trp

& ≥1

BI

[@BS1.BI_BFI]

BI

[@BS1.BI_ChkBFI]

&

@BS1.50BF.FD

Figure 3.11-3 Logic of BS BFP (BS is at the edge of the protected zone)

Where: @BS1.50BF.FD: FD element for BS1 BFP picks up Voltage_Rls_BBP 1: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage controlled element of BBP of BB1 operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2 for details. @BS1.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of BSz operates ([@BS1.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@BS1.50/51G.Op_Trp]). 3.11.5 I/O Signal Table 3.11-1 Input signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection No.

Signal

Description

1

87B.Op_Trp@BCy


2

87B.Op_Trp@BSz


3

@BCy.50/51P.Op_Trp

Phase overcurrent protection of BCy operates

4

@BCy.50/51G.Op_Trp

Ground overcurrent protection of BCy operates 3-57



@BSz.50/51P.Op_Trp

Phase overcurrent protection of BSz operates

6

@BSz.50/51G.Op_Trp

Ground overcurrent protection of BSz operates

7

@BCy.62PD.Op_Trp

Pole disagreement protection of BCy operates

8

@BSz.62PD.Op_Trp

Pole disagreement protection of BSz operates

9

@BCy.BI_BFI

BFI binary input of BCy

10

@BCy.BI_ChkBFI

Common BFI binary input of BCy

11

@BSz.BI_BFI

BFI binary input of BSz

12

@BSz.BI_ChkBFI

Common BFI binary input of BSz

Table 3.11-2 Output signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection No.

Signal

Description

1

@BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB

BCy BFP operates to trip busbar zone

2

@BSz.50BF.Op_TrpBB

BSz BFP operates to trip busbar zone

3

50BF.Op_Trp@BBx

BFP operates to trip BBx

4

50BF.Op

BC/BS BFP or feeder BFP operates

5

@BCy.Alm_BI_BFI

6

@BSz.Alm_BI_BFI

7

@BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI

8

@BSz.Alm_BI_ChkBFI

9

@BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp

10

@BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp

11

@BSz.BO_BFI

Binary input of initiating BCy BFP (@BCy.BI_BFI) is energized for over 10s. Binary input of initiating BSz BFP (@BSz.BI_BFI) is energized for over 10s. The common initiating contact of BFP of BCy (@BCy.BI_ChkBFI) is continually energized for over 10s The common initiating contact of BFP of BSz (@BSz.BI_ChkBFI) is continually energized for over 10s Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BCy BFP picks up for over 10s Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BSz BFP picks up for over 10s BSz breaker failure initiating contact operates

3.11.6 Settings BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection Setting



Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBC BFP Settings Table 3.11-3 BC/BS breaker failure protection settings No.

Name

Range

Step

Remark

1

BC.50BF.I_Set

0.05In ~20.00In

0.01A

Current setting for BC/BS BFP

2

BC.50BF.t_TrpBB

0.00~10.00s

0.01s

Time delay of BC/BS BFP

In: Rated secondary current of reference CT 3-58


3 Operation Theory

1.

[BC.50BF.I_Set]

It should be set as minimum fault current flowing through BC breaker. The change of power system topology can influence the fault current after BBP operating. 2.

[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]

It should be larger than the maximal arc-extinguishing time of BC breaker.

3.12 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) NOTICE! The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings and sampled values related with each bay will change with the corresponding label settings. In Section 3.12, for a feeder bay, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding feeder bay. 3.12.1 Fault Detector Element Feeder breaker failure protection is provided for each feeder bay. PCS-915 provides independent FD element for feeder BFP, if any of the following conditions is fulfilled, FD element for feeder bay n BFP picks up (@Bayn.50BF.FD), the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal from feeder BFP. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off. 1.

BBP operates to trip feeder bay n (controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_Init50BF])

2.

Breaker failure initiating (BFI) binary input (Phase-segregated or three-phase tripping contact) and common BFI binary input [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] of feeder bay n are energized.

3.

Overcurrent protection of feeder bay n operates (controlled by the logic setting [50/51.En_Init50BF])

4.

Pole disagreement protection of feeder bay n operates (controlled by the logic setting [62PD.En_Init50BF])

3.12.2 Function Description Breaker failure protection is available for each feeder bay. When a breaker is determined failure to trip, the BFP will operate to re-trip the breaker after time delay of [50BF.t_ReTrp] (If “Breaker failure protection re-tripping function” in protective function configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4) and the logic setting [50BF.En_ReTrp] is set as “1”). If the fault is still existed, the breaker failure protection will trip BC after time delay of [50BF.t_TrpBC] and all feeders after time delay of [50BF.t_TrpBB]. BFP also provides the function to transfer trip the breaker of the remote end of a line or intertrip the breakers on other sides of a main-transformer with the time delay of [50BF.t_TrpBB].

3-59


3 Operation Theory

3.12.2.1 BFI Binary Input For each feeder bay, BFP can be initiated externally via binary inputs by phase-segregated tripping contacts or three-phase tripping contacts of protective device for the corresponding feeder bay. 1.

Phase-segregated tripping contact

[@Bayn.BI_A_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase A of feeder bay n [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase B of feeder bay n [@Bayn.BI_C_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase C of feeder bay n 2.

Three-phase tripping contact

[@Bayn.BI_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of three phases of feeder bay n. For a main-transformer bay, only three-phase breaker failure initiating (BFI) contact is provided. 3.12.2.2 Configuration of BFI Binary Input If any BFI binary input (of BC/BS or any feeder bay) is configured for a binary input (BI) module, binary inputs for other functions can not be configured for the BI module. BFI binary inputs of the same bay must be configured for one BI module (i.e. [@Bayn.BI_A_BFI], [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI], [@Bayn.BI_C_BFI] and [@Bayn.BI_BFI] can not be configured for two or more BI module). [BI_COMMON] of BI module is an internal binary input, it will be energized if any other binary input of the BI module is energized. [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] is the common BFI binary input. When users configure BFI binary input via PCS-Explorer auxiliary software by themselves, all the common BFI binary inputs of related bays must be configured to [BI_COMMON] of the BI module, so if any BFI binary input of a BI module is energized, the common BFI binary inputs of related bays are energized (refer to Section 9.5.2.1). For example, if BFI binary inputs of bay 02~06 ([@Bayn.BI_A_BFI], [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI], [@Bayn.BI_C_BFI] and [@Bayn.BI_BFI], n=02~06) are configured for one BI module, all the common BFI binary inputs of related bays ([@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] (n=02~06)) must be configured to [BI_COMMON] of the BI module, then if any BFI binary input of the BI module is energized, the common BFI binary inputs of bay 02~06 [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] (n=02~06) will be energized. 3.12.2.3 Current Criterion 1.

Current criterion 1

Phase current is greater than the setting [Bayn.50BF.I_Set] 2.

Current criterion 2

Residual current is greater than the setting [Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set] 3.

Current criterion 3

Negative sequence current is greater than the setting i.e. [Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]

3-60


3 Operation Theory

All these current criteria are controlled by the logic setting [50BF.En_Current_Ctrl], if this logic setting is set as “0”, it can be regarded as that all these current criteria are met. Current criterion 2 and current criterion 3 are also controlled by the logic setting of [Bayn.50BF.En_3I0] and [Bayn.50BF.En_I2] respectively. NOTICE! When calculating all the current setting of each bay, the primary current should be converted to the secondary value according to the reference CT ratio instead of the actual CT ratio of each bay. 3.12.2.4 Voltage Control Element of Breaker Failure Protection (VCE_BFP) Voltage control element is used as an auxiliary condition. The criteria are: UP≤[50BF.VCE.U_Set]

Equation 3.12-1

3U0≥[50BF.VCE.3U0_Set]

Equation 3.12-2

U2≥[50BF.VCE.U2_Set]

Equation 3.12-3

Where: UP: Phase voltage 3U0: Residual voltage U2: Negative sequence voltage [50BF.VCE.U_Set]: Phase voltage setting for blocking BFP [50BF.VCE.3U0_Set]: Residual voltage setting for blocking BFP [50BF.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative sequence voltage setting for blocking BFP When the protective device is applied to an unearthed system, i.e. the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, the criteria of voltage control element will change. UPP ≤[50BF.VCE.U_Set]

Equation 3.12-4

U2 ≥[50BF.VCE.U2_Set]

Equation 3.12-5

Where: UPP: Phase-to-phase voltage U2: Negative sequence voltage

3-61


3 Operation Theory

[50BF.VCE.U_Set]: Phase-to-phase voltage setting for blocking BFP [50BF.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BFP VCE_BFP will be controlled by the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En], if it is set as “0”, VCE_BFP will be disabled and feeder breaker failure protection will not controlled by VCE_BFP If “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), VCE_BFP will quit and related settings will be hidden, feeder breaker failure protection will not controlled by voltage element. If the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “0” (refer to Section 7.1), VCE_BFP is invalid no matter the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En] is set as “1” or not, feeder breaker failure protection will not controlled by voltage element. Only if “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “1” and the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En] is set as “1”, VCE_BFP is enabled. If the protective function configuration “Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4), then if the logic setting [Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] is set as “1” and the releasing voltage controlled element binary input [50BF.BI_RlsVCE] is energized, the voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection for bay n will operate. 3.12.3 Function Block Diagram Feeder 50BF Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn

@Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp


50BF.Op_@TrpBCy

@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx

50BF.Op_@TrpBSz

@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx

@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB

@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp

@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC

@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp

50BF.Op_Trp@BBx

@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp

@Bayn.Op_TT

@Bayn.BI_BFI

@Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI @Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI

@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI @Bayn.BI_A_BFI

50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE

@Bayn.BI_B_BFI

50BF.Alm_Pkp

@Bayn.BI_C_BFI

50BF.Alm_Off

50BF.BI_RlsVCE

50BF.Op

87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC 50BF.BI_En 50BF.BI_Blk

3-62


3 Operation Theory

3.12.4 Logic The logic of feeder BFP is shown as follows.

EN

[87B.En_Init50BF]

SIG

BBP operates to trip bay n

EN

[62PD.En_Init50BF]

SIG

@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp

EN

[50/51.En_Init50BF]

SIG

@Bayn.50/51.Op_Trp

BI

[@Bayn.BI_BFI]

BI

[@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]

&

&

>=1

&

&

& >=1

SET

Ia_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set]

BI

[@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]

BI

[@Bayn.BI_A_BFI]

SET

& &

Ib_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set]

BI

[@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]

BI

[@Bayn.BI_B_BFI]

SET

>=1

& &

Ic_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set]

BI

[@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]

BI

[@Bayn.BI_C_BFI]

EN

[50BF.En_Current_Ctrl]

& &

&

>=1

>=1 & EN

[Bayn.50BF.En_3I0]

SET

3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]

EN

[Bayn.50BF.En_I2]

SET

I2_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]

&

>=1

& &

@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB

& @Bayn.50BF.FD &

@Bayn.Op_TT

[50BF.t_TrpBB]

0

50BF.Op_Trp@BBx

[50BF.t_TrpBC]

0

50BF.Op_Trp@BC

& SIG

50BF is enabled

SIG

VCE_BFP x

SIG

VCE_BFP is disabled

BI

[50BF.BI_RlsVCE]

EN

Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE

SIG

Disconnector position of BBx

EN

[50BF.En_ReTrp]

@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC & ≥1

[50BF.t_ReTrp]

0

@Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp

& &

Figure 3.12-1 Logic of feeder BFP

Where: @Bayn.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of bay n 3-63


3 Operation Theory

operates ([@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp]). 50BF is enabled: busbar differential protection is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input [50BF.BI_En] is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [50BF.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link [50BF.Link] and logic setting [50BF.En] are set as “1”). VCE_BFP x: Voltage controlled element for BFP of any connected BBx, please refer to Section 3.12.2.4. VCE_BFP is disabled: “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) or the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “0” or the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En] is set as “0”. Disconnector position of BBx: which busbar the bay is connected to (according to disconnector position of the bay). @Bayn.50BF.FD: FD element for feeder bay n BFP picks up. 3I0_Bayn: The residual current of bay n. I2_Bayn: The negative sequence current of bay n. Ia_Bayn: The phase A current of bay n. Ib_Bayn: The phase B current of bay n. Ic_Bayn: The phase C current of bay n. 3.12.5 I/O Signal Table 3.12-1 Input signals of feeder breaker failure protection No.

Signal

Description

1

50BF.BI_En

Binary input of enabling feeder BFP

2

50BF.BI_Blk

Binary input of disabling feeder BFP

3

@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp

Phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates

4

@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp

Ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates

5

@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp

Pole disagreement protection of bay n operates

6

@Bayn.BI_BFI

Three-phase BFI binary input of bay n

7

@Bayn.BI_A_BFI

Phase-A BFI binary input of bay n

8

@Bayn.BI_B_BFI

Phase-B BFI binary input of bay n

9

@Bayn.BI_C_BFI

Phase-C BFI binary input of bay n

10

@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI

Common BFI binary input of bay n

11

50BF.BI_RlsVCE

Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker failure protection

3-64


3 Operation Theory Table 3.12-2 Output signals of feeder breaker failure protection No.

Signal

Description

1

@Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp

BFP of bay n operates to re-trip the feeder breaker

2

50BF.Op_Trp@BCy

BFP operates to trip BCy breaker

3

50BF.Op_Trp@BSz

BFP operates to trip BSz breaker

4

50BF.Op_Trp@BBx

BFP operates to trip BBx

5

@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB

BFP of bay n operates to trip busbar zone

6

@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC

BFP of bay n operates to trip BC/BS

7

50BF.Op

BC/BS BFP or feeder BFP operates

8

@Bayn.Op_TT

DZP or BFP of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit breaker Binary

9

@Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI

input

of

initiating

contact

of

BFP

of

bay

n

(BI_A_BFI_@Bayn, BI_B_BFI_@Bayn, BI_C_BFI_@Bayn or BI_BFI_@Bayn) is energized for over 10s.

10

@Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI

11

50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE

12

50BF.Alm_Pkp

The

common

initiating

contact

of

BFP

of

bay

n

(@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI) is continually energized for over 10s Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker failure protection is energized for over 10s. Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BFP of any bay picks up for over 10s Alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled. If the logic setting [50BF.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once feeder BFP is disabled

13

50BF.Alm_Off

(feeder BFP can be disabled by the corresponding enabling binary input, function link or enabling logic setting), the alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled will be issued

3.12.6 Settings Feeder Breaker Failure Protection Setting



Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsFdr BFP Settings Table 3.12-3 Feeder breaker failure protection settings No.

Name

Range

Step

1

50BF.t_ReTrp

0.00~10.00s

0.01s

2

50BF.t_TrpBC

0.00~10.00s

0.01s

3

50BF.t_TrpBB

0.00~10.00s

0.01s

4

50BF.VCE.U_Set

0~Un

0.01V

Remark Time delay of feeder BFP operating to re-trip breaker Time delay of feeder BFP operating to trip BC breaker Time delay of feeder BFP operating to trip busbar zone Under voltage setting of VCE of

3-65



Name

Range

Step

Remark BFP

5

50BF.VCE.3U0_Set

0~Un

0.01V

6

50BF.VCE.U2_Set

0~Un

0.01V

7

Bayn.50BF.I_Set

0.05In ~20.00In

0.01A

8

Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set

0.05In ~20.00In

0.01A

9

Bayn.50BF.I2_Set

0.05In ~20.00In

0.01A

10

Bayn.50BF.En_3I0

0, 1

1

11

Bayn.50BF.En_I2

0, 1

1

Residual voltage setting of VCE of BFP Negative-sequence voltage setting of VCE of BFP Phase current setting of BFP of bay n Residual current setting of BFP of bay n Negative sequence current setting of BFP of bay n Residual current criterion of BFP of bay n is enabled or not Negative sequence current criterion of BFP of bay n is enabled or not 1: the binary input of releasing voltage

controlled

element

for

breaker failure protection is enabled 12

Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE

0, 1

1

0: the binary input of releasing voltage

controlled

breaker

failure

element

for

protection

is

disabled Logic setting of breaker failure protection 13

50BF.En

0, 1

1

1: Enabling feeder breaker failure protection 0: Disabling feeder breaker failure protection 1: Alarm signal will be issued if

14

50BF.En_Alm_Off

0,1

1

feeder BFP is disabled 0: Alarm signal will not be issued if feeder BFP is disabled

15

50BF.En_Current_Ctrl

0, 1

1

Current criterion of BFP is enabled or not 1: Enabling re-tripping function for

16

50BF.En_ReTrp

0,1

1

feeder breaker failure protection 0: Disabling re-tripping function for feeder breaker failure protection

17

50BF.VCE.En

0, 1

1

3-66

1: BFP is controlled by VCE of BFP 0: BFP is not controlled by VCE of



Name

Range

Step

Remark BFP


[50BF.t_ReTrp]

It should be larger than 100ms and smaller than the setting [50BF.t_TrpBC]. The recommended value is 0.15s. The function of re-tripping target breaker can be disabled if it is set the same as [50BF.t_TrpBC]. 2.

[50BF.t_TrpBC]

It should be larger than the sum of operating time of breaker and reset time of protective device with certain margin. The recommended value is 250ms~350ms. 3.

[50BF.t_TrpBB]

On the premise that BC breaker is tripped, the value of [50BF.t_TrpBB] should be greater than the sum of operating time of BC breaker and reset time of protective device with certain margin. It should be as short as possible on the premise of losing selectivity. The recommended value is 500ms~600ms. 4.

[50BF.VCE.U_Set]

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when a symmetrical fault occurs at the remote end of the longest feeder but not operate in the lowest operation voltage. After the fault is cleared, the protective device can reset reliably. If the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, the setting should be set as phase-to-phase voltage. Please refer to Section “System Settings in Chapter 7 5.

[50BF.VCE.3U0_Set]

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when an unsymmetrical fault occurs at the remote end of the longest line. It should be larger than maximum residual voltage in normal operation mode. It is invalid if the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”. 6.

[50BF.VCE.U2_Set]

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when an unsymmetrical fault occurs at the remote end of the longest line. It should be larger than maximum negative sequence voltage in normal operation mode. 7.

[Bayn.50BF.I_Set]

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a fault occurring at the remote end of feeder or in LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater than maximum load under maximum fault level condition. In case of complying maximum load current will not meet the sensitivity requirement, sensitivity requirement has the priority. 8.

[Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]

3-67


3 Operation Theory

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is an earth fault occurring at the remote end of line or LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater than the maximum residual current in normal operation mode. 9.

[Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a phase-to-phase fault occurring at the remote end of line or LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater than the maximum negative sequence current in normal operation mode. 10.

[Bayn.50BF.En_3I0]

In order to improve the sensitivity of current criterion for asymmetric fault, this setting should be set as “1”. Especially for transformer or transmission line adopting phase-segregated tripping logic. 11.

[Bayn.50BF.En_I2]

In order to improve the sensitivity of current criterion for asymmetric fault, this setting should be set as “1”. Especially for transformer or transmission line adopting phase-segregated tripping logic. 

Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links Table 3.12-4 Function links of feeder breaker failure protection No. 1

Symbol 50BF.Link

Remark 1: Enabling feeder breaker failure protection 0: Disabling feeder breaker failure protection

For feeder breaker failure protection, the relation is “AND” among the function link [50BF.Link], the corresponding enabling binary input [50BF.BI_En] and the corresponding logic setting [50BF.En].

3.13 CT Circuit Supervision 3.13.1 Function Description 3.13.1.1 CT Circuit Failure 1.

If the check zone differential current of one phase is larger than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS], CT circuit failure alarm of corresponding phase [AlmH_CTS_X] (X=A, B or C) will be issued and BBP of corresponding phase will be blocked (if the logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as “1”) with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “1”, the alarm can be reset automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the CT circuit returns to normal condition.

2.

For the BC/BS that only one CT is available, if the check zone differential current of one phase is smaller than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS] and both discriminating zone differential currents of

3-68


3 Operation Theory

the phase of the two connected busbars are larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], BC/BS CT circuit failure alarm signal of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X] will be issued with a time delay of 5s and BBP will not be blocked, but the inter-connected operation mode will be enabled automatically. Under this situation, if any internal fault occurs on any of the two connected busbars, the device will not identify the faulty busbar. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “1”, the alarm can be reset automatically after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition. 3.

For the BC/BS that double CTs are available, if the check zone differential current of one phase is smaller than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS] and discriminating zone differential current of the phase of any connected busbar is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], if the discriminating zone differential current equals to the difference of current between the two CTs, BC/BS CT circuit failure alarm signal of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X] will be issued with a time delay of 5s and BBP of the busbar (of which the discriminating zone differential current of the phase is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS]) of corresponding phase will be blocked.

When “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) and VT circuit failure is not detected, CT circuit supervision will cease if VCE of any busbar operates. If “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during MOT configuration, CT circuit supervision will not be affected by voltage. 3.13.1.2 CT Circuit Abnormality 1.

If the check zone differential current of one phase is larger than the setting i.e. [I_AlmL_CTS], CT circuit abnormality alarm of corresponding phase [AlmL_CTS_X] (X=A, B or C) will be issued with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “1”, the alarm can be reset automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the CT circuit returns to normal condition.

2.

For the BC/BS that only one CT is available, if the check zone differential current of one phase is smaller than the setting [I_AlmL_CTS] and both discriminating zone currents of the phase of the two connected busbars are larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], BC/BS CT circuit abnormality alarm of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X] will be issued with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “1”, BC/BS CT circuit abnormality can be reset automatically after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be 3-69


3 Operation Theory

reset automatically after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition. 3.

For the BC/BS that double CTs are available, if the check zone differential current of one phase is smaller than the setting [I_AlmL_CTS] and discriminating zone differential current of the phase of any connected busbar is larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], if the discriminating zone differential current equals to the difference of current between the two CTs, BC/BS CT circuit abnormality alarm of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X] will be issued with a time delay of 5s.

4.

BBP will not be blocked when CT circuit is abnormal.

3.13.1.3 Discriminating Zone Differential Current High/Low Value Alarm (When Double CTs are Available for BC/BS) 1.

If discriminating zone differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], BBx differential current low value alarm signal [@BBx.AlmL_Diff] will be issued with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “1”, the alarm can be reset automatically after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition.

2.

If discriminating zone differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], BBx differential current high value alarm signal [@BBx.AlmH_Diff] will be issued with a time delay of 5s and discriminating zone differential circuit of BBx will be blocked (if the logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as “1”). If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “1”, the alarm can be reset automatically after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition, it can be reset by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition.

NOTICE! Logic execution priority: check zone CT circuit failure alarm logic > single-CT BC/BS CT circuit failure alarm to enable inter-connected operation mode logic > discriminating zone differential current high value alarm logic.

3-70


3 Operation Theory

3.13.2 Function Block Diagram CTS AlmH_CTS_X

Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn

@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X AlmL_CTS_X @BCy.AlmL_CTS_X @BBx.AlmH_Diff @BBx.AlmL_Diff @BSz.AlmH_CTS_X @BSz.AlmL_CTS_X

X=A, B or C 3.13.3 Logic

SET

Ida_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET

Idb_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET

Idc_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS]

5000ms 0

5000ms 0

5000ms 0

AlmH_CTS_A

AlmH_CTS_B

AlmH_CTS_C

Figure 3.13-1 Logic of CT circuit failure

Where: Ida_CZ: Phase-A check zone differential current Idb_CZ: Phase-B check zone differential current Idc_CZ: Phase-C check zone differential current I_AlmH_CTS: Current setting of CT circuit failure AlmH_CTS_A: Phase-A CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-A will be blocked by it if the logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as “1”. AlmH_CTS_B: Phase-B CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-B will be blocked by it if the logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as “1”. AlmH_CTS_C: Phase-C CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-C will be blocked by it if the logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as “1”. When double CTs are available for BC/BS, the following logic will be enabled.

3-71


3 Operation Theory

SET

Ida_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET

Idb_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET

Idc_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS]

5000ms 0

≥1

@BBx.AlmH_Diff

Figure 3.13-2 Logic of BBx differential current high value alarm

Where: Ida_BBx: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BBx Idb_BBx: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BBx Idc_BBx: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BBx @BBx.AlmH_Diff: BBx differential current high value alarm signal, individual zones of busbar differential protection will be blocked by differential current high value alarm of respective zones. The logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available) is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example). SET

Ida_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET

Ida_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS]

&

5000ms 0

@BC1.AlmH_CTS_A

& SET

Ida_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET

Idb_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET

Idb_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS]

&

5000ms 0

@BC1.AlmH_CTS_B

& SET


SET

Idc_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET

Idc_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS]

&

5000ms 0

@BC1.AlmH_CTS_C

& SET


Figure 3.13-3 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)

Where: Ida_BB1: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BB1 Idb_BB1: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BB1 Idc_BB1: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BB1 Ida_BB2: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BB2 3-72


3 Operation Theory

Idb_BB2: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BB2 Idc_BB2: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BB2 @BC1.AlmH_CTS_A: BC1 phase-A CT circuit failure. @BC1.AlmH_CTS_B: BC1 phase-B CT circuit failure. @BC1.AlmH_CTS_C: BC1 phase-C CT circuit failure. The logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available) is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).

SET

Ida_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET

Ida_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS] &

SIG

Ida_BB1=∣Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2∣

&

5s

0

5s

0

5s

0

@BC1.AlmH_CTS_A

≥1 SET

Ida_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS] &

SIG


SET

Idb_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET

Idb_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS] &

SIG

Idb_BB1=∣Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2∣

&

@BC1.AlmH_CTS_B

≥1 SET


SIG


SET

Idc_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]

SET


&

& SIG

Idc_BB1=∣Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2∣

&

@BC1.AlmH_CTS_C

≥1 SET


SIG


&

Figure 3.13-4 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)

Where: Ia_BC1_CT1: Phase-A current of CT1 of BC1 Ib_BC1_CT1: Phase-B current of CT1 of BC1 Ic_BC1_CT1: Phase-C current of CT1 of BC1 Ia_BC1_CT2: Phase-A current of CT2 of BC1 3-73


3 Operation Theory

Ib_BC1_CT2: Phase-B current of CT2 of BC1 Ic_BC1_CT2: Phase-C current of CT2 of BC1

SET

Ida_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET

Idb_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET

Idc_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS]

5000ms 0

5000ms 0

5000ms 0

AlmL_CTS_A

AlmL_CTS_B

AlmL_CTS_C

Figure 3.13-5 Logic of CT circuit abnormality

Where: Ida_CZ: Phase-A check zone differential current Idb_CZ: Phase-B check zone differential current Idc_CZ: Phase-C check zone differential current I_AlmL_CTS: Current setting of CT circuit abnormality AlmL_CTS_A: Phase-A CT circuit abnormality AlmL_CTS_B: Phase-B CT circuit abnormality AlmL_CTS_C: Phase-C CT circuit abnormality The logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available) is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).

3-74


3 Operation Theory

SET

Ida_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET

Ida_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS]

&

5000ms 0

@BC1.AlmL_CTS_A

& SET

Ida_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET

Idb_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET

Idb_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET


SET

Idc_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET

Idc_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS]

&

5000ms 0

@BC1.AlmL_CTS_B

&

&

5000ms 0

@BC1.AlmL_CTS_C

& SET


Figure 3.13-6 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)

Where: Ida_BB1: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BB1 Idb_BB1: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BB1 Idc_BB1: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BB1 Ida_BB2: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BB2 Idb_BB2: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BB2 Idc_BB2: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BB2 @BC1.AlmL_CTS_A: BC1 phase-A CT circuit abnormality @BC1.AlmL_CTS_B: BC1 phase-B CT circuit abnormality @BC1.AlmL_CTS_C: BC1 phase-C CT circuit abnormality The logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available) is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).

3-75


3 Operation Theory

SET

Ida_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET

Ida_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS] &

SIG


&

5s

0

5s

0

5s

0

@BC1.AlmL_CTS_A

≥1 SET

Ida_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS] &

SIG


SET

Idb_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET


SIG


& &

@BC1.AlmL_CTS_B

≥1 SET


SIG


SET

Idc_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]

SET


SIG


&

& &

@BC1.AlmL_CTS_C

≥1 SET


SIG


&

Figure 3.13-7 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)

3.13.4 I/O Signal Table 3.13-1 Output signal of CT circuit supervision No.

Signal

Description

1

AlmH_CTS

CT circuit failure

2

AlmH_CTS_A

Phase-A CT circuit failure

3

AlmH_CTS_B

Phase-B CT circuit failure

4

AlmH_CTS_C

Phase-C CT circuit failure

5

@BCy.AlmH_CTS

BCy CT circuit failure

6

@BCy.AlmH_CTS_A

BCy phase-A CT circuit failure

7

@BCy.AlmH_CTS_B

BCy phase-B CT circuit failure

8

@BCy.AlmH_CTS_C

BCy phase-C CT circuit failure

9

@BSz.AlmH_CTS

BSz CT circuit failure

10

@BSz.AlmH_CTS_A

BSz phase-A CT circuit failure

11

@BSz.AlmH_CTS_B

BSz phase-B CT circuit failure

12

@BSz.AlmH_CTS_C

BSz phase-C CT circuit failure

3-76



AlmL_CTS

CT circuit abnormality

14

AlmL_CTS_A

Phase-A CT circuit abnormality

15

AlmL_CTS_B

Phase-B CT circuit abnormality

16

AlmL_CTS_C

Phase-C CT circuit abnormality

17

@BCy.AlmL_CTS

BCy CT circuit abnormality

18

@BCy.AlmL_CTS_A

BCy phase-A CT circuit abnormality

19

@BCy.AlmL_CTS_B

BCy phase-B CT circuit abnormality

20

@BCy.AlmL_CTS_C

BCy phase-C CT circuit abnormality

21

@BSz.AlmL_CTS

BSz CT circuit abnormality

22

@BSz.AlmL_CTS_A

BSz phase-A CT circuit abnormality

23

@BSz.AlmL_CTS_B

BSz phase-B CT circuit abnormality

24

@BSz.AlmL_CTS_C

BSz phase-C CT circuit abnormality

25

@BBx.AlmH_Diff

BBx differential current high value alarm

26

@BBx.AlmL_Diff

BBx differential current low value alarm

3.14 VT Circuit Supervision 3.14.1 Function Description 1.

If negative sequence voltage (U2) of BBx is larger than 0.04Unn (Unn: secondary rated phase-to-phase voltage of VT) and fault detector element does not pick up, an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be issued with a time delay of 1.25s.

2.

If BBx is in service and the scalar sum of three phase-voltage (|UA|+|UB|+|UC|) of BBx is smaller than Un (Un: secondary rated phase-to-ground voltage of VT) and fault detector element does not pick up, an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be issued with a time delay of 1.25s.

3.

When the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, if busbar negative sequence voltage (U2) is larger than 0.04Unn, or any phase-to-phase voltage is smaller than 0.7Unn, an alarm [Alm_VTS_BB1] or [Alm_VTS_BB2] will be issued with a time delay of 1.25s.

If VT circuit failure is detected, DPFC voltage FD element will be disabled. When the three phase-voltage returns to normal condition, the alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be reset automatically with a time delay of 10s. If the fault detector element picks up due to a disturbance in the system (DPFC current is detected), the VT circuit supervision will be disabled for 3s.

3-77


3 Operation Theory

3.14.2 Function Block Diagram VTS Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn

@BBx.Alm_VTS


3.14.3 Logic SIG

Ua>0.7Un

SIG

Ub>0.7Un

SIG

Uc>0.7Un

SIG

IΨ_Bayn>0.04In

SIG EN

≥1

BBx is in service

&

│ Ua│ +│ Ub│ +│ Uc│ <

Un [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode]

≥1

SIG

Uab<0.7Unn

SIG

Ubc<0.7Unn

SIG

Uca<0.7Unn

SIG

U2>0.04Unn

SIG

1.25s 10s

&

&

@BBx.Alm_VTS

≥1

Any FD element picks up

Figure 3.14-1 Logic of VT circuit failure

Where: Ua: Phase-A voltage of BBx Ub: Phase-B voltage of BBx Uc: Phase-C voltage of BBx Uab, Ubc, Uca: Phase-to-phase voltage of BBx U2: Negative-sequence voltage of BBx Un: The rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT Unn: The rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of VT IΨ_Bayn: Any phase current of any feeder bay connected to BBx In: The rated secondary current of reference CT Any FD element picks up: Any fault detector element picks up @BBx.Alm_VTS: BBx VT circuit failure

3-78


3 Operation Theory

3.14.4 I/O Signal Table 3.14-1 Output signal of VT circuit supervision No. 1

Signal @BBx.Alm_VTS

Description BBx VT circuit failure

3.15 Position of Disconnector and Circuit Breaker NOTICE! The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the corresponding label settings. In Section 3.15, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. 3.15.1 Function Description In a substation with double-busbar layout, feeders may be switched from one busbar to the other busbar during operation. Thus it is necessary to identify the real time topology of busbar correctly. PCS-915 offers disconnector positions element and self-diagnosis function to assist in identifying the real time busbar topology. If BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector of the same feeder are closed at the same time (n≠m), an alarm signal [Alm_IntLink] will be issued simultaneously. If the two disconnectors returns to normal condition, the alarm will reset automatically. If an abnormality of disconnector position of bay n is detected, the disconnector position alarm [@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued simultaneously in any of the following cases. 1.

Current is detected in a feeder but the feeder has no disconnector positions for dual busbars (the two disconnectors that the feeder connect to the two busbar are open). In this case, the protective device will use the latest disconnector position instead and its validity will be checked based on the current distribution of the system.

2.

The discriminating zone differential current is larger than 0.08In and the check zone differential current is smaller than 0.06In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) due to one feeder of which the disconnector position is wrong, disconnector position alarm will be issued and the device can identify the correct disconnector position based on the current distribution of system. The logic diagram is shown in Figure 3.15-3.

If any disconnector position alarm is issued, if the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_DS] is set as “1” (refer to Section 3.5.6), once the abnormality of disconnector position disappears, the alarm will be reset automatically. if the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_DS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset unless energizing the disconnector position confirm binary input [BI_ConfirmDS] or carry out the disconnector position confirming command by navigating the path “Local Cmd”->“Confirm Disconnector”. 3-79


3 Operation Theory

Besides, in order to prevent the feeder from miss-operation caused by the lost of feeder disconnector position, regardless which busbar zone does the fault occur in, the feeders of which current is larger than 0.04*In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) but no disconnector position can be detected will be tripped. If dual-position BI for disconnector is disabled (refer to Section 3.3), only normally open auxiliary contact of disconnector is used to identify the position status. If dual-position BI for circuit breaker is disabled (refer to Section 3.3), only normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is used to identify the position status. If dual-position BI for disconnector (circuit breaker) is enabled (refer to Section 3.3), both normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector (circuit breaker) are used to identify the position status. If only normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is used to identify the position status, once normally closed auxiliary contact connected binary input is energized, the corresponding circuit breaker will be identified as open, otherwise it is closed. If only normally open auxiliary contact of disconnector is used to identify the position status, once normally open auxiliary contact connected binary input is energized, the corresponding disconnector will be identified as closed, otherwise it is open. If both normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector or circuit breaker are used to identify the position status, the following tables show the principle. Table 3.15-1 Position status of disconnector

Normally open auxiliary contact

Normally closed auxiliary

position status

contact

0

1

Open

1

0

Closed

0

0

the last valid memorized position

1

1

Closed

Table 3.15-2 Position status of circuit breaker

Normally open auxiliary contact

Normally closed auxiliary contact

position status

0

1

Open

1

0

Closed

0

0

Closed

1

1

Closed

If normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n circuit breaker is energized but current is still be detected in corresponding bay n, an alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_52b] will be issued without blocking the protective device. If the enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is configured and it is set as “1”, the disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2], if 3-80


3 Operation Theory

[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] is set as “1”, BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly, if [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2] is set as “1”, BB2 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly. When [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”, if [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2] are set as “1” at the same time, an alarm signal [Alm_IntLink] will be issued. If the enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is configured and it is set as “1”, [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2] are all set as “0”, but current is detected in bay n, disconnector position alarm [@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued simultaneously. If dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled (refer to Section 3.3), when circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance, the corresponding function link [@Bayn.Link_Maintenance] should be set as “1” and the circuit breaker will be regarded as open, otherwise the alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b] will be issued once circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance. If dual-position BI for circuit breaker is disabled, the function link [@Bayn.Link_Maintenance] is not configured. 3.15.2 Logic 3.15.2.1 Inter-connection Mode Alarm Logic

BI

Bay n is connected to BB1

@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1

& BI

@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1

& SIG

&

Dual-position DS

BI

@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB2

BI

@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB2

Alm_IntLink1

&

Bay n is connected to BB2 &

Figure 3.15-1 Logic of inter-connection mode alarm

Where: @Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1: Normally open auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n @Bayn.BI_89a_@BB2: Normally open auxiliary contact of BB2 disconnector of bay n @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1: Normally closed auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB2: Normally closed auxiliary contact of BB2 disconnector of bay n Dual-position DS: Dual-position for disconnector status, it can be configured during MOT configuration via PCS-Explorer software (refer to Section 3.3). Alm_IntLink1: BB1 disconnector and BB2 disconnector of the same feeder are closed at the same time

3-81


3 Operation Theory

3.15.2.2 Disconnector Position Alarm Logic

SIG

Bayn DS position changes

EN

En_AutoRecov_DS

&

SIG


≥1

Bayn.Alm_DS

& SIG


& SIG

IΨ_Bayn>0.04In

Figure 3.15-2 Logic of disconnector position alarm

Where: Bayn DS position changes: Disconnector position of bay n changes (from open change to closed or from closed change to open) En_AutoRecov_DS: 1: Logic setting of busbar differential protection. When it is set as “1”, if any disconnector position alarm is issued, once the abnormality of disconnector position disappears, the alarm will be reset automatically. When it is set as “0”, if any disconnector position alarm is issued, the alarm can not be reset unless energizing the disconnector position confirm binary input [BI_ConfirmDS] Bay n is connected to BB1, Bay n is connected to BB2: Please refer to the inter-connection mode alarm logic IΨ_Bayn: Any phase current of feeder bay n @Bayn.Alm_DS: Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal. 3.15.2.3 Disconnector Position Automatic Correction Logic Takes BB1 as an example

3-82


3 Operation Theory

SIG


SIG

Ida_CZ<0.06In

SIG

Idb_CZ<0.06In

SIG

Idc_CZ<0.06In

SIG

Ida_BB1>0.08In

SIG

Idb_BB1>0.08In

SIG

Idc_BB1>0.08In

SIG

Ida_BB2<0.08In

SIG

Idb_BB2<0.08In

SIG

Idc_BB2<0.08In

SIG

Ia_Bayn=Ida_BB1

SIG

Ib_Bayn=Idb_BB1

SIG

Ic_Bayn=Idc_BB1

&

&

≥1 &

Bay n is identified connected to BB1

&

&

SIG


SIG


≥1

Figure 3.15-3 Logic of automatic correction of disconnector position

Where: Ida_CZ: Phase-A check zone differential current Idb_CZ: Phase-B check zone differential current Idc_CZ: Phase-C check zone differential current Ida_BB1 (Ida_BB2): Phase-A discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2) Idb_BB1 (Idb_BB2): Phase-B discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2) Idc_BB1 (Idc_BB2): Phase-C discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2) Ia_Bayn: Phase-A current of feeder bay n Ib_Bayn: Phase-B current of feeder bay n Ic_Bayn: Phase-C current of feeder bay n Bay n is connected to BB1, Bay n is connected to BB2: Please refer to the inter-connection mode alarm logic 3.15.2.4 Dual-Position Alarm Logic Takes BB1 as an example

3-83


3 Operation Theory

SIG

BI

Dual-position DS

@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1 &

BI

@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1

BI

@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1

BI

@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1

SIG

Dual-position CB

BI

@Bayn.BI_52a

&

@Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BB1

&

@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b

≥1

&

& BI

@Bayn.BI_52b

BI

@Bayn.BI_52a

≥1

& BI

@Bayn.BI_52b

EN

@Bayn.Link_Maintenance

Figure 3.15-4 Logic of dual-position alarm

Where: Dual-position DS: Dual-position for disconnector status, it can be configured during MOT configuration via PCS-Explorer software (refer to Section 3.3). @Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1: Normally open auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1: Normally closed auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n Dual-position CB: Dual-position for circuit breaker status, it can be configured during MOT configuration via PCS-Explorer software (refer to Section 3.3). @Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx: Dual-position alarm for BB1 disconnector of bay n @Bayn.BI_52a: Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n @Bayn.BI_52b: Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n @Bayn.Link_Maintenance: Logic link to indicate circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance @Bayn.Alm_52a&52b: Dual-position alarm for circuit breaker of bay n 3.15.3 I/O Signal Table 3.15-3 Input signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker No.

Signal

Description

1

@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx


2

@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx


3-84


3 Operation Theory Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n. The input 3

@Bayn.BI_52a

signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic information configuration is set as “disable” (refer to Section 3.4). Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n. The input

4

@Bayn.BI_52b

signal is only configured if “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic information configuration is set as “disable” (refer to Section 3.4). Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n.

5

@Bayn.BI_A_52a

The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n.

6

@Bayn.BI_B_52a

The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n. The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker

7

@Bayn.BI_C_52a

is enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n.

8

@Bayn.BI_A_52b

The input signal is only configured if “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n.

9

@Bayn.BI_B_52b

The input signal is only configured if “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4). Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n.

10

@Bayn.BI_C_52b

The input signal is only configured if “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4).

11

BI_ConfirmDS

Disconnector position confirm binary input

Table 3.15-4 Output signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker No.

Signal

Description

1

@Bayn.Alm_DS

Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal.

2

Alm_DS

Disconnector position of any bay is abnormal.

3

Alm_IntLink

4

@Bayn.Alm_52b

BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector of the same feeder are closed at the same time Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is energized but

3-85


3 Operation Theory current can still be detected in bay n Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of bay n breaker 5

are energized or de-energized simultaneously for over 5s (if both

@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b

normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker are used to identify the position status) Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of BBx

6

@Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx

disconnector of bay n is energized or de-energized simultaneously for over s 5s

3.15.4 Settings 

Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links Table 3.15-5 Function link of circuit breaker No. 1

Symbol @Bayn.Link_Maintenance

Remark 1: Circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance. 0: Circuit breaker of bay n is not in maintenance. 1: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is enabled. The disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1]

2

@Bayn.Link_DS

and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2]. 0: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is disabled. The disconnector position will be decided by disconnector position binary input. 1: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly if

3

@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1

[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”. 0: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as open enforcedly if [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”. 1: BB2 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly if

4

@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2

[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”. 0: BB2 disconnector of bay n is taken as open enforcedly if [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”.

3.16 BC/BS Breaker Substitution and Bypass Breaker Substitution NOTICE! The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the corresponding label settings. In Section 3.16, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar.

3-86


3 Operation Theory

3.16.1 Function Description 3.16.1.1 BC/BS Breaker Substitution If BC/BS breaker is used temporarily to substitute one of feeder breakers through transfer bus, the binary input [BI_En_BC_Byp] should be energized. The binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be energized or de-energized according to the busbar arrangement. The polarity mark of feeder CT is on the busbar side, if the polarity mark of the substituted BC/BS CT is on the busbar side, the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be de-energized and BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminating zone differential current. If the polarity mark of the substituting BC/BS CT is on the feeder side, the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be energized and negative value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminating zone differential current. If BC/BS breaker is used temporarily to substitute one of feeder breakers, whether the positive value or the negative value of the substituting BC/BS current is calculated in discriminating zone differential current depends on the status of the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp]. If substituting disconnector of BBx [BI_89a_@BBx_Byp] is closed, the BC/BS breaker is substituting through BBx, and the BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminating zone differential current of BBx. When BC/BS breaker is used to substitute any of feeder breakers, the BC/BS bay will be treated as a feeder bay, BC/BS SOTF protection will quit and the DZP and BFP logic of the BC/BS bay will be changed to feeder DZP and BFP logic, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection are still reserved, which can be used as the protection function of the substituted feeder. In addition, some functions for BC/BS breaker is used as a tie breaker connecting two busbars are also quit (such as: tripping BC/BS breaker when busbar internal fault happens). NOTICE! [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be energized PRIOR to [BI_En_BC_Byp]. 1.

Energizing the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp]

3-87


3 Operation Theory

Transfer bus disconnector

Transfer Busbar

Protected zone

*

*

*

*

……

BB1

*

BC/BS BB2

Figure 3.16-1 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB2

The polarity mark of BC/BS CT is on the feeder side, the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be energized. Negative value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminative zone differential current of BB2. 2.

De-energizing the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp]

Transfer bus disconnector

Transfer Busbar

Protected zone

*

*

*

*

……

BB2

*

BC/BS BB1

Figure 3.16-2 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB1

The polarity mark of BC/BS CT is on the busbar side, the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should not be energized. Positive value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminative zone differential current of BB1.

3-88


3 Operation Theory

3.16.1.2 Bypass Breaker Substitution If dedicated bypass breaker is used to substitute one of feeder breakers through transfer bus, the polarity mark of bypass breaker CT should be on the busbar side. The CT of the substituted feeder can be located at the outside of the transfer bus disconnector (shown in Figure 3.16-3) or inside of the transfer bus disconnector (shown in Figure 3.16-4). The protected zone of the device is different due to the CT location is different (shown in the corresponding figure). If the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the outside of the transfer bus disconnector, the transfer busbar is in the protected zone. If bypass disconnector of BBx is closed, bypass breaker current will be calculated in discriminating zone differential current of BBx (bypass breaker current will not be calculated in check zone differential current). If bypass disconnector of BB1 and BB2 are closed at the same time, the alarm signal [Alm_IntLink1] will be issued. If transfer bus disconnector of bay n is closed, BB1 disconnector or BB2 disconnector of bay n is closed, and circuit breaker of bay n is closed, the alarm signal [Alm_IntLink2] or [Alm_IntLink3] will be issued. If feeder breaker of bay n is open and transfer bus disconnector of bay n is closed, feeder breakers of bay n is under substituted status, the current of bay n will only be calculated in check zone differential current and discriminating zone differential current of transfer busbar, no matter BB1 disconnector or BB2 disconnector of the bay is closed or open, the current of bay n will not be calculated in discriminating zone differential current of BB1 and BB2.

Protected zone *

*

*

* Transfer bus disconnector

Transfer Busbar

* ……

Bypass breaker

Bypass disconnector BB2

* BC/BS BB1

Figure 3.16-3 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the inside of the transfer bus disconnector)

If the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the inside of the transfer bus disconnector, the transfer busbar is not in the protected zone, the substituted feeder will be treated as same as other feeder bays.

3-89


3 Operation Theory

Transfer bus disconnector Transfer Busbar

*

*

Protected zone

*

*

*

……

Bypass breaker

Bypass disconnector BB2

* BC/BS BB1

Figure 3.16-4 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the outside of the transfer bus disconnector)

3.16.2 I/O Signal If feeder breaker of bay n is open and transfer bus disconnector of bay n is closed, feeder breakers of bay n is under substituted status, then if the transfer bus disconnector is open, substituted status alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_Byp] will be issued. The alarm signal is reset if the transfer bus disconnector is closed or feeder breaker of bay n is closed. Table 3.16-1 Input signal of breaker substitution No.

Signal

Description

1

@Bayn.BI_89a_Byp_@BBx

2

BI_En_BC_Byp

3

BI_En_RevCT_Byp

Normally open auxiliary contact of transfer bus disconnector of bay n Binary input indicating BC/BS breaker is used to substitute one of feeder breakers Reverse the polarity mark of BC/BS CT when BC/BS breaker is used to substitute one of feeder breakers

Table 3.16-2 Output signal of breaker substitution No.

Signal

Description If feeder breaker of bay n is open and transfer bus disconnector of bay n

1

@Bayn.Alm_Byp

is closed, feeder breakers of bay n is under substituted status, then if the transfer bus disconnector is open, substituted status alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_Byp] will be issued.

3.17 GOOSE and SV Function NOTICE! The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings 3-90


3 Operation Theory

and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the corresponding label settings. In Section 3.17, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. “@SVLink_Bm_n” is used to refer to the label setting of the SV communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m. “@GLink_Bm_n” is used to refer to the label setting of the GOOSE communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m. PCS-915 can accomplish the control of primary equipment, status exchange of each protection device and acquisition of binary inputs via GOOSE network. GOOSE receiving links and GOOSE sending links are provided for each bay which is used to control the GOOSE binary input and output. GOOSE and SV module (NR1136A) can be used for GOOSE & SV message transmission by point-to-point connection or via LAN. It can receive the sampled values (SV) from merging unit (MU), and it can also receive GOOSE signals from or send GOOSE signals to intelligent terminal unit. 3.17.1 The Effect of Data Abnormality In order to prevent the whole protection device from being blocked for abnormality of any data channel, only some relevant protection elements is blocked selectively according to the different abnormalities, the specific principle is as follows: 1)

If the SV message is invalid, the invalid SV message will be displayed and it will not be cleared.

2)

If any voltage channel is abnormal, the protection will not be blocked and the corresponding voltage controlled element will be released.

3)

If current channel of feeder m is abnormal, busbar differential protection will be disabled, the integrated protections (such as feeder breaker failure protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection) of concerned bay will be disabled automatically whereas the protections of other healthy bays remains available.

4)

If current channel of BC/BS is abnormal, BC/BS protection will be blocked and inter-connection operation mode will be enabled automatically.

3.17.2 Out of Service of a Bay If bay n is in service, set the function link [@Bayn.Link_On] as “1”. if bay n is out of service, set the function link [@Bayn.Link_On] as “0”, the current of the corresponding bay will be excluded for differential protection calculation but the actual sampling data can still be displayed, all the GOOSE sending and receiving of bay n will be interrupted and all the GOOSE and SV alarm signals of bay n will be shielded. If bay n is out of service ([@Bayn.Link_On]=0) and current is still detected (larger than 0.04In) in bay n, an alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_Out] will be issued and the current will be included for differential protection calculation.

3-91


3 Operation Theory

3.17.3 Maintenance Binary Input 

GOOSE signal

If the status of the maintenance binary input [BI_Maintenance] of the sending end does not equals to that of the receiving end, the received GOOSE signal is invalid. 

SV sampling

When bay n is in service, if the status of the maintenance binary input [BI_Maintenance] of the device does not equals to that of the MU of corresponding bay, the received sampling data is invalid, alarm signal will be issued and current differential protection and other protections of the bay will be blocked. 3.17.4 I/O Signal Table 3.17-1 Output signal of GOOSE and SV function No.

Signal

1

@SVLink_Bm_n.Alm_Off_SV

2

@SVLink_Bm_nAlm_Maintenance_SV

3

@GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_ADisc

4

@GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_BDisc

Description Corresponding bay is out of service, but current is still detected (larger than 0.04In) Corresponding bay is in servicebut the corresponding MU is in maintenance state Network A of corresponding GOOSE link is disconnected, the protection will not be blocked Network B of corresponding GOOSE link is disconnected, the protection will not be blocked The alarm signal will be issued if any of the following conditions is satisfied. Configuration version of two ends (the GOOSE receiving end and the GOOSE sending end) are inconsistent.

5

@GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_Cfg

The number of data of received message is not equal to that configured in the receiving control block. Failed to analyze the data segment of received message. For example, the data type of received message is mismatch with that configured in the receiving control block.

6

Bx.GAlm_CfgFile_PL

7

Bx.GAlm_AStorm_PL

8

Bx.GAlm_BStorm_PL

9

Bx.SVAlm_CfgFile

10

@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_ADisc

Internal GOOSE configuration file of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x) is wrong Network storm occurs on GOOSE network A of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x) Network storm occurs on GOOSE network B of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x) Internal SV configuration file of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x) is wrong Network A of MU of corresponding bay is disconnected

3-92



@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_BDisc

Network B of MU of corresponding bay is disconnected

12

@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Data

13

@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_SynLoss

The MU of corresponding bay lose synchronism signal

14

@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_InvalidSample

the sampled data from MU of corresponding bay is invalid

15

@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Jitter_Ch

Sampling frame jittering alarm signal

16

@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_TimeLag_Ch

Channel delay of corresponding bay changes or out of range

17

Bx.SVAlm_Overall_PL

18

Bx.GAlm_Overall_PL

Sampled values of corresponding bay n error (time over, decoding error or interpolation time scale error)

The overall SV alarm signal of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x) The overall GOOSE alarm signal of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)

3.17.5 Settings 

Function Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links Table 3.17-2 Function link No.

Symbol

Remark 1: Bay n is put into service.

1

@Bayn.Link_On

0: Bay n is out of service. It is configured when digital sampling mode is adopted.



GOOSE Sending Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Send Links Table 3.17-3 GOOSE sending link No.



Symbol

Remark

1

@Bayn.GLink_Send_Trp

GOOSE sending link of tripping of bay n

2

@Bayn.GLink_Send_TT

GOOSE sending link of transfer tripping of bay n

GOOSE Receiving Link

Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Recv Links GOOSE receiving links will changed according to the specific project, so it is not listed here. Users can see the GOOSE receiving links of each project via the PCS-Explorer software).

3-93


3 Operation Theory

3-94


4 Supervision

4 Supervision Table of Contents 4 Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-a 4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Protective Device Supervision ....................................................................... 4-1 4.2.1 Hardware Supervision ......................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2.2 Opto-coupler Supply Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-1 4.2.3 Binary Output Supervision ................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2.4 Setting Supervision .............................................................................................................. 4-1 4.2.5 Hardware Configuration Supervision................................................................................... 4-2

4.3 AC Circuit Supervision ................................................................................... 4-2 4.3.1 Voltage and Current Drift Supervision and Auto-adjustment............................................... 4-2 4.3.2 Sample Supervision ............................................................................................................. 4-2

4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision ...................................................................... 4-2 4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) .............................................................................. 4-2 4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS).............................................................................. 4-2 4.4.3 Disconnector Position Supervision ...................................................................................... 4-2

4.5 Handle Alarm ................................................................................................... 4-3

List of Tables Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report ........................................................................................... 4-3


4-a Date: 2015-03-07

4 Supervision

4-b


4 Supervision

4.1 Overview PCS-915 is a microprocessor based busbar protection which can provide successive automatic supervision to the protected object to ensure the power system can quickly restore from any fault to normal state. When the device is in energizing process before the LED “HEALTHY” is lightened, the equipment needs to be checked to ensure no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system when startup and during normal operation, plays an important role. A minor abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other functions can still work and alarm output contacts [BO_ALM] in PWR module will be given. However, if severe hardware failure or abnormality are detected, all protection functions will be blocked and the LED “HEALTHY” will be extinguished and blocking output contacts [BO_FAIL] in PWR module will be given. The protective device then cannot work normally and maintenance is required to eliminate the failure. When an abnormality or a failure is detected by automatic supervision, besides alarm output contacts or blocking output contacts are energized, it is also followed with an LCD message and LED indication, at the same time event recording will record the failure alarm which can be viewed in event recording report and be printed.

4.2 Protective Device Supervision 4.2.1 Hardware Supervision The automatic supervision function can provide monitoring of all chips on DSP module to ensure they are healthy. Corresponding alarm signal [Bx.Fail_DSP] will be issued with the device being blocked if any damages or errors are detected.

4.2.2 Opto-coupler Supply Supervision The automatic supervision can continuously monitor the positive power supply of opto-coupler, if a failure or damage is detected, the alarm signal [Bx.Alm_OptoDC] will be issued (x is the slot No. of corresponding binary input module).

4.2.3 Binary Output Supervision The state of binary outputs of each BO module is continuously monitored. If any abnormality is detected, the alarm signals [Bx.Fail_Output] will be issued with device being blocked (x is the slot No. of corresponding BO module).

4.2.4 Setting Supervision The relay has 10 setting groups, while only one is active at the same time. The settings of active setting group are checked, if any is out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal [Fail_Setting_OvRange] will be issued with the protective device be blocked. If the EEPROM on DSP module is damaged, it will lead to any summation error of all setting groups, the alarms [B02.Fail_Settings] (protection DSP module) or [B03.Fail_Settings] (fault PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

4-1 Date: 2015-03-07

4 Supervision

detector DSP module) will be issued with the protective device blocked.

4.2.5 Hardware Configuration Supervision Module configuration is checked automatically during device initialization, if the plug-in module configuration is not consistent with the design drawing of a specific project, the alarm signal [Fail_BoardConfig] is issued with the device being blocked.

4.3 AC Circuit Supervision 4.3.1 Voltage and Current Drift Supervision and Auto-adjustment The voltage and current drift are influenced by the variation of temperature or other environment factors. PCS-915 can continually and automatically trace the drift value and adjust it to normal value.

4.3.2 Sample Supervision The device can provide monitoring of AC current and voltage samplings for protection DSP module and fault detector DSP module. If the detected values of bay n are wrong or inconsistent, an alarm [@Bayn.Fail_Sample] will be issued and the relay will be blocked.

4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision 4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) The VTS logic in the relay is used to detect the VT secondary circuit to ensure that voltage measured is the actual value of power system. When VT failure is detected, device can automatically adjust the configuration of protective elements of which the stability would be affected and might lead to mal-operation. Please refer to Section 3.14 for detail.

4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) The CTS logic can detect the CT secondary circuit to ensure the measured current is the actual value of power system. The main purpose of CTS is to ensure the integrity of the CT circuits maintaining the performance of protective equipment. Please refer to Section 3.13 for details.

4.4.3 Disconnector Position Supervision Disconnector position is monitored by the automatic supervision function to ensure the correct operation of protective device. Please refer to Section “Position of disconnector and circuit breaker” in Chapter 3 for details.

4-2


4 Supervision

4.5 Handle Alarm PCS-915 can provide self-supervision of hardware circuit and device operation status. When any unnormal condition is detected, the fault information or report can be displayed and a corresponding alarm will be issued. NOTICE! If alarm signal is issued with equipment being blocked, please try to make a fault diagnosis by referring the issued alarm messages BUT NOT simply reboot or re-power the relay. If user cannot find the failure reason on site, please inform the manufacturer or the agent for maintenance. Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report Indicator LED No.

Alarm Message

Repairmen

Meaning Description HEALTHY

MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

suggestion

DS ALM

The signal is issued with

other

alarm 1

Fail_Device

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

The device fails.

specific

signals,

please refer handling other

and

to the

suggestion

specific

alarm

signals. The signal is issued with

other

alarm 2

Alm_Device

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

The device is abnormal.

signals,

please refer handling other

specific and

to the

suggestion

specific

alarm

signals. PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Protection

4-3

4 Supervision Indicator LED No.

Alarm Message

Repairmen


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

suggestion

DS ALM

Users may

pay

no

attention to the alarm signal in the project commissioning stage, but it is needed to download

the

latest

package file (including correct

version

checksum

file)

provided 3

Alm_Version

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

by

R&D

The error is found during checking the

engineer to make the

version of software downloaded to the

alarm signal disappear.

device.

Then users get the correct version.

software It

is

not

allowed that the alarm signal is issued on the device

already

has

been put into service. the

devices

having

being put into service so that the alarm signal disappears. 4

4-4

Alm_Insuf_Memory

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

The memory of MON plug-in module is

Please replace MON

insufficient.

plug-in module.



Alarm Message

Repairmen


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

suggestion

DS ALM

Please

check

the

settings mentioned in the prompt message on the LCD, and go to 5

Fail_SettingItem_Chgd

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

After configure file is updated, settings

the menu “Settings”

of the file and settings saved on the

and select “Confirm

device are not matched.

Settings”

item

to

confirm settings. Then, the device will restore to

normal

operation

stage. Please

reset

setting

values according to the range described in the instruction then 6

Fail_Setting_OvRange

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Setting value is out of setting scope.

manual,

re-power

or

reboot the equipment and

the

alarm

message disappear

will and

the

equipment will restore to

normal

operation

state. 7

Alm_Settings_MON

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Protection

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Management procedure will upload and

Put

the

protective

check the parameters and settings of

device out of service at

4-5


Alarm Message

Repairmen


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

suggestion

DS ALM each protection plug-in module

once.

Inform

the

regularly, if the parameters and settings

factory or agency to

are inconsistent, the alarm signal will be

maintain it.

issued. 8

Process_Exit

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

9

Alm_MON

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

System process of MON module exits. MON

module

is

under

abnormal

condition. Mismatch between the configuration of

10

Fail_BoardConfig

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

plug-in

boards

and

the

designing

drawing of a specific project. 11

Bx.Fail_Board

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

12

@Bayn.Fail_Sample

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Binary output or input module located in slot No.x works abnormally. Sampled value of bay n is different between two DSP modules. Sampled value of CT1 of bay n is

13

@Bayn.Fail_Sample_CT1

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

different between two DSP modules (for double-CT BC/BS). Sampled value of CT2 of bay n is

14

@Bayn.Fail_Sample_CT2

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

different between two DSP modules (for double-CT BC/BS).

15

@BBx.Fail_VoltSample

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

16

Fail_Sample

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

4-6

Sampling value of voltage of BBx is different between two DSP modules. Sampled value of

protection DSP

module or fault detector DSP module



Alarm Message

Repairmen


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

suggestion

DS ALM errors. Driving transistors of binary output

17

Bx.Fail_Output

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

module

located

in

slot

No.x

are

damaged. 18

B02.Fail_Settings

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

19

B03.Fail_Settings

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

20

Bx.Fail_DSP

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

The EEPROM in the DSP module located in slot No.2 is damaged. The EEPROM in the DSP module located in slot No.3 is damaged. DSP chip of the DSP module located in slot No.x is under abnormal condition. No special treatment is

21

Alm_CommTest

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

needed, and only wait

The relay is in test mode.

for the completion of testing. Step1: check whether the

selected

clock

synchronization mode matches 22

Alm_TimeSyn

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Time alarm.

synchronization

abnormality

the

clock

synchronization source; Step 2: check whether the wiring connection between equipment clock


the and

the

synchronization 4-7


Alarm Message

Repairmen


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

suggestion

DS ALM

source is correct; Step 3: check whether the setting for selecting clock

synchronization

(i.e. [Opt_TimeSyn]) is set correctly. If there is no

clock

synchronization, please set the setting [Opt_TimeSyn] as “No TimeSyn”. Please refer to other 23

Fail_Pkp

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Device is blocked for over 10s.

alarm signal to confirm the blocking reason.

Alarm 24

Alm_Maintenance

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

signal

indicating

that

the

equipment is in maintenance state (the

Check the binary input

binary

[BI_Maintenance].

input

[BI_Maintenance]

is

energized.

25

Bx.Alm_OptoDC

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Power supply of the opto-couplers for

Check the power circuit

binary input module located in slot No.x

of the DC module and

is abnormal.

I/O module.

External binary input of blocking BBP 26

87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

[87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized for over 1s.

27 4-8

87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Alarm signal indicating that differential

Check the binary input of blocking BBP. Check CT secondary



Alarm Message


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

DS ALM

Repairmen suggestion

current FD element picks up for over

circuit

10s.

polarity.

includes

CT

CT circuit failure, refer to Section

28

AlmH_CTS

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

29

AlmH_CTS_A

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

Phase-A CT circuit failure

30

AlmH_CTS_B

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

Phase-B CT circuit failure

31

AlmH_CTS_C

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

Phase-C CT circuit failure

32

AlmL_CTS

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

33

AlmL_CTS_A

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Phase-A CT circuit abnormality

34

AlmL_CTS_B

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Phase-B CT circuit abnormality

35

AlmL_CTS_C

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Phase-C CT circuit abnormality

Check CT secondary

@BCy.AlmH_CTS

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

BCy CT circuit failure, refer to Section

circuit.

36 37

@BCy.AlmH_CTS_A

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

BCy phase-A CT circuit failure

38

@BCy.AlmH_CTS_B

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

BCy phase-B CT circuit failure

39

@BCy.AlmH_CTS_C

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

BCy phase-C CT circuit failure

40

@BCy.AlmL_CTS

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

41

@BCy.AlmL_CTS_A

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

BCy phase-A CT circuit abnormality

42

@BCy.AlmL_CTS_B

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

BCy phase-B CT circuit abnormality

43

@BCy.AlmL_CTS_C

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

BCy phase-C CT circuit abnormality


3.13.1.1

CT circuit abnormality, refer to Section 3.13.1.2.

3.13.1.1.

BCy CT circuit abnormality, refer to Section 3.13.1.2.

4-9


Alarm Message


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

DS ALM


BSz CT circuit failure, refer to Section

44

@BSz.AlmH_CTS

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

45

@BSz.AlmH_CTS_A

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

BSz phase-A CT circuit failure

46

@BSz.AlmH_CTS_B

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

BSz phase-B CT circuit failure

47

@BSz.AlmH_CTS_C

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

BSz phase-C CT circuit failure

48

@BSz.AlmL_CTS

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

49

@BSz.AlmL_CTS_A

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

BSz phase-A CT circuit abnormality

50

@BSz.AlmL_CTS_B

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

BSz phase-B CT circuit abnormality

51

@BSz.AlmL_CTS_C

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

BSz phase-C CT circuit abnormality

3.13.1.1.

BSz CT circuit abnormality, refer to Section 3.13.1.2.

Differential current high value alarm 52

@BBx.AlmH_Diff

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

signal of BBx, please refer to Section 3.13.1.3. Differential current low value alarm

53

@BBx.AlmL_Diff

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

signal of BBx, please refer to Section 3.13.1.3.

54

55

@BBx.Alm_VTS

@BBx.Alm_VCE

GREEN

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

OFF

BBx VT circuit failure, refer to Section 3.14.1.

Check VT secondary

VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up

circuit.

for over 3s. Alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled.

56

87B.Alm_Off

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

If the logic setting [87B.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once BBP is disabled (BBP

4-10

Check whether BBP is disabled.



Alarm Message

Repairmen


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

suggestion

DS ALM can be disabled by the corresponding enabling binary input, function link or enabling logic setting), the alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled will be issued.

57

@Bayn.Alm_Cls

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Closing binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10s.

Check whether binary input of closing of bay n is always energized Check

58

@Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

whether

the

Alarm signal indicating that feeder DZP

measured

current

FD of bay n picks up for over 10s.

equals to the actual current.

59

@BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Alarm signal indicating that FD element

Check

for SOTF protection of BCy picks up for

setting [50SOTF.I_Set]

over 10s.

is

reasonable

check Alarm signal indicating that FD element 60

@BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

for SOTF protection of BSz picks up for over 10s.

61

62


@Bayn.50/51G.Alm_Pkp


GREEN

GREEN

YELLOW

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

whether

and

whether

measured

the

the

current

equals to the actual current.

Alarm signal indicating that phase

Check

overcurrent FD element of bay n picks

corresponding current

up for over 10s.

setting is reasonable

Alarm signal indicating that ground

and check whether the

overcurrent FD element of bay n picks

measured

up for over 10s.

equals to the actual

whether

the

current

4-11


Alarm Message

Repairmen


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

suggestion

DS ALM

current. Alarm

63

@Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

signal

indicating

that

PD

protection FD element of bay n picks up

Check

for over 10s (i.e. pole disagreement

corresponding

binary

disagreement

input

of

bay

n

[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized for

the pole binary

input.

over 10s). 64

65

@BCy.Alm_BI_BFI

@BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI

GREEN

GREEN

YELLOW

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Binary input of initiating BCy BFP is energized for over 10s.

Check the contact of

The common initiating contact of BFP of

initiating

BCy is continually energized for over

externally.

BC

BFP

10s. 66

67

@BSz.Alm_BI_BFI

@BSz.Alm_BI_ChkBFI

GREEN

GREEN

YELLOW

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Binary input of initiating BSz BFP is energized for over 10s.



initiating

BSz is continually energized for over

externally.

BS

BFP

10s. Check the contact of initiating 68

@BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BCy BFP picks up for over 10s.

BC

BFP

externally and check whether the protective element

(which

can

initiate BC BFP) drops off.

4-12



Alarm Message

Repairmen


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

suggestion

DS ALM

Check the contact of initiating 69

@BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BSz BFP picks up for over 10s.

BS

BFP

externally and check whether the protective element

(which

can

initiate BS BFP) drops off. 70

71

@Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI

@Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI

GREEN

GREEN

YELLOW

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Binary input of initiating contact of BFP of bay n is energized for over 10s.



initiating feeder BFP

bay n is continually energized for over

externally.

10s. Check the contact of Binary 72

50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

input

of

releasing

voltage

releasing

voltage

controlled element of breaker failure

controlled element of

protection is energized for over 10s.

breaker

failure

protection. Check the contact of initiating feeder BFP 73

50BF.Alm_Pkp

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Alarm signal indicating that FD element

externally and check

for BFP of bay n picks up for over 10s

whether the protective element

(which

can

initiate BFP) drops off. 74

50BF.Alm_Off


GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is

Check whether BFP is

disabled.

disabled.

If

the

logic

setting

4-13


Alarm Message

Repairmen


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

suggestion

DS ALM [50BF.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once feeder BFP is disabled (feeder BFP can be disabled by the corresponding enabling binary input, function link or enabling logic setting), the alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled will be issued.

75

@Bayn.Alm_DS

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal. Check auxiliary contact BBn

76

Alm_IntLink

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

disconnector

and

BBm

of disconnector.

disconnector of the same feeder are closed at the same time. Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay

77

78

@Bayn.Alm_52b

@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b

GREEN

GREEN

YELLOW

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

n breaker is energized but current can still be detected in bay n.

Check auxiliary contact

Normally closed and normally open

of circuit breaker of bay

auxiliary contact of bay n breaker are

n.

energized

or

de-energized

simultaneously for over 5s. Normally closed and normally open 79

@Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n is energized or de-energized simultaneously for over 5s.

80

4-14

@Bayn.Alm_Byp

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Check auxiliary contact of disconnector of bay n

If feeder breaker of bay n is open and

Check the transfer bus

transfer bus disconnector of bay n is

disconnector.



Alarm Message

Repairmen


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

suggestion

DS ALM closed, feeder breakers of bay n is under substituted status, then if the transfer bus disconnector is open, substituted

status

alarm

signal

[@Bayn.Alm_Byp] will be issued. Following alarm signals are configured only for digital substation “@SVLink_Bm_n” is used to refer to the label setting of the SV communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m. “@GLink_Bm_n” is used to refer to the label setting of the GOOSE communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m. Corresponding bay is in service but the 81

@SVLink_Bm_n.Alm_Maintenance_SV

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

corresponding MU is in maintenance state

82

@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_ADisc

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

83

@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_BDisc

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

84

@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Data

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Network A of MU of corresponding bay is disconnected Network B of MU of corresponding bay is disconnected

Check

Sampled values of corresponding bay n

corresponding

error (time over, decoding error or

check the optical fiber

interpolation time scale error)

connected to it.

MU,

The MU of corresponding bay lose

85

@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_SynLoss

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

86

@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_InvalidSample

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

87

@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Jitter_Ch

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Sampling frame jittering alarm signal

88

@SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_TimeLag_Ch

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Channel delay of corresponding bay


the

synchronism signal the

sampled

data

from

MU

of

corresponding bay is invalid

4-15


Alarm Message

Repairmen


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

suggestion

DS ALM changes or out of range

89

Bx.SVAlm_CfgFile

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Internal SV configuration file of Bx (Bx

Inform commissioning

means GOOSE and SV module that

personnel to check the

located in slot No.x) is wrong.

SV configuration file.

Network A of corresponding GOOSE 90

91

@GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_ADisc

@GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_BDisc

GREEN

GREEN

YELLOW

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

link is disconnected, the protection will

Check the intelligent

not be blocked

terminal unit, check the

Network B of corresponding GOOSE

optical fiber connected

link is disconnected, the protection will

to them.

not be blocked The alarm signal will be issued if any of the following conditions is satisfied. Configuration version of two ends (the GOOSE receiving end and the GOOSE sending end) are inconsistent. The number 92

@GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_Cfg

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

of

data of received

message is not equal to that configured in the receiving control block. Failed to analyze the data segment of received message. For example, the

Inform commissioning personnel to check the GOOSE configuration file.

data type of received message is mismatch with that configured in the receiving control block. 93

4-16

Bx.GAlm_CfgFile_PL

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Internal GOOSE configuration file of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV module that PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay


Alarm Message


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

DS ALM


located in slot No.x) is wrong. Network storm occurs on GOOSE 94

Bx.GAlm_AStorm_PL

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

network A of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x).

Check

the

corresponding GOOSE Network storm occurs on GOOSE 95

Bx.GAlm_BStorm_PL

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

network.

network B of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x). The overall SV alarm signal of Bx (Bx

96

97

Bx.SVAlm_Overall_PL

Bx.GAlm_Overall_PL

GREEN

GREEN

YELLOW

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

means GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)

Refer to other GOOSE

The overall GOOSE alarm signal of Bx

or SV alarm signal

(Bx means GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)


4-17

4 Supervision

4-18


5 Measurement and Recording

5 Measurement and Recording Table of Contents 5 Measurement and Recording........................................................... 5-a 5.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 5-1 5.2 Measurement ................................................................................................... 5-1 5.2.1 Analogue Input Quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ....................................... 5-1 5.2.2 Phase Angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ............................................................. 5-2 5.2.3 Debug Values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 .......................................................... 5-2

5.3 Event & fault Records ..................................................................................... 5-3 5.3.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.3.2 Event Recording .................................................................................................................. 5-3 5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording ........................................................................................ 5-3 5.3.4 Present Recording ............................................................................................................... 5-5


5-a Date: 2013-12-13


5-b



5.1 General Description PCS-915 busbar protection can provide auxiliary functions such as on-line data metering, binary input status, event and disturbance recording, to meet the demands of the modern power grid requirements.

5.2 Measurement PCS-915 can provide continuous measurements of analogue input quantities. The measurement data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or by the software interface on the local or remote PC. The analog quantities will be displayed as RMS values of the secondary side of CT. Equipment samples 24 points per cycle. The RMS value is calculated in each interval and the LCD display will be updated in every 0.5 second. Users can view the measured data on LCD by navigating the menu “Measurements”, or by PCS-Explorer software or substation automatic system (SAS) software. By navigating the path “Settings”->“Device Setup” ->“Comm Settings”, primary or secondary sampled values can be selected to display by configuring the setting [Opt_Display_Status]. PCS-915 has two DSP modules that are protection DSP module (DSP module 1) and fault detector DSP module (DSP module 2), the sampling values of both modules can be displayed on LCD through different access menu. NOTICE! If the communication setting [Opt_Display_Status] is not configured, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value by default. If the setting is set as “0”, the sampled values are displayed as primary value; if this setting is set as “1”, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value. NOTICE! The bay label of displayed sampled values will change according to the label settings of each bay and busbar. In section 5.2, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.

5.2.1 Analogue Input Quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 Item

Rotation

Description

Id_CZ

A,B,C

Three-phase check zone differential currents

@BBx.Id

A,B,C

Three-phase discriminating zone differential currents of BBx

@BBx.UP

A,B,C

Three phase voltages of BBx

@Bayn.IP

A,B,C

Three phase currents of bay n


5-1 Date: 2013-12-13

5 Measurement and Recording @Bayn.IP_CT1

A,B,C

Three phase currents of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@Bayn.IP_CT2

A,B,C

Three phase currents of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

Access path: MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Measured Values MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Measured Values

5.2.2 Phase Angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 When voltage is sampled by the device and phase A voltage of BB1 is larger than a certain value, the phase A voltage of BB1 will be taken as a reference; if the phase A voltage of BB1 is smaller than the certain value and the phase A voltage of BB2 is larger than the certain value, the phase A voltage of BB2 will be taken as a reference; and so forth. When voltage is not sampled by the device, if the currents of some feeder are larger than a certain value, the phase A current of the feeder (takes the feeder whose number is minimal) will be taken as a reference. Item

Rotation

Description If the phase A voltage of BBx is taken as a reference, the displayed value of“AngRef” is “x”, If phase A voltage of all busbars are all smaller than a certain value, the displayed value of “AngRef” is “0”.

AngRef

If the phase A current of feeder m is taken as a reference, the displayed value of “AngRef” is “m” (m=01, 02, 03, ……), if all the currents are smaller than a certain value, the displayed value of “AngRef” is “0”.

@Bayn.Ang(IP)

A,B,C

The phase angle of current of bay n

@Bayn.Ang(IP_CT1)

A,B,C

The phase angle of current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@Bayn.Ang(IP_CT2)

A,B,C

The phase angle of current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@BBx.Ang(UP)

A,B,C

The phase angle of voltage of BBx

Access path: MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Phase Angle MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Phase Angle

5.2.3 Debug Values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 The debug values are usually provided for commission person for reference. Item

Rotation

Description

@Bayn.I2

Negative sequence current of bay n

@Bayn.I2_CT1

Negative sequence current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@Bayn.I2_CT2

Negative sequence current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@Bayn.3I0

Residual current of bay n

5-2


5 Measurement and Recording @Bayn.3I0_CT1

Residual current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@Bayn.3I0_CT2

Residual current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)

@BBx.U2x

Negative sequence voltage of BBx

@BBx.3U0

Residual voltage of BBx

Access path: MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Cal Values MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Cal Values

5.3 Event & fault Records 5.3.1 Introduction PCS-915 is capable of providing fault and disturbance recording, event recording and present recording for the protected objects. All the recorded information except for waveform can be viewed on local LCD or by printing. Waveform must be printed or be extracted using PCS-Explorer software and a waveform software.

5.3.2 Event Recording The device can store up to 1024 abnormality alarm reports and 1024 binary input status changing reports respectively. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the available space is fully occupied, the oldest report is automatically overwritten by the latest one. 

Abnormality alarm reports

Abnormality detected during relay self-supervision, secondary circuit abnormality or protection alarm element will be logged as individual events. 

Binary input status changing reports

When binary input status changes, the changed information will be displayed on LCD and logged as binary input change report at the same time.

5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording 5.3.3.1 Application Users can use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the power network and related primary and secondary device during and after a disturbance. Analyzing on the recorded data can help to resolve practical problem. 5.3.3.2 Design Disturbance recorder is consisted of tripping report and fault waveform and it is triggered by fault detector. The device can store 32 pieces of trip reports and waveforms in non-volatile memory. When protection operates, the operating information will be displayed on LCD and logged as trip record at same time, which can be viewed in trip report. Here fault recording includes two kinds of PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

5-3 Date: 2013-12-13


cases: 1)

Only the fault detector element operates.

2)

The fault detector element operates along with the operation of protective elements.

1.

Trip record capacity and information

The device can store 32 pieces of trip reports in non-volatile memory. If a new fault occurs when the spaces are fully occupied, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one. A complete trip record includes the following items: 1)

Sequence number

Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the report and displayed on LCD screen. 2)

Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock. Initiating date and time is when a fault detector picks up. The relative time is the time when protection element operates to send tripping signal after fault detector picks up. 3)

Faulty phase

The faulty phase detected by the operating element is shown in the record report. 4)

Operating time

It is the relative time when protection element operates to send tripping signal relative to fault detector element operating, the operating time of output relay is not included. 5)

Protection element

The protection element that issues the tripping command will be shown. If no protection element operates to trip but only fault detector element operates, the fault report will record the title of fault detector element. 6)

Tripping element

The tripped elements (feeder or bus coupler) are also shown. 2.

Fault waveform record capacity and information

MON module of the relay can store 32 pieces of fault waveform in non-volatile memory. Phase current of each bay, check zone differential current, discriminative zone differential current and buabar voltages (if voltage is used) will be recorded in waveform. If a new fault occurs when 32 fault waveform recorders have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one. Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc. Each time recording includes 2-cycle pre-fault waveform, and up to 250 cycles can be recorded.

5-4



5.3.4 Present Recording Present recording is used to record the waveform of present operating device which can be triggered manually on LCD of device or remotely through PCS-Explorer software. Recording content of present recording is same to that of disturbance recording. Each time recording includes 2-cycle waveform before triggering, and up to 250 cycles can be recorded.


5-5 Date: 2013-12-13


5-6


6 Hardware

6 Hardware Table of Contents 6 Hardware ............................................................................................ 6-a 6.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 6-1 6.2 Typical Wiring .................................................................................................. 6-5 6.2.1 Typical Wiring of 8U PCS-915 (For reference only) ............................................................ 6-5 6.2.2 Typical Wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915 (For reference only) ..................................................... 6-7 6.2.3 CT Requirement .................................................................................................................. 6-9

6.3 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition ............................................................. 6-10 6.3.1 PWR Module (Slot P1: NR1301) ....................................................................................... 6-10 6.3.2 MON Module (Slot No.01: NR1101 or NR1102) ................................................................ 6-12 6.3.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D) ...................................... 6-14 6.3.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D) ................................ 6-14 6.3.5 CAN Module (NR1201B) ................................................................................................... 6-15 6.3.6 NET-DSP Module (GOOSE and SV, Optional) ................................................................. 6-16 6.3.7 Binary Input (BI) Module .................................................................................................... 6-16 6.3.8 Binary Output (BO) Module ............................................................................................... 6-21 6.3.9 Analog Input (AI) Module (NR1401) .................................................................................. 6-23

List of Figures Figure 6.1-1 Front view of 8U PCS-915 ..................................................................................... 6-2 Figure 6.1-2 Typical rear view of 8U PCS-915 .......................................................................... 6-3 Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of 8U+4U PCS-915.................................................................... 6-4 Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of 8U PCS-915................................................................................ 6-6 Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915 ......................................................................... 6-8 Figure 6.3-1 View of DC power supply module NR1301 ........................................................ 6-11 Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module........................................................... 6-11 Figure 6.3-3 Rear view of MON modules ................................................................................ 6-13 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

6-a Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware

Figure 6.3-4 Wiring of communication interface.................................................................... 6-14 Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules.................................................................................. 6-15 Figure 6.2-6 Rear view of CAN bus extended modules......................................................... 6-15 Figure 6.3-7 View of NET-DSP module .................................................................................... 6-16 Figure 6.3-8 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A ............................................... 6-17 Figure 6.3-9 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS ............................................. 6-20 Figure 6.3-10 Pin definition of BO module NR1521A (Pin definition of NR1521B and 1521C are similar to it) .................................................................................................................. 6-21 Figure 6.3-11 Pin definition of BO module NR1523A ............................................................. 6-22 Figure 6.3-12 Pin definition of BO module NR1549A ............................................................ 6-23 Figure 6.3-13 Typical pin definition of the first 12-channel current AI module .................. 6-24 Figure 6.3-14 Typical pin definition of 3-channel current and 9-channel voltage AI module .............................................................................................................................................. 6-24 Figure 6.3-15 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed ..................................... 6-25 Figure 6.3-16 Current connection of AI module ..................................................................... 6-25 Figure 6.3-17 Voltage connection of AI module ..................................................................... 6-26

List of Tables Table 6.1-1 PCS-915 module configuration .............................................................................. 6-1 Table 6.3-1 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A ................................................. 6-17 Table 6.3-2 Pin definition of binary input module NR1503A ................................................. 6-18 Table 6.3-3 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS............................................... 6-20

6-b


6 Hardware

6.1 General Description PCS-915 adopts 32-bit micro-processor CPU for logic calculations and function management. The protection calculations are processed by high-speed digital signal processor DSP. System parameters are sampled at 24 points in every cycle. The sampling data are parallel processed in each sampling interval to ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety of protection device. PCS-915 captures current and voltage signal and converts to small signals. These small signals will be filtered and converted to digital signals by AD converter before being sent to protection calculation module (DSP module 1) and fault detector calculation module (DSP module 2). When MON module completes all the protection calculations, the results will be stored in 32-bit CPU on MON module. DSP module 1 carries out protection logic calculation, tripping output, and MON module can provide sequence of event (SOE) record, waveform recording, printing, communication between protection and substation automatic system (SAS) and communication between HMI and CPU. The operating procedures of fault detector calculation module are similar to that of protection calculation module, and the only difference is, when fault detector calculation module decides a fault detector picks up, only the positive power supply of output relay is switched on. Table 6.1-1 PCS-915 module configuration No.

ID

Module Description

1

NR1101/NR1102

Management module (MON module)

2

NR1115/NR1151

Protection calculation module (DSP module 1)

3

NR1115/NR1151

Fault detector calculation module (DSP module 2)

4

NR1401

Analog input module ( AI module)

5

NR1501/NR1503/NR1506

Binary input module (BI module)

6

NR1521/NR1523/NR1549

Binary output module (BO module)

7

NR1301

Power supply module (PWR module)

8

NR1136

GOOSE and SV from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 (NET-DSP module)

9

NR1201

CAN bus extended module (CAN module)

10

Human machine interface module (HMI module)



MON module provides management function, completed event record, setting management, and etc.



DSP modules can provide filtering, sampling, protection calculation and fault detector calculation.



AI module converts AC current and voltage to low voltage signals by current transformers and voltage transformers respectively.



BI module provides binary inputs that are inputted via 110V/125V/220V/250V opto-coupler (configurable).


6-1 Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware

 BO module provides all kinds of binary output contacts, including signal output contacts and tripping output contacts. 

PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V to different DC voltage levels on request for various modules of the device



NET-DSP module (optional) receives and sends GOOSE messages, sampled values (SV) from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 protocol.



CAN module (optional) realizes the CAN bus connection between 8U chassis and 4U extended chassis for 8U+4U PCS-915 device.



HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicator and multiplex RJ45 ports for user as human-machine interface

Following figure shows typical front view of 8U size PCS-915.

3

HEALTHY MISC ALM

PCS-915

11 12

BUSBAR RELAY

13 14

5

15

6

16

7

17

8

18

9

19

10

20

ENT

ES

C

4

GR P

1 2

Figure 6.1-1 Front view of 8U PCS-915

Following figures show typical rear view of 8U size PCS-915.

6-2


6 Hardware Slot No.

01

02

03

NR1102M

NR1115

NR1115

1

1

2

2

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1521A

P1 NR1301 5V

BJ

BJJ BSJ

ON

OFF

1 2

BO_COM1 BO_FAIL

3

BO_ALM

4

BO_COM2

5

BO_FAIL

6

BO_ALM

7

OPTO+

8

OPTO-

9

NR1401

NR1401

DANGER

Slot No.

16

17

NR1401

DANGER

18

19

NR1401

DANGER

20

21

NR1401

DANGER

22

23

10

PWR+

11

PWR-

12

GND

NR1521A

NR1521A

NR1521A

NR1521A

NR1521A

NR1521A

NR1523A

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

DANGER

24

25

Figure 6.1-2 Typical rear view of 8U PCS-915

For a specific project, if more than 16 bays are supported, additional 4U extended chassis is equipped, the typical rear view of 8U+4U size PCS-915 is shown as follows.


6-3 Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware Slot No.

01

02

03

04

NR1102M

NR1115

NR1115

NR1201B

1

1

2

2

05

06

07

08

09

10

NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1521A

NR1521A

11

12

NR1521A NR1521A

13

14

15

NR1521A

NR1521A

NR1521A

TERM_H

P1 NR1301 5V

BJ

TERM_T PPS

BJJ BSJ

RESV

ON

OFF

BO_COM1

1 2

BO_FAIL

3

BO_ALM

4

BO_COM2

5

BO_FAIL

6

NR1401

DANGER

Slot No.

Slot No.

16

17

NR1401

DANGER

18

19

OPTO+

8

OPTO-

9

CAN/PPS

NR1401

BO_ALM

7

NR1401

DANGER

20

21

01

02

03

04

05

06

NR1506AS NR1505

NR1506AS NR1505

NR1506AS NR1505

NR1506AS NR1505

NR1506AS NR1505

NR1506AS NR1505

NR1401

DANGER

22

07 NR1506AS NR1505

NR1401

DANGER

23

24

08 NR1506AS NR1505

25

NR1401

DANGER

26

10

PWR+

11

PWR-

12

GND

NR1521A

NR1521A

NR1523A

30

31

32

DANGER

27

28

09

10

11

12

NR1506AS NR1505

NR1506AS NR1505

NR1506AS NR1505

NR1506AS NR1505

13 NR1506AS NR1505

29

14 NR1506AS NR1505

P2

15 NR1201B TERM_H

NR1301 NR1301A 5V

BJ

TERM_T PPS

BJJ BSJ

RESV

ON

OFF

1 2

BO_FAIL BO_ALM

4

BO_COM2

5

BO_FAIL

6

CAN/PPS

BO_COM1

3

BO_ALM

7

OPTO+

8

OPTO-

9 10 11

PWR+

12

GND

PWR-

Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of 8U+4U PCS-915

6-4


6 Hardware

6.2 Typical Wiring 6.2.1 Typical Wiring of 8U PCS-915 (For reference only)

BI module

BI module

06

07

08

09

10

NR1301

PWR module

BI module

05

NR1521A

BO module

BI module

04

BI module

BI module

03

BI module

BI module

02

BI module

BI module

01

BI module

DSP module

NR1115C NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS

DSP module

NR1115C

MON module

NR1102M

11

12

13

14

15

NR1521A

NR1521A

NR1521A

NR1521A

NR1521A

BO module

BO module

BO module

BO module

BO module

BO module

AI module

NR1401

AI module

NR1401

AI module

NR1401

AI module

NR1401

AI module

NR1401

BO module

Slot No.

P1

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

NR1521A

NR1523A

Slot No.

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration


6-5 Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware Power supply supervision

0401

1601 Ia_Bay01

1602

BI_01

+

0402

+

0421

1603 …

Ib_Bay01

1604 1605

*BI plug-in modules

Ia_Bay16

2220 2221

Ib_Bay16

2222

0422

-

……

……

2219

BI_20 Current input

Ic_Bay01

1606

Power supply supervision

BI_01

1401 +

1402

+

1421

2223 …

Ic_Bay16

2224

BI_20

1422

2407 Ua_BB1

2408

Ub_BB1

2410 2411

2421 Ub_BB3

2422 2423

1503 1504

BO_11

1521 1522

2601 BO_01

2602 2603

BO_02

2604 …

Uc_BB3

2424

1502

BO_02

Controlled by fault detector element

Ua_BB3

2420

BO_01

…

……

2419

Voltage input

Uc_BB1

2412

1501


2409

BO_11

2621 2622

…

Power supply for opto-coupler (24V)

P110

PWR-

P111

OPTO+

P107

OPTO-

P108

Power Supply

P103

BO_ALM

P101

COM

P105

BO_FAIL BO_ALM

P104

COM

SYN-

0102

SGND

0103

TXD

0106

SGND

0107

3121 3122

3201 BO_01

3202

BO_06

3211 3212 3213

BO_07

3214 3215

BO_08

3216 3217

Controlled by fault detector element, magnetic latched

0105

PRINT

RTS

3104

BO_11

Not controlled by fault detector element

0101

Clock SYN

SYN+

0104 PRINTER

To the screen of other coaxial cable with single point earthing

P106

3103

…

BO_FAIL

3102

BO_02


P102

3101 BO_01

…

PWR+


External DC power supply

BO_09

3218 3219

BO_10

3220 3221

BO_11

Multiplex RJ45 (Front)

3222 0012 0225 Grounding Bus

Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of 8U PCS-915

6-6


6 Hardware

6.2.2 Typical Wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915 (For reference only)

BO module

BO module

BO module

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

NR1301

PWR module

BO module

01

NR1521A

BO module

BO module

NR1521A

BO module

NR1521A

BI module

NR1521A

BI module

NR1521A

BI module

NR1521A

BI module

NR1521A

CAN module

NR1201B NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS

DSP module

NR1115C

DSP module

NR1115C

MON module

NR1102M

Slot No.

15

P1

BO module

NR1523A

BO module

NR1521A

BO module

NR1521A

AI module

NR1401

AI module

NR1401

AI module

NR1401

AI module

NR1401

AI module

NR1401

AI module

NR1401

AI module

NR1401

30

31

32

Slot No.

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

BI module

CAN module

PWR module

NR1301

BI module

NR1201B

BI module

NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

P2

Slot No.

The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration


6-7 Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware

Ia_Bay01

1602 1603

Ib_Bay01

1604

0901 BO_01

…

2804 2805

Ic_Bay25

2806 2807

Ub_BB1

2810 2811

……

2821 Ub_BB3

2822

Not controlled by fault detector element

2823 Uc_BB3

2824


0501

3002 3021 3022

BO_11

…

Controlled by fault detector element, magnetic latched

……

-


BI_01

…

+

*BI plug-in modules

BI_20

+

0801

BI_20

+

0822

3102

BO_11

0102 0103

3122

3201 BO_01

3202

BO_06

0105

TXD

0106

SGND

0107

3211 3212 3213

BO_07

3214 3215

BO_08

3216 3217

BO_09

3218 3219

BO_10

3220 3221

BO_11

3222

BO_FAIL

P102

BO_ALM

P103

COM

P101

BO_FAIL

P105

BO_ALM

P106

COM

P104

Power Supply

Multiplex RJ45 (Front)

PRINT

RTS

3121

P110

PWR+

P111

PWR-

P107

OPTO+

P108

OPTO-

External DC power supply Power supply for opto-coupler (24V)

CAN/PPS

0101

SYN-

Clock SYN

SYN+

0104

PRINTER


-

SGND

3101 BO_01

BI_01

+

0522

0821

3001 BO_01

…


Ua_BB3

2820

Voltage input

Uc_BB1

2812

0802

1521 1522

…


2809

0521

BO_11

Ua_BB1

2808

0502

1502

…


Ib_Bay25

1501 BO_01

…

2803

Current input

…… Ia_Bay25

2802


Ic_Bay01

1606

2819

0921 0922

BO_11

1605

2801

0902

…

8U chassis


1601

0012 CAN bus extended wire

0225

0401

4U extended chassis +

0421

+

BI_01

…

0402

0422

……

-


1401 +

BO_FAIL

P202

BO_ALM

P203

COM

P201

BO_FAIL

P205

BO_ALM

P206

COM

P204

Power Supply

…

1402

BI_01

*BI plug-in modules

BI_20

CAN/PPS

Grounding Bus Power supply supervision

1421 1422

+

P210

PWR+

P211

PWR-

P207

OPTO+

P208

OPTO-

BI_20

External DC power supply Power supply for opto-coupler (24V)

0012

-

0225

Grounding Bus

Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915 6-8


6 Hardware

6.2.3 CT Requirement -Rated primary current Ipn: According to the rated current or maximum load current of primary apparatus. -Rated continuous thermal current Icth: According to the maximum load current. -Rated short-time thermal current Ith and rated dynamic current Idyn: According to the maximum fault current. -Rated secondary current Isn -Accuracy limit factor Kalf: Ipn

Rated primary current (amps)

Icth

Rated continuous thermal current (amps)

Ith

Rated short-time thermal current (amps)

Idyn

Rated dynamic current (amps)

Isn

Rated secondary current (amps)

Kalf

Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)

IPal

Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)

Performance verification Esl > Esl′ Esl

Rated secondary limiting e.m.f (volts) Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn)

Kalf

Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)

IPal

Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)

Ipn


Isn


Rct

Current transformer secondary winding resistance (ohms)

Rbn Sbn

Esl′ k Ipcf

Rated resistance burden (ohms) 2

Rbn=Sbn/Isn

Rated burden (VAs)

Required secondary limiting e.m.f (volts) Esl′ = k×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn stability factor = 2 Protective checking factor current (amps) Same as the maximum prospective fault current

Isn


Rct

Current transformer secondary winding resistance (ohms)

Rb

Real resistance burden (ohms) Rb=Rr+2×RL+Rc


6-9 Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware Rc

Contact resistance, 0.05-0.1 ohm (ohms)

RL

Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)

Rr

Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)

Ipn


For example: 1.

Kalf=30, Isn=5A, Rct=1ohm, Sbn=60VA

Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn) = kalf×Isn×(Rct+ Sbn/ Isn2) = 30×5×(1+60/25)=510V 2.

Ipcf=40000A, RL=0.5ohm, Rr=0.1ohm, Rc=0.1ohm, Ipn=2000A

Esl′ = 2×Ipcf×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn = 2×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+(Rr+2×RL+Rc))/Ipn = 2×40000×5×(1+(0.1+2×0.5+0.1))/2000=440V Thus, Esl > Esl′

6.3 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition PCS-915 consists of power supply module, MON module, DSP module, analog input module, binary input module and binary output module. The definition and application of each module and its terminals are introduced as follows.

6.3.1 PWR Module (Slot P1: NR1301) The power supply module is a DC/DC or AC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input and output. The power supply module has an input voltage range as described in the chapter of “Technical Data”. The standard output voltages are +5V and +24V DC. The tolerances of the output voltages are continuously monitored. The +5V DC output provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power supply in this device. The +24V DC output provides power supply for the static relays of this device. The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is in cold reserve. A 12-pin connector is fixed on the front of the power supply module. The pin definition of the connector is described as below.

6-10


6 Hardware

NR1301 5V OK

BO_ALM

ALM

BO_FAIL

ON OFF

1

BO_COM1

2

BO_FAIL

3

BO_ALM

4

BO_COM2

5

BO_FAIL

6

BO_ALM

7

OPTO+

8

OPTO-

9 10 PWR+ 11 PWR12 GND

Figure 6.3-1 View of DC power supply module NR1301

For some occasions, the power switch in the dotted box of above figure is not existed. 01 BO_FAIL 02 BO_ALM 03 04 BO_FAIL 05 BO_ALM 06

Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

BO_COM1

Common terminal 1.

02

BO_Fail_1

Equipment failure output 1 (01-02, NC)

03

BO_Alm_Abnor_1

Equipment abnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)

04

BO_COM2

Common terminal 2.

05

BO_Fail_2

Equipment failure output 2 (04-05, NC)

06

BO_Alm_Abnor_2

Equipment abnormality alarm output 2 (04-06, NO)

07

OPTO+

Pins 07 and 08 are 24V power supply output for the binary input

08

OPTO-

module. Pin 07 is 24V+ and Pin 08 is 24V-, the rated output current of this power supply is 200mA.


6-11 Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware Pin No.

Symbol

09

Description Not used

10

PWR+

Positive input of power supply for the device

11

PWR-

Negative input of power supply for the device

12

GND

Grounded connection of this device

NOTICE! The rated voltage of DC power supply module is self-adaptive to 88~300Vdc. Power supply in other DC voltage levels or AC voltage power supply need to be specially ordered. It is important to CHECK if the rated voltage of power supply module is the same as the voltage of external control power supply before the device is put into service. NOTICE! The DC power supply module provides pin 0112 and earth connector for grounding of device. The pin 0112 shall be connected to earth connector and the earth copper bar of panel via dedicated grounding wire. NOTICE! Effective grounding is the most important measure for device to prevent EMI, so effective grounding MUST be ensured before the device is put into operation.

6.3.2 MON Module (Slot No.01: NR1101 or NR1102) The MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM, Ethernet controller and other peripherals. Its can provide management of the complete device, human machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc. The MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module is provided with 100BaseT Ethernet interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces, PPS/IRIG-B differential time synchronization interface and RS-232 printing interface. The terminals of MON modules and its wiring method are shown in the following figure.

6-12


6 Hardware

NR1102M

NR1101F

NR1102N TX

ETHERNET

ETHERNET

RX TX RX ETHERNET

Figure 6.3-3 Rear view of MON modules Module ID

Memory

Interface

Pin No.

4 RJ45 Ethernet

RS-485 NR1102M

256M DDR

256M DDR

To SCADA 01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

05

RTS

06

TXD

Twisted pair wire

07

SGND

2 RJ45 Ethernet

To SCADA

Twisted pair wire

2 FO Ethernet

To SCADA

Optical fibre ST

RS-485

RS-232

01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

RS-485

clock

Twisted pair wire

05

RTS

06

TXD

07

SGND

3 RJ45 Ethernet

256M DDR

clock

To printer

04

NR1101F

Physical Layer

04

RS-232

NR1102N

Usage

To printer

To SCADA 01

A

02

B

03

SGND

To SCADA Twisted pair wire

04


6-13 Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware Module ID

Memory

Interface

RS-485

Pin No. 05

A

06

B

07

SGND

Usage

Physical Layer

To SCADA

08

RS-485

09

SYN+

10

SYN-

To

SGND

synchronization

11

clock

12

RS-232

13

RTS

14

TXD

15

SGND

To printer

16

The correct method of connection is shown in Figure 6.3-4. Generally, the shielded cables with two pairs of twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs is used to connect the “+” and “–” terminals of difference signal; the other is used to connect the signal ground of the interface, i.e. connect the signal groundings of all the devices to a bus through the twisted pair. The module reserves a free terminal for all the communication ports; the free terminal does not need to be connected. Twisted pair wire 01

B

02

SGND

03

COM

04

Twisted pair wire SYN+

01

SYN-

02

SGND

03

CLOCK SYN


A

04

Twisted pair wire 05

TXD

06

SGND

07

PRINT

RTS

Figure 6.3-4 Wiring of communication interface

6.3.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D) The DSP Module 1 consists of high-performance digital signal processor and other peripherals. The functions of this module include analog data acquisition, calculation of protection logic and tripping output etc.

6.3.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D) The DSP Module 2 consists of high-performance digital signal processor and other peripherals. The functions of this module include analog data acquisition, calculation of fault detector elements 6-14


6 Hardware

and providing positive power supply to output relay. DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 have the same hardware configuration. The following figure shows rear views and terminal definitions for different type of DSP modules; the corresponding module shall be adopted in accordance with concrete situation.

NR1151D

NR1115C

1

1

2

3

2

4

5

6

Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules

6.3.5 CAN Module (NR1201B) The CAN bus extended module NR1201B is only equipped for 8U+4U PCS-915 device, 8U chassis and 4U extended are equipped with one NR1201B module respectively, the CAN bus of 8U chassis and 4U extended chassis are connected together via a CAN extended wire, then the 8U device can get and control the signal of IO module of the 4U extended device.

NR1201B

TERM-H TERM-T PPS RESV

CAN/PPS

Figure 6.2-6 Rear view of CAN bus extended modules PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

6-15 Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware

6.3.6 NET-DSP Module (GOOSE and SV, Optional)

NR1136A

NR1136C

RX

Figure 6.3-7 View of NET-DSP module

This module consists of high-performance DSP (digital signal processor), up to eight 100Mbit/s optical-fibre interfaces (LC type) and selectable IRIG-B interface (ST type). It supports GOOSE and SV by IEC 61850-9-2 protocols and can be used for GOOSE & SV message transmission by point-to-point connection or via LAN It can receive and send GOOSE messages to intelligent control device, and receive SV from MU (merging unit). Each interface can be dedicated for GOOSE or SV message, it can also be shared by GOOSE & SV message. This module supports IEEE1588 network time protocol, E2E and P2P defined in IEEE1588 protocol can be selected. This module supports Ethernet IEEE802.3 time adjustment message format, UDP time adjustment message format and GMRP.

6.3.7 Binary Input (BI) Module NR1501A, NR1503A and NR1506AS modules are three types of standard BI modules. All the binary inputs can be configured by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement, please refer to Chapter 9 about the concrete operation method. 

NR1501A

A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1501A and 14 configurable high voltage binary inputs (per two binary inputs share one common negative power input of opto-coupler) are equipped with it. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and 250V.

6-16


6 Hardware

NR1501A

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

BI_01

01

BI_02

02

COM1-

03

BI_03

04

BI_04

05

COM2-

06

BI_05

07

BI_06

08

COM3-

09

BI_07

10

11

BI_08

11

12 13

COM4-

12

14

BI_09

13

BI_10

14

COM5-

15

BI_11

16

BI_12

17

COM6-

18

BI_13

19

BI_14

20

COM7-

21

10

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

22

Figure 6.3-8 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A Table 6.3-1 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

BI_01

Configurable binary input 1.

02

BI_02


03

COM1-

Common terminal 1 of negative pole of power supply of the module

04

BI_03


05

BI_04


06

COM2-


07

BI_05


08

BI_06


09

COM3-


10

BI_07


11

BI_08


12

COM4-


13

BI_09


14

BI_10


15

COM5-


16

BI_11


17

BI_12


18

COM6-



6-17 Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware Pin No.

Symbol

Description

19

BI_13


20

BI_14


21

COM7-


22

Blank

Blank

NR1503A



A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1503A and 11 configurable high voltage binary inputs are equipped with it, each binary input has independent negative power input of opto-coupler. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and 250V.

NR1503A

BI_01

01

Opto01-

02

BI_02

03

Opto02-

04

BI_03

05

Opto03-

06

BI_04

07

Opto04-

08

BI_05

09

Opto05-

10

BI_06

11

Opto06-

12

BI_07

13

Opto07-

14

BI_08

15

Opto08-

16

BI_09

17

Opto09-

18

BI_10

19

Opto10-

20

BI_11

21

Opto11-

22

Figure 6.3-4 Pin definition of binary input module NR1503A Table 6.3-2 Pin definition of binary input module NR1503A Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

BI_01

Configurable binary input 1

02

Opto01-

Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 1

03

BI_02


04

Opto02-


05

BI_03


06

Opto03-


07

BI_04


08

Opto04-


6-18


6 Hardware Pin No.



Symbol

Description

09

BI_05


10

Opto05-


11

BI_06


12

Opto06-


13

BI_07


14

Opto07-


15

BI_08


16

Opto08-


17

BI_09


18

Opto09-


19

BI_10


20

Opto10-


21

BI_11


22

Opto11-


NR1506AS

A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1506AS and 20 configurable high voltage binary inputs are equipped with it. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and 250V and the module has opto-coupler power monitor circuit. An internal binary input [BI_COMMON] is equipped for NR1506AS type BI module, please refer to Section 3.12.2.2 for details.


6-19 Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware

Opto+

01

BI_01

02

BI_02

03

BI_03

04

BI_04

05

BI_05

06

BI_06

07

BI_07

08

BI_08

09

BI_09

10

11

BI_10

11

12 13

BI_11

12

14

BI_12

13

BI_13

14

BI_14

15

19

BI_15

16

20

BI_16

17

BI_17

18

BI_18

19

BI_19

20

BI_20

21

COM-

22

NR1506AS

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

15 16 17 18

21 22

BI_COMMON

Figure 6.3-9 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS Table 6.3-3 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

Opto+

Positive pole of power supply of the module

02

BI_01


03

BI_02


04

BI_03


05

BI_04


06

BI_05


07

BI_06


08

BI_07


09

BI_08


10

BI_09


11

BI_10


12

BI_11


13

BI_12


14

BI_13


15

BI_14


6-20


6 Hardware Pin No.

Symbol

Description

16

BI_15


17

BI_16


18

BI_17


19

BI_18


20

BI_19


21

BI_20


22

COM-

Common terminal of negative pole of power supply of the module

6.3.8 Binary Output (BO) Module NR1521A, NR1521B, NR1521C, NR1523A and NR1549A are five types of standard BO modules. All the binary outputs can be configured by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement, please refer to chapter 9 about the concrete operation method. It is recommended that the BO contacts controlled by fault detector is used for tripping or operating signals BO, and the BO contacts not controlled by fault detector is used for alarm signal and other signal BO. 

NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C

NR1521A can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, and each output contact will be controlled by the fault detector. NR1521B can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, the first 9 BO contacts will be controlled by fault detector and the last two BO contacts will not. NR1521C can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, and each output contact is not controlled by the fault detector. A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C. The pin definition of the connectors is described as below. NR1521A

BO_01 BO_ 02 BO_ 03 BO_ 04 BO_ 05 BO_ 06 BO_ 07 BO_ 08 BO_ 09 BO_ 10 BO_ 11

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Figure 6.3-10 Pin definition of BO module NR1521A (Pin definition of NR1521B and 1521C are similar to it) PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

6-21 Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware 

NR1523A

NR1523A can provide 11 signal output contacts and all the contacts are normally open (NO) contacts. Only the last three contacts ([BO_09], [BO_10] and [BO_11]) are magnetic latched NO contacts defined as protection tripping signal generally. Except for [BO_07] and [BO_08], all the other contacts will be controlled by positive power supply of fault detector. A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is described as below.

NR1523A

BO_01 BO_ 02 BO_ 03 BO_ 04 BO_ 05 BO_ 06 BO_ 07 BO_ 08 BO_ 09 BO_ 10 BO_ 11

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Figure 6.3-11 Pin definition of BO module NR1523A 

NR1549A

NR1549A can provide 11 output contacts and all the contacts are magnetic latched normally open (NO) contacts and will be controlled by positive power supply of fault detector. A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is described as below.

6-22


6 Hardware BO_01

NR1549A

BO_ 02 BO_ 03 BO_ 04 BO_ 05 BO_ 06 BO_ 07 BO_ 08 BO_ 09 BO_ 10 BO_ 11

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Figure 6.3-12 Pin definition of BO module NR1549A

6.3.9 Analog Input (AI) Module (NR1401) AI module is applicable for power plant or substation with conventional VT and CT, the module is not required if the device is used with ECT/EVT. The NR1401 module can provide 12-channel analog signal inputs. A 24-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is described as below (Take the typical definition of the first analog input module as an example). Two kinds of AI modules (12-channel current AI module, 3-channel current and 9-channel voltage AI module) can be used for PCS-915. If voltage is connected, one 3-channel current and 9-channel voltage AI module should be configured. For current channel, rating 5 A or 1 A can be selected. Please declare which kind of AI module is needed before ordering. Maximum linear range of the current converter is 40In.


6-23 Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware Ia_Bay01

01

Ian_Bay01

02

Ib_Bay01

03

Ibn_Bay01

04

Ic_Bay01

05

Icn_Bay01

06

Ia_Bay02

07

Ian_Bay02

08

Ib_Bay02

09

Ibn_Bay02

10

Ic_Bay02

11

Icn_Bay02

12

Ia_Bay03

13

Ian_Bay03

14

Ib_Bay03

15

Ibn_Bay03

16

Ic_Bay03

17

Icn_Bay03

18

Ia_Bay04

19

Ian_Bay04

20

Ib_Bay04

21

Ibn_Bay04

22

Ic_Bay04

23

Icn_Bay04

24

NR1401

Figure 6.3-13 Typical pin definition of the first 12-channel current AI module

Ia_Bayxx

01

Ian_Bayxx

02

Ib_Bayxx

03

Ibn_Bayxx

04

Ic_Bayxx

05

Icn_Bayxx

06

Ua_BB1

07

Uan_BB1

08

Ub_BB1

09

Ubn_BB1

10

Uc_BB1

11

Ucn_BB1

12

Ua_BB2

13

Uan_BB2

14

Ub_BB2

15

Ubn_BB2

16

Uc_BB2

17

Ucn_BB2

18

Ua_BB3

19

Uan_BB3

20

Ub_BB3

21

Ubn_BB2

22

Uc_BB3

23

Ucn_BB3

24

NR1401

Figure 6.3-14 Typical pin definition of 3-channel current and 9-channel voltage AI module

For AI module, if the plug is not put in the socket, external CT circuit is closed itself. Just shown as below.

6-24


6 Hardware Plug

Socket

In

Out

plug is not put in the socket

In

Out

Put the plug in the socket

Figure 6.3-15 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed A B C

P2

S2

P1

S1

02

01

04

03

06

05

Figure 6.3-16 Current connection of AI module


6-25 Date: 2015-07-13

6 Hardware A B C

13

14

15

16

17

18

Figure 6.3-17 Voltage connection of AI module

6-26


7 Settings

7 Settings Table of Contents 7 Settings .............................................................................................. 7-a 7.1 Device Settings ............................................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Communication Settings ................................................................................ 7-3 7.3 Label Settings................................................................................................ 7-10 7.4 Function Links................................................................................................ 7-11 7.5 System Settings ............................................................................................ 7-14 7.6 GOOSE Receiving Links............................................................................... 7-16 7.7 GOOSE Sending Links ................................................................................. 7-16


7-a Date: 2015-03-07

7 Settings

Settings are classified to two kinds, protection settings and common settings. Each protection element has its independent setting menu which are given detailed description in chapter “Operation Theory”. In this chapter only common settings are introduced. Common settings consist of device settings, communication settings, label settings, system settings, function links and etc. PCS-915 has ten protection setting groups to coordinate with the different modes of power system operation. One of these setting groups is assigned to be active. However, common settings are shared by all protection setting groups. If all the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary value (the communication setting [Opt_Display_Settings] is set as “1” or the setting is not configured), all the current settings are converted from primary current according to reference CT ratio instead of the actual CT ratio of each bay.

7.1 Device Settings  No.

1

2

Setting list Item

Bx.Un_BinaryInput

HDR_EncodedMode

Description Voltage level of binary input for the module that located in slot No.x Select encoding format of header (HDR) file COMTRADE recording file. Default value is “UTF-8”.

Setting Range 0:24V, 1:48V 2:110V, 3:220V, 4: 30V, 5: 125V GB18030, UTF-8 0: Current Language

3

Opt_Caption_103

The language of group caption of IEC103 protocol

1: Fixed Chinese 2: Fixed English

Using moveable disk to realize the backup and 4

En_MDisk

recovery of program and configuration. Default value is 0, and the function is reserved.

5

En_Volt_BB

Voltage concerned function is enabled or disabled

0: Disable 1:Enable 0: Disable 1:Enable

Following device settings are configured only for digital substation 6

Bx.t_Dly_Interp_SV

The SV interpolation back-off time of the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x

1500μs~15000μs 0: SV LAN mode

7

Opt_RecvMode_SV

SV point-to-point receiving mode is enabled ot not.

1:

SV

point-to-point

receiving mode 8

N_Ch_Max_SV

The maximum number of SV channel

24~40

0: the sample value can be displayed even a bay is out of service (the function link [@Bayn.Link_On] is 9

En_ClearSV

set as “0”).

0, 1

1: the sample value will be cleared if a bay is out of service (the function link [@Bayn.Link_On] is set as PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

7-1 Date: 2015-03-07

7 Settings “0”).



Setting description

1.

[Bx.Un_BinaryInput]

The setting is used to set the voltage level of corresponding binary input module. For high-voltage BI modules, 110V, 125V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement. For low-voltage BI modules, 24V, 30V or 48V can be set according to the actual requirement. 0: 24V 1: 48V 2: 110V 3: 220V 4: 30V 5: 125V 2.

[HDR_EncodedMode]

Default value of [HDR_EncodedMode] is 1 (i.e. UTF-8 code) and please set it to 0 (i.e. GB18030) according to the special requirement. 3.

[Opt_Caption_103]

0: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in current language 1: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in Chinese 2: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in English It is recommended to be set as “1” if the device communicate with SCADA in Chinese. 4.

[En_MDisk]

1: Use moveable disk to realize the backup and recovery function. 0: Moveable disk will be disabled. A moveable mdisk is implemented on the MON plug-in module to backup and restore programs, settings and configurations. If MON plug-in module is broken, remove the mdisk and put it into a new MON plug-in module, use the menu on HMI to restore the backup programs and configurations. If DSP plug-in module is broken, after a new DSP plug-in module is installed, use the menu on HMI to restore the backup programs and configurations. If the moveable mdisk is broken, after a new mdisk is installed on the MON plug-in module, use the menu on HMI to back up the current programs and configurations into the new mdisk. The default setting is 0. 5.

[En_Volt_BB]

7-2


7 Settings

It should be set as “0” if busbar voltage is not connected to PCS-915, then all the voltage concerned function are disabled. It should be set as “1” if busbar voltage is connected to PCS-915, then all the voltage concerned function can be enabled (each voltage concerned function maybe controlled by corresponding logic setting). 

Access path:

MainMenuSettingsProduct SetupDevice Settings

7.2 Communication Settings 

Setting list No.

Setting Item

Range

Description The IED name defined in 61850

1

IEDNAME

2

IP_LAN1

IP address of Ethernet port A

3

Mask_LAN1

Subnet mask of Ethernet port A

4

En_LAN1

5

IP_LAN2

IP address of Ethernet port B

6

Mask_LAN2

Subnet mask of Ethernet port B

7

En_LAN2

8

IP_LAN3

IP address of Ethernet port C

9

Mask_LAN3

Subnet mask of Ethernet port C

10 En_LAN3

protocol

0,1

0,1

0,1

Put Ethernet port A into service

Put Ethernet port B into service

Put Ethernet port C into service

11 IP_LAN4

IP address of Ethernet port D

12 Mask_LAN4

Subnet mask of Ethernet port D

13 En_LAN4 14 Gateway

0,1 000.000.000.000~ 255.255.255.255

Put Ethernet port D into service Gateway of router Enable/disable sending message in

15 En_Broadcast

0: disable, 1: enable

broadcast

mode

via

network.

(IEC103). Time 16 Fmt_Net_103

0, 1

scale

format

of

IEC

60870-5-103 protocol (for Ethernet port). Communication address between the

17 Addr_RS485A

0~255

protective device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485 serial port 1.

18 Baud_RS485A

4800,9600,19200, 38400,57600,115200 bps


Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port 1.

7-3 Date: 2015-03-07

7 Settings No.

Setting Item

19 Protocol_RS485A

Range 0~2

Description Communication

protocol

of

rear

RS-485 serial port 1. Spontaneous events are sent in the

20 Inf_RS485A_103

0, 1

format of FUN and INF based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (for RS-485 serial port 1). Time

21 Fmt_RS485A_103

0, 1

scale

format

of

IEC

60870-5-103 protocol (for RS-485 serial port 1). Communication address between the

22 Addr_RS485B

0~255

protective device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485 serial port 2.

23 Baud_RS485B

24 Protocol_RS485B

4800,9600,19200, 38400,57600,115200 bps 0~2

Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port 2. Communication

protocol

of

rear

RS-485 serial port 2. Spontaneous events are sent in the

25 Inf_RS485B_103

0, 1

format of FUN and INF based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (for RS-485 serial port 2). Time

26 Fmt_RS485B_103

0, 1

scale

format

of

IEC

60870-5-103 protocol (for RS-485 serial port 2). Threshold

value

measurement 27 Threshold_Measmt_Net

0~100%

through

of

values

IEC103

or

sending

to

SCADA IEC61850

protocol. Default value: “1%”. The time period when the equipment 28 Period_Measmt_Net

0~65535s

sends measurement data to SCADA through IEC103 protocol. Default value:”60”. Select the format of measurement

29 Format_Measmt

0, 1

data sent to SCADA through IEC103 protocol.

30 Baud_Printer

31 En_AutoPrint 32 Opt_TimeSyn

4800,9600, 19200,38400, 51600, 115200 bps

Baud rate of printer port

0: disable

Enable/disable

1: enable

function

Conventional

7-4

Select

the

automatic

mode

of

printing

time


7 Settings No.

Setting Item

Range SAS

Description synchronization of equipment.

Advanced NoTimeSyn 000.000.000.000~

33 IP_Server_SNTP

255.255.255.255

34 OffsetHour_UTC

-12~12hrs

35 OffsetMinute_UTC

0~60min Primary value/

36 Opt_Display_Status

Secondary value Primary value/

37 Opt_Display_Settings

38 IP_StandbyServer_SNTP

Secondary value

000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

39 En_Server_SNTP

0, 1

The address of the external SNTP clock synchronization server sending SNTP message to the equipment. The local time zone also refered to as the hour offset hour from UTC . The offset minute of local time from UTC. Measurement values are displayed in primary value or secondary value Select

display primary value or

secondary

value

for

protection

settings The address of the SNTP clock synchronization standby server. Logic setting to enable/disable SNTP server mode

Following communication settings are configured only for digital substation 0: PPS 40 Opt_TimeSyn_PL

1: IRIGB 2: 1588PPS 3: SLAVEPPS

Select

the

time

synchronization

source of process layer (the default value is “1”). GOOSE double-net mode is enabled

41 En_NetB_GOOSE

0, 1

or not 0: single-net mode 1: double-net mode GOOSE single/double-net

42 En_DualNet_GOOSE

0, 1

mode is

enabled or not 0: double-net mode 1: single/double-net mode SV double-net mode is enabled or

43 En_NetB_SV

0, 1

not 0: single-net mode 1: double-net mode Enable Bx (GOOSE and SV module

44 Bx.En_PPS_Output

0, 1

that located in slot No.x) to output pulse per second

Following communication settings are configured only when DNP3.0 protocol is adopted PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

7-5 Date: 2015-03-07

7 Settings No.

Setting Item

Range

Description The logic setting to enable/disable

45 En_TCPx_DNP

0 or 1

network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)

46 Addr_Slave_TCPx_DNP

0~65519

47 Addr_Master_TCPx_DNP

0~65519

48 IP_Master_TCPx_DNP

000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

It is the slave address of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4) It is the master address of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4) It is the IP address of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4) It is the communication map of

49 Opt_Map_TCPx_DNP

0~4

network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4) It is the “OBJ1” default variation of

50 Obj01DefltVar_TCPx_DNP

0~1



0~2



0~4



0~2



0~2

network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4) It is the timeout of application layer of

55 t_AppLayer_TCPx_DNP

0~5 (s)

network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4) It is the heartbeat time interval of

56 t_KeepAlive_TCPx_DNP

0~7200 (s)

network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4) The logic setting is used to enable or

57 En_UR_TCPx_DNP

0 or 1

disable

the

unsolicited

message

function of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4) It is the online retransmission number

58 Num_URRetry_TCPx_DNP

2~10

of

the

unsolicited

message

of

network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,

7-6


7 Settings No.

Setting Item

Range

Description 4) It is the offline timeout of the

59 t_UROfflRetry_TCPx_DNP

1~5000 (s)

unsolicited message of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4) It is the class level of the “Binary

60 Class_BI_TCPx_DNP

0~3

Input” of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4) It is the class level of the “Analog

61 Class_AI_TCPx_DNP

0~3

Input” of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)

62 t_Select_TCPx_DNP

0~240 (s)

It is the selection timeout of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4) It is the time interval of the time

63 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCPx_DNP

0~3600 (s)

synchronization function of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)

 1.

Setting description [En_LANx] (x= 2, 3, 4)

These setting are used to enable/disable IP addresses of Ethernet 2, 3 and 4 respectively. IP address of Ethernet 1 is enabled fixedly. “1”: enable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is needed to be set. “0”: disable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is not needed to be set. 2.

[En_Broadcast]

This setting is only used for IEC 103 protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol is used, the setting must be set as “1”. 0: the device does not send UDP messages through network; 1: the device sends UDP messages through network. 3.

[Fmt_Net_103]

If the setting is set as”0”, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 18 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 19 (tripping report), i.e. 4-byte time scale format. If the setting is set as”1”, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 203 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 204 (tripping report), i.e. 7-byte time scale format.


7-7 Date: 2015-03-07

7 Settings

4.

[Protocol_RS485x] (x=A, B)

The setting is used to select the communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port x. 0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol 1: Modbus protocol 2: DNP protocol 5.

[Inf_RS485A_103], [Inf_RS485B_103]

When spontaneous events are sent via generic services based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, this setting should be setting as “0”. When spontaneous events are sent in the format of FUN and INF based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, this setting should be set as “1”. 6.

[Fmt_RS485A_103], [Fmt_RS485B_103]

The setting is invalid if the setting [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as”1”. If the setting is set as”0” and [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as “0”, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 18 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 19 (tripping report), i.e. 4-byte time scale format. If the setting is set as”1” and [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as “0”, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 203 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 204 (tripping report), i.e. 7-byte time scale format. 7.

[Format_Measmt]

The setting is used to select the format of measurement data sent to SCADA through IEC103 protocol. 0: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 12; 1: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 7, i.e. 754 short real number of IEEE standard. 8.

[En_AutoPrint]

If automatic print is required for disturbance report after protection operating, the setting should be set as “1”. 9.

[Opt_TimeSyn]

There are four selections for clock synchronization of device, each selection includes different time clock synchronization signals shown in following table. Item

Description PPS(RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level.

Conventional

IRIG-B(RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level. PPM(DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn]. PPS(DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].

SAS

SNTP(PTP): Unicast (point to point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network. SNTP(BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network.

7-8


7 Settings Item

Description Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol. IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588.

Advanced

IRIG-B(Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface. PPS(Fiber) PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface. When no time synchronization signal is connected to the equipment, please select

NoTimeSyn

this option and the alarm message [Alm_TimeSyn] will not be issued anymore.

“Conventional” mode and “SAS” mode are always be supported by device, but “Advanced” mode is only supported when NET-DSP module is equipped. The alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] may be issued to remind user loss of time synchronization signals. 1)

When “SAS” is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the device will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]. When “Conventional” mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, “SAS” mode will be enabled automatically with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.

2)

When “Advanced” mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal connected to NET-DSP module，“SAS” mode is enabled automatically with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.

3)

When “NoTimeSyn” mode is selected, the device will not send alarm signals without

NOTICE! The clock message via IEC103 protocol is INVALID when the device receives the IRIG-B signal through RC-485 port. 10.

[IP_Server_SNTP]

It is the address of the SNTP time synchronization server which sends SNTP timing messages to the relay or BCU. 11.

[IP_StandbyServer_SNTP]

Both [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are inefffective unless SNTP clock synchronization is valid. When both [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are set as “000.000.000.000”, the deivce receives broadcast SNTP synchronization message. When either [IP_Server_SNTP] or [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] is set as “000.000.000.000”, the deivce adopt the setting whose value is not equal to “000.000.000.000” as SNTP server address and the deivce receives unicast SNTP synchronization message. When neither [IP_Server_SNTP] nor [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are set as “000.000.000.000”, the deivce adopt the setting [IP_Server_SNTP] as SNTP server address to receive unicast SNTP synchronization message. If the device does not receive the server responses after 30s, the deivce adopt the setting [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] as SNTP server address to receive unicast SNTP synchronization message. The device will switch between [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] repeatedly if the device always can not receive the server responses PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

7-9 Date: 2015-03-07

7 Settings

waiting 30s. 12.

[Opt_Display_Status]

If this setting is not configured, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value by default. If this setting is set as “0”, the sampled values are displayed as primary value, if this setting is set as “1”, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value. The primary voltage is converted into secondary voltage according to rated secondary voltage of VT (i.e. the system setting [U2n_PP]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the virtual rated secondary voltage of VT is 100V by default. The primary current is converted into secondary current according to rated secondary current of reference CT (i.e. the system setting [I2n_Ref), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the primary current is converted into secondary current according to the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT. 13.

[Opt_Display_Settings]

If this setting is not configured, the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary value by default. If this setting is set as “0”, the protection settings are set and displayed as primary value, if this setting is set as “1”, the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary value. The primary voltage is converted into secondary voltage according to rated secondary voltage of VT (i.e. the system setting [U2n_PP]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the virtual rated secondary voltage of VT is 100V by default. The primary current is converted into secondary current according to rated secondary current of reference CT (i.e. the system setting [I2n_Ref]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the primary current is converted into secondary current according to the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT. 14.

[En_DualNet_GOOSE]

The setting is valid only when GOOSE is enabled. If single/double-net mode is enabled (i.e. the setting is set as “1”), for the single-net connected signal, the related alarm signal of network B will be shielded. 

Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupComm Settings

7.3 Label Settings 

Setting list No.

Symbol

Description

1

Name_Busx

Label setting of busbar No.x

2

Name_Bayn

Label setting of bay n

Following label settings are configured only for digital substation 3

Bm.Name_n_GCommLink

Label setting of GOOSE communication link n of the GOOSE and

7-10


7 Settings SV module that located in slot No.m 4

Bm.Name_n_SVCommLink

Label setting of SV communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m

These settings are used to definite the label of each bay and busbar. They can be set by 6 characters at most. The label of each bay and busbar will influence the displayed contents of all reports, settings and metering that related with each bay and busbar. 

Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupLabel Settings

7.4 Function Links Function link is a special logic setting which is used to enable protection function. These function links can be configured through local HMI or remote PC (controlled by the function link [Link_RmtCtrlLink]). Each function link is one of the conditions that decide whether the relevant protection function is in service. If the virtual binary input [Link_RmtCtrlLink] is set as “1”, through SAS or RTU, the function link can be set as “1” or “0”; and it means that the relevant protection function can be in service or out of service through remote command. These function links provide a convenient way for the operator to put the function in service or out of service remotely away from an unattended substation. 

Setting list No.

Symbol

Remark Enable remote setting modification. Set it as “0” if only local setting

1

Link_RmtChgSetting

modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local and remote setting modification are both needed. If it is not configured for a project, its default value is “1”. Enable remote active setting group modification. Set it as “0” if only

2

Link_RmtChgGrp

local active setting group modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local and remote active setting group modification are both needed. If it is not configured for a project, its default value is “1”. Enable remote function links modification. Set it as “0” if only local

3

Link_RmtCtrlLink

function links modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local and remote function links modification are both needed. If it is not configured for a project, its default value is “1”. Enable all protective functions. All the protective functions can be

4

Link_Prot

enabled only when it is set as “1”. If it is set as “0”, all the protective functions is disabled. If it is not configured for a project, its default value is “1”.


7-11 Date: 2015-03-07

7 Settings No.

Symbol

5

87B.Link

6

50BF.Link

7

@Bayn.Link_Maintenance

Remark 1: Enabling busbar differential protection 0: Disabling busbar differential protection 1: Enabling feeder breaker failure protection 0: Disabling feeder breaker failure protection 1: Circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance, 0: Circuit breaker of bay n is not in maintenance Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary

8

Fdr.50DZ.Link

input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection 0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling

9

@Bayn.50DZ.Link

binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n 0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n Function link of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and

10

50SOTF.Link

function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling BC/BS SOTF protection 0: Disabling BC/BS SOTF protection Function link of enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay) (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is

11

@Bayn.50SOTF.Link

configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay) 0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay) Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer

12

50/51.Link

to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection 0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection

13

@Bayn.50/51P.Link

Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

7-12


7 Settings No.

Symbol

Remark configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n 0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n Function link of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary

14

@Bayn.50/51G.Link

input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n 0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n Function link of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a

15

62PD.Link

protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling PD protection 0: Disabling PD protection Function link of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function

16

@Bayn.62PD.Link

link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) 1: Enabling PD protection of bay n 0: Disabling PD protection of bay n

17

Link_IntLinkx

1: Two busbars are under inter-connected operation mode 0: Two busbars are not under inter-connected operation mode

Following function links are configured only for digital substation 1: Bay n is put into service. 18

@Bayn.Link_On

0: Bay n is out of service. It is configured when digital sampling mode is adopted. 1: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is enabled. The disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and

19

@Bayn.Link_DS

[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2]; 0: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is disabled. The disconnector position will be decided by disconnector position binary input. 1: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly if

20

@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1

[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”; 0: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as open enforcedly if [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”.

21

@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2

1: BB2 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly if [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”;


7-13 Date: 2015-03-07

7 Settings No.

Symbol

Remark 0: BB2 disconnector of bay n is taken as open enforcedly if [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”.



Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links

7.5 System Settings 

Setting list No.

Item

Setting Range

Default Setting

1

Active_Grp

1~10

2

PrimaryEquip_Name

Max 20 characters

3

fn

50Hz, 60Hz

50Hz

4

U1n_PP

1~1200kV

220kV

5

U2n_PP

1.00~200V

100V

6

Bayn.I1n

0~9999A

1200A

7

Bayn.I1n_CT1

0~9999A

1200A

8

Bayn.I1n_CT2

0~9999A

1200A

9

I1n_Ref

1~9999A

1200A

10

I2n_Ref

1A or 5A

1A

11

Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode

0, 1

0

12

Cfg_DS_BBx

00000000~01FFFFFE



Setting description

1.

[Active_Grp]

1

The number of active setting group, ten setting groups can be configured for busbar differential protection and breaker failure protection, and only one is active at a time. 2.

[PrimaryEquip_Name]

Name of the protected primary equipment, such as busbar, transformer, etc. 3.

[U1n_PP]

Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage of VT. 4.

[U2n_PP]

Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of VT. 5.

[Bayn.I1n]

Rated primary current of the CT of bay n. It should be set as “0” if the corresponding bay is not 7-14


7 Settings

used. When digital sampling mode is adopted, the setting range will be “-9999A~9999A”, if the polarity mark of CT of bay n is wrong, it can be corrected by setting [Bayn.I1n] as a negative value. 6.

[Bayn.I1n_CT1], [Bayn.I1n_CT2]

If there are two CTs available for bay n (such as a bus coupler with double CTs available), [Bayn.I1n_CT1] and [Bayn.I1n_CT2] are the rated primary current of the two CTs of bay n. They should be set as “0” if the corresponding bay is not used. When digital sampling mode is adopted, the setting range will be “-9999A~9999A”, if the polarity mark of CT1 or CT2 of bay n is wrong, it can be corrected by setting [Bayn.I1n_CT1] or [Bayn.I1n_CT2] as a negative value. 7.

[I1n_Ref]

Rated primary current of reference CT. This setting is used in case that the rated CT primary currents of each feeder connected to busbar are different. Among these CTs, the CT with the most applied ratio is taken as the reference CT. If the maximum CT ratio is two times larger than the minimum CT ratio, in order to ensure accuracy, the rated primary current of reference CT shall be half of the maximal rated primary current. For example, assume only 3 feeders are connected to the busbar. The CT ratios are 600:5 (feeder 02), 600:5 (feeder 03) and 1200:5 (feeder 04). Then, this setting should be set as “600”. 8.

[I2n_Ref]

The rated secondary current of reference CT. This setting is used in case that the rated secondary current of each feeder connected to busbar are different. Among these CTs, the CT with the most applied ratio is taken as the reference CT. If digital sampling is adopted, it is the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT. It can be set according to user’s habit. If the sampled values are displayed as secondary value, the primary current are converted into secondary current according to it. If all the protection settings are set as secondary value, users should set all the current settings according to it. 9.

[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode]

When PCS-915IC is applied to an unearthed system, it should be set as “1”. It will affect the settings of voltage controlled element, please refer to Section 3.12.6 and Section 3.5.6, the criterion of VT circuit supervision will also change, please refer to Section 3.14. 10. [Cfg_DS_BBx] Disconnector position configuration setting of BBx. In the case of single busbar with bus section arrangement, the setting is used to indicate which busbar zone the feeder is connected to. The setting is consisted of 32 binary digits but 8 hexadecimal digits can be viewed through device LCD screen. The definition of the system setting is as follows.


7-15 Date: 2015-03-07

7 Settings

Bay 07

Bay 06

Bay 05

Bay 04

Bay 03

Bay 02

Bay 01

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Bay 23

Bay 22

Bay 21

Bay 20

Bay 19

Bay 18

Bay 17

0

Bay 08

1

Bay 24

2

Bay 09

3

Bay 25

4

Bay 10

5

0

6

Bay 11

7

0

8

Bay 12

9

0

10

Bay 13

0

11

0

30

12

Bay 14

Bay 5

31

0

13

Bay 16

14

0

15

The feeder bay is connected to BBx if corresponding binary digit of [Cfg_DS_BBx] is set as “1”. Generally, Bay 01 is connected with BC, so bit 0 of [Cfg_DS_BBx] is not used. For double-CT BC, bay 01 and bay 02 will be occupied, so bit 0 and bit 1 of [Cfg_DS_BBx] are not used. 

Access path:

MainMenuSettingsSystem Settings

7.6 GOOSE Receiving Links GOOSE receiving links will changed according to the specific project, so it is not listed here. Users can see the GOOSE receiving links of each project via the PCS-Explorer software). 

Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Recv Links

7.7 GOOSE Sending Links NOTICE! In this section, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of bay n. 

Setting list No.



Symbol

Remark

1

@Bayn.GLink_Send_Trp

GOOSE sending link of tripping of bay n (n=1~23)

2

@Bayn.GLink_Send_TT

GOOSE sending link of transfer tripping of bay n (n=2~23)

Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Send Links

7-16


8 Human Machine Interface

8 Human Machine Interface Table of Contents 8 Human Machine Interface ................................................................ 8-a 8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview .............................................................. 8-1 8.1.1 Functionality ......................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1.2 Keypad and Keys ................................................................................................................. 8-2 8.1.3 LED Indications .................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.4 Front Communication Port ................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 8-4

8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree ...................................................................... 8-5 8.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 8-5 8.2.2 Measurements ..................................................................................................................... 8-8 8.2.3 Status ................................................................................................................................... 8-8 8.2.4 Records .............................................................................................................................. 8-10 8.2.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 8-10 8.2.6 Print .....................................................................................................................................8-11 8.2.7 Local Cmd .......................................................................................................................... 8-13 8.2.8 Information ......................................................................................................................... 8-14 8.2.9 Test..................................................................................................................................... 8-14 8.2.10 Clock ................................................................................................................................ 8-16 8.2.11 Language ......................................................................................................................... 8-16

8.3 Understand LCD Display .............................................................................. 8-16 8.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 8-16 8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation ...................................................................................... 8-16 8.3.3 Display When Tripping ....................................................................................................... 8-17 8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition ..................................................................................... 8-21 8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Status Changes ..................................................................... 8-22


8-a Date: 2014-09-20


8.3.6 Display Device Logs .......................................................................................................... 8-25

8.4 Keypad Operation ......................................................................................... 8-26 8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values ............................................................................................ 8-26 8.4.2 View Status of binary signals ............................................................................................. 8-26 8.4.3 View Device Records......................................................................................................... 8-27 8.4.4 View Device Setting ........................................................................................................... 8-27 8.4.5 Modify Device Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-28 8.4.6 Copy Protection Setting ..................................................................................................... 8-30 8.4.7 Print Device Records ......................................................................................................... 8-31 8.4.8 Switch Setting Group ......................................................................................................... 8-32 8.4.9 Delete Records .................................................................................................................. 8-33 8.4.10 Modify Device Clock ........................................................................................................ 8-34 8.4.11 View Module Information ................................................................................................. 8-35 8.4.12 Check Software Version .................................................................................................. 8-35 8.4.13 Communication Test ........................................................................................................ 8-36 8.4.14 Select Language .............................................................................................................. 8-36

List of Figures Figure 8.1-1 Typical front panel of 8U chassis ......................................................................... 8-1 Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel .................................................................... 8-2 Figure 8.1-3 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel .................................. 8-4 Figure 8.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102M ................................................... 8-5 Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of PCS-915 ............................................................................................ 8-7 Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram .................................................................... 8-17 Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report ................................................................................ 8-18 Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report ................................................... 8-19 Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report ................................................................................ 8-21 Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report ............................................................... 8-22 Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report ..................................................................................... 8-25 Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password............................................................................ 8-29

8-b



Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings.......................................................................... 8-30 Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings.......................................................................... 8-30 Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings...................................................................................... 8-31 Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group .................................................................... 8-33 Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report.................................................................................... 8-34 Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock ................................................................................. 8-35 Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language ............................................................................ 8-37

List of Tables Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable ................................................................................. 8-4 Table 8.3-1 Operation elements list ......................................................................................... 8-19 Table 8.3-2 Binary input list ...................................................................................................... 8-22 Table 8.3-3 User operating event list ....................................................................................... 8-25


8-c Date: 2014-09-20


8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview The human-machine interface is implemented by human-machine interface (HMI) module which includes the following components: 

A 320×240 backlight LCD visible in dim lighting conditions for monitoring status, fault diagnostics and setting, etc.



LED indicators on the front panel for denoting the status of this protection operation.



A 9-key keypad on the front panel of the device for full access to the device.

HEALTHY MISC ALM

PCS-915 BUSBAR RELAY

4

14

5

15

6

16

7

17

8

18

9

19

10

20

GR P

13

ENT

C

3

5

11 12

ES

1 2

1

3

4

2

Figure 8.1-1 Typical front panel of 8U chassis Indication No.

Description

1

A 320×240 dots liquid crystal display

2

20 LED indicators

3

A 9-key keypad

4

A multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC

5

Logo, device type and name

8.1.1 Functionality 

The HMI module helps to view activated LED or a report display on the LCD after an


8-1 Date: 2014-09-20


incident occurred. 

Operator is free to browse the data.



Navigate through the menu commands to locate the interested data.

8.1.2 Keypad and Keys The keypad and keys on the front panel of the device provide convenience to the operator to view data or change the device’s setting.

GR P ESC

The keypad contains nine keys with different function. Following figure shows the keypad and keys.

ENT

+ -

Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel No.

Symbol ,

and

Description

1

,

, arrow buttons

Move between selectable branches of the menu tree.

2

“+”, “-“

Change parameters or setting values.

3

ENT

Provide Enter/Execute function.

4

GRP

Setting Group selection.

5

ESC

Exit the present level in the menu tree.

NOTICE! Any setting change shall be confirmed by pressing “+”, “”, “”, “-“, “ENT” in sequence. Any report deletion shall be executed by pressing “+”, “-“, “+”, “-“, “ENT” in sequence.

8.1.3 LED Indications 20 LED indicators are available for PCS-915, the 20 LED indicators are, from top to bottom, operation (HEALTHY), self-supervision (MISC ALM), others are configurable, please refer to Chapter 9 “Configurable Function” for details. A brief explanation about some common LED indicators has been listed as bellow. LED HEALTHY

Display Off

Description When the device is out of service or any hardware error is detected during self-check.

8-2


8 Human Machine Interface LED

Display

Description

Green

Lit when the device is in service and ready for operation.

Off

When device in normal operating condition.

Yellow

Lit when other abnormality occurs.

Off

When the device is in normal operating condition.

Yellow

Lit when VT circuit failure or CT circuit failure occurs.

Off


Yellow

Lit when disconnector position is abnormal

Off


Red

Lit when busbar differential protection operates to trip.

Off


Red

Lit when breaker failure protection operates to trip.

Off


MISC ALM

CT/VT ALM

DS ALM

BBP TRIP

BFP TRIP

MISC TRIP Red

Lit when misc operation signal (Op_MISC) is issued. Please refer to Section 8.3.3.



The “HEALTHY” LED can only be turned on by energizing the device again to restart the relay.



“xx ALM” LED is turned on when corresponding abnormalities mentioned above occurs and turned off if the abnormalities are removed except for CT circuit failure alarm. CT circuit failure alarm can be reset when the failure is removed and the device is rebooted or energize the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or press “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously



The “xx TRIP” LED is turned on and latched once any protection element operates. The “xx TRIP” LED can be turned off by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg].

8.1.4 Front Communication Port There is a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel. This port can be used as an RS-232 serial port as well as a twisted-pair ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized cable is applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.

P2

P1

P3


8-3 Date: 2014-09-20

8 Human Machine Interface Figure 8.1-3 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel

In the above figure and the following table: P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here. P2: To connect the twisted-pair ethernet port of the computer. P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer. The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table. Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable Terminal No.

Core color

Function

Device side

Computer side

(Left)

(Right)

1

Orange & white

TX+ of the ethernet port

P1-1

P2-1

2

Orange

TX- of the ethernet port

P1-2

P2-2

3

Green & white

RX+ of the ethernet port

P1-3

P2-3

4

Blue

TXD of the RS-232 serial port

P1-4

P3-2

5

Brown & white

RXD of the RS-232 serial port

P1-5

P3-3

6

Green

RX- for the ethernet port

P1-6

P2-6

7

Blue & white

8

Brown

The ground connection of the RS-232 port.

P1-7 P1-8

P3-5

8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, takes NR1102M as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-4. Its rear view and the definition of terminals. The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-Explorer) after connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the instruction manual of PCS-Explorer). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet interface in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”, it should be ensured that the protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC) PC: IP address is set as “198.87.96.102”, subnet mask is set as “255.255.255.0” The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX, [Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102) If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled. If using other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2] must be set as “1”.

8-4



NR1102M

ETHERNET

Network A

Network B

ETHERNET

Network C

Network D

SYN+ SYNSGND RTS TXD SGND

Figure 8.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102M

8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree 8.2.1 Overview Pressing “▲” at any running interface can return to the main menu. Select different submenu by “▲” and “▼”. Enter the selected submenu by pressing “ENT” or “►”. Press “◄” and return to the previous menu. Press “ESC” and exit the main menu directly. For fast return to the command menu, one command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its first execution. Up to five latest menu commands can be recorded in the quick menu. by “first in first out” principle. It is arranged from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command menus. Press “▲” to enter the main menu, the interface is shown in the following diagram:


8-5 Date: 2014-09-20


Quick Menu

Language Main Menu

If the protective device is powered for the first time, there is no recorded shortcut menu. Press “▲” to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

Language Clock Test Information Local Cmd Print Settings Records Status Measurements

8-6


8 Human Machine Interface Main Menu

Measurements

Settings

Local Cmd

System Settings

Measurements1

Reset Target Trig Oscillograph

Prot Settings

Measured Values

Download

BBP Settings 50DZ Settings

Phase Angle Cal Values

Clear Counter Confirm Disconnector

BC BFP Settings Measurements2

Fdr BFP Settings

Measured Values

SOTF Settings

Phase Angle

OC Settings

Cal Values

PD Settings

Information Version Info Board Info

Copy Settings Logic Links

Status

Function Links GOOSE Send Links

Inputs

Device Test

GOOSE Recv Links

Prot Inputs

Disturb Events

Device Setup

Bay Inputs Function Inputs

All Test Select Test

Device Settings Comm Settings

FD Inputs Bay Inputs

Test

Superv Events

Label Settings All Test Select Test

Print

Function Inputs GOOSE Inputs Contact Inputs

IO Events

Device Info Settings

All Test Select Test

System Settings Superv State

Prot Settings

Prot Superv

BBP Settings

Zone Cal BI

BC BFP Settings

Prot Misc Superv

Fdr BFP Settings FD Superv

SOTF Settings OC Settings

FD Bay Superv

Disturb Items GOOSE Comm Counter SV Comm Counter

PD Settings All Settings

FD Misc Superv GOOSE Superv

Logic Links

MiscBrd Superv

Function Links GOOSE Send Links GOOSE Recv Links All Settings

Logic Links State Function Links GOOSE Send Links

Internal Signal

50DZ Settings

Prot Bay Superv

SV Superv

GOOSE Testing

Clock

Language

Device Setup

GOOSE Recv Links Device Settings Comm Settings Label Settings Records Disturb Records Superv Events IO Events Device Logs Clear Records

All Settings All Settings Latest Chgd Settings Disturb Records Superv Events IO Events Device Status Waveforms Diff Wave Bay Wave 1 Bay Wave 2 Bay Wave 3 Bay Wave 4 Bay Wave 5 Bay Wave 6 IEC103 Info Cancel Print

Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of PCS-915 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

8-7 Date: 2014-09-20


Under the main interface, press “▲” to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing “▲”, “▼” and “ENT”. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram provides the integral structure and all the submenus under menu tree of the protection device. This is the maximized menu of PCS-915, for a specific project, if some function is not available, the corresponding submenu will hidden.

8.2.2 Measurements This menu is used to display real time AC voltage and AC current sampled values of the protective device. These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device. This menu comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 5.2 about the details of sampled values. No.

Item

Description

1

Measurements1

Display sampled values on protection DSP module.

2

Measurements2

Display sampled values on fault detector DSP module.

8.2.2.1 Measurements1 The submenu “Measurements1” has following submenus. No.

Item

Description

1

Measured Values

Display measured analog values on protection DSP module.

2

Phase Angle

Display phase angles on protection DSP module.

3

Cal Values

Display measured values for debugging on protection DSP module.

8.2.2.2 Measurements2 The submenu “Measurements2” has following lower submenus. No.

Item

Description

1

Measured Values

Display measured analog values on fault detector DSP module.

2

Phase Angle

Display phase angles on fault detector DSP module.

3

Cal Values

Display measured values for debugging on fault detector DSP module.

8.2.3 Status This menu is used to display real time binary inputs and alarm signals of the protective device. These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device. This menu comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 8.3.5 about the details of binary inputs and Section 4.5 about the details of alarm signals. No.

Item

Description

1

Inputs

Display the status of binary inputs

2

Superv State

Display the status of alarm signals

3

Logic Links State

Display the status of logic links

8-8



8.2.3.1 Inputs The submenu “Inputs” has following submenus. No.

Item

1

GOOSE Inputs

2

Prot Inputs

3

FD Inputs

Description Display the status of GOOSE binary inputs Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of protection DSP module Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of fault detector DSP module Display the status of other binary inputs (such as time synchronizing binary

4

Contact Inputs

input, printing binary input, maintenance binary input, resetting binary input and opto binary inputs).

(1) The submenu “Prot Inputs” includes the following command menus. No.

Item

1

Bay Inputs

2

Function Input

Description Display the status of binary inputs about each bay on protection DSP module. Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on protection DSP module.

(2) The submenu “FD Inputs” includes the following command menus. No.

Item

1

Bay Inputs

2

Function Input

Description Display the status of binary inputs about each bay on fault detector DSP module. Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on fault detector DSP module.

8.2.3.2 Superv State The submenu “Superv State” has following submenus. No.

Item

Description

1

Prot Superv

Display the status of self-supervision signals on protection DSP module

2

FD Superv

Display the status of self-supervision signals on fault detector DSP module

3

GOOSE Superv

Display the status of GOOSE self-supervision signals

4

SV Superv

Display the status of SV self-supervision signals

5

MiscBrd Superv

Display the status of self-supervision signals of modules of process layer

The submenu “Prot Superv” includes the following command menus.


8-9 Date: 2014-09-20

8 Human Machine Interface No.

Item

1

Prot Bay Superv

2

Prot Misc Superv

Description Display the status of self-supervision signals about each bay on protection DSP module. Display the status of other self-supervision signals on protection DSP module.

The submenu “FD Superv” includes the following command menus. No.

Item

1

FD Bay Superv

2

FD Misc Superv

Description Display the status of self-supervision signals about each bay on fault detector DSP module. Display the status of other self-supervision signals on fault detector DSP module.

8.2.3.3 Logic Links State The submenu “Logic Links State” has following submenus. No.

Item

Description

1

Function Links

Display the status of function links.

2

GOOSE Send Links

Display the status of GOOSE sending links.

3

GOOSE Recv Links

Display the status of GOOSE receiving links.

8.2.4 Records This menu displays protection tripping report, self-supervision report, binary input change report and control report. The protective device can store 1024 pieces of recorders for each kind of report in non-volatile memory. No.

Item

Description

1

Disturb Records

View the tripping report

2

Superv Events

View the self-supervision report

3

IO Events

View the binary input change report

4

Device Logs

View the control report

5

Clear Records

Clear all the device records

8.2.5 Settings This submenu is used to browse, modify and set all settings including device settings, communication parameters, label settings, function links, GOOSE links, system settings and protection settings. This menu includes the command menus and submenus as follows: The submenu “Settings” includes the following command menus.

8-10



Item

Function description

1

System Settings

Set the system settings

2

Prot Settings

Set the protection settings

3

Logic Links

Includes function links and GOOSE links

4

Device Setup

Set the settings related to device setup

8.2.5.1 Device Setup The submenu “Device Setup” includes the following command menus. No.

Item


1

Device Settings

Set the device settings

2

Comm Settings

Set the communication settings.

3

Label Settings

Set the label settings of each protected element.

8.2.5.2 Logic Links The submenu “Logic Links” includes the following command menus. No.

Item


1

Function Links

Set the function links.

2

GOOSE Send Links

Set the GOOSE sending links.

3

GOOSE Recv Links

Set the GOOSE receiving links.

8.2.5.3 Prot Settings The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus. No.

Item


1

BBP Settings

Set the settings about busbar differential protection

2

50DZ Settings

Set the settings about dead zone fault protection

3

BC BFP Settings

Set the settings about BC/BS breaker failure protection

4

Fdr BFP Settings

Set the settings about feeder breaker failure protection

5

SOTF Settings

Set the settings about switch-onto-fault protection

6

OC Settings

Set the settings about overcurrent protection

7

PD Settings

Set the settings about pole disagreement protection

8

Copy Settings

To copy protection settings from one group to another group

8.2.6 Print This menu is used to print the self-supervision report, binary input change report, waveform and the information related with settings, fault report and 103 protocol, and so on. This menu includes the command menus and submenus as follows:


8-11 Date: 2014-09-20

8 Human Machine Interface No. 1

Item Device Info

Description Print the description information of protective device. Print settings, includes device settings, communication parameters, label

2

settings, function links, GOOSE links, system settings, and protection

Settings

settings. It can print by different classifications as well as printing all settings of the device. Besides, it can also print out the latest changed setting item.

3

Disturb Records

Print trip reports.

4

Superv Events

Print self-check alarm and device operation abnormal alarm reports.

5

IO Events

Print status change of binary signal.

6

Device Status

Print all the values measured by the device

7

Waveforms

Print recorded waveforms. Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN), information

8

IEC103 Info

serial number (INF), general classification service group number, and channel number (ACC).

9

Cancel Print

Cancel the print command

8.2.6.1 Settings The submenu “Settings” includes the following command menus. No.

Item


1

System Settings

Print the system settings.

2

Prot Settings

Print the protection settings

3

Logic Links

Print the function links or GOOSE links

4

Device Setup

Print the settings related to device setup

5

All Settings

6

Latest Chgd Settings

Print the content of all settings including device setups, system settings, protection settings and logic links. Print the content of the latest changed setting

(1) The submenu “Device Setup” includes the following command menus. No.

Item


1

Device Settings

Print the device settings.

2

Comm Settings

Print the communication settings.

3

Label Settings

Print the label settings of protective device.

4

All Settings

Print all the settings related to device setup

(2) The submenu “Logic Links” includes the following command menus. No.

Item


1

Function Links

Print the function links.

2

GOOSE Send Links

Print the GOOSE sending links.

8-12



Item


3

GOOSE Recv Links

Print the GOOSE receiving links.

4

All Settings

Print the all the logic links

(3) The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus. No.

Item


1

BBP Settings

Print the settings about busbar differential protection

2

50DZ Settings

Print the settings about dead zone fault protection

3

BC BFP Settings

Print the settings about BC/BS breaker failure protection

4

Fdr BFP Settings

Print the settings about feeder breaker failure protection

5

SOTF Settings

Print the settings about switch-onto-fault protection

6

OC Settings

Print the settings about overcurrent protection

7

PD Settings

Print the settings about pole disagreement protection

8

All Settings

Print the all the protection settings

8.2.6.2 Waveforms The submenu “Waveforms” has following submenus. No.

Item

Description

1

Diff Wave

To print differential current waveforms and busbar voltage waveforms

2

Bay Wave 1

To print current waveforms of Bay 01~04

3

Bay Wave 2


4

Bay Wave 3


5

Bay Wave 4


6

Bay Wave 5


7

Bay Wave 6


8.2.7 Local Cmd This menu is used to reset the latched tripping relay, protection device signal lamp and LCD display. It can record the currently acquired waveform of the protection device under normal condition for printing and uploading to substation automatic system (SAS). Besides, it can send out the request of program download and clear the communication statistic information about GOOSE, SV and optical fibre. This menu includes the following command menus. No.

Item


1

Reset Target

Reset the local signal, the signal indicator lamp and the LCD display.

2

Trig Oscillograph

Trigger waveform recording.

3

Download

Send out the download request.


8-13 Date: 2014-09-20

8 Human Machine Interface 4

Clear Counter

Clear the communication statistic information about GOOSE and SV

5

Confirm Disconnector

Confirm the disconnector position

8.2.8 Information In this menu the LCD displays current working state of each intelligent module and software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module. This menu includes the following command menus. No.

Item

Function description Display software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,

1

Version Info

which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and management sequence number.

2

Board Info

Monitor the current working state of each intelligent module.

8.2.9 Test This menu is used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the device. It can be used to check module information and item fault message, and fulfill the communication test function. It’s also used to generate all kinds of report or event to transmit to the SAS without any external input, so as to debug the communication on site. This menu includes the following command menus. No.

Item

Function description Automatically generate all kinds of message to transmit to the backstage,

1

Device Test

including tripping, self-check and binary signal transmission. It can realize the transmission of messages of different classification. Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit and

2

Internal Signal

3

Disturb Items

Check the fault report one by one.

4

GOOSE Comm Counter

Display the communication statistic information of GOOSE

5

SV Comm Counter

Display the communication statistic information of SV

relevant information about each protected bay

8.2.9.1 Device Test The submenu “Device Test” has following submenus. No.

Item

1

Disturb Events

2

Superv Events

3

IO Events

Description View the relevant information about tripping report (only used for debugging persons) View the relevant information about alarm report (only used for debugging persons) View the relevant information about binary input change report (only used for debugging persons)

8-14


8 Human Machine Interface No. 4

Item GOOSE Testing

Description View the relevant information about GOOSE (only used for debugging persons)

The submenu “Disturb Events” includes the following command menus. No.

Item

Description

1

All Test

Ordinal test of all protection elements

2

Select Test

Selective test of corresponding classification

The submenu “Superv Events” includes the following command menus. No.

Item

Description

1

All Test

Ordinal test of all self-supervisions

2

Select Test


The submenu “IO Events” includes the following command menus. No.

Item

Description

1

All Test

Ordinal test of change of all binary inputs

2

Select Test


8.2.9.2 Internal Signal The submenu “Internal Signal” has following submenus. No. 1

Item Zone Cal BI

Description Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit

The submenu “Zone Cal BI” will display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit. It can help users to know the current composition of differential current. If the value of the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit is “1”, it means that the current of bay n is included in differential current. Item @Bayn.VBI_CZ @Bayn.VBI_DZ_@BBx

@Bayn.VBI_CT1_CZ

@Bayn.VBI_CT2_CZ

@Bayn.VBI_CT1_DZ_@BBx @Bayn.VBI_CT2_DZ_@BBx

Description Calculated binary input of bay n for check zone differential circuit Calculated binary input of bay n for discriminating zone differential circuit of BBx Calculated binary input of CT1 of bay n for check zone differential circuit (only for double-CTs BC/BS) Calculated binary input of CT2 of bay n for check zone differential circuit (only for double-CTs BC/BS) Calculated binary input of CT1 of bay n for discriminating zone differential circuit of BBx (only for double-CTs BC/BS) Calculated binary input of CT2 of bay n for discriminating zone differential


8-15 Date: 2014-09-20

8 Human Machine Interface circuit of BBx (only for double-CTs BC/BS)

8.2.10 Clock The time of internal clock can be viewed in “Clock” option. The time is displayed in the form YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.

8.2.11 Language This menu is mainly used for set LCD display language.

8.3 Understand LCD Display 8.3.1 Overview There are five kinds of LCD display, system topology if the protective device is under the normal condition, tripping reports, alarm reports, binary input changing reports and control reports. Tripping reports and alarm reports will be continuously displayed until operators energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg]. User can press “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously to switch view of trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display. Binary change reports will be displayed before returning to the previous display interface automatically. Control reports will not pop up and can only be viewed by navigating the corresponding menu.

8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation After the protection device is powered and enters initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds to complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization, the “HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device goes out. Under normal condition, the LCD will display the interface similar as Figure 8.3-1. For different busbar arrangements, the displayed interfaces are different. The LCD displays in white color backlight which is activated if there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished automatically after 60 seconds without any operation.

8-16



Data and time of equipment clock

Communication address

2010-09-28 10:10:00

Addr:098

Group:01

Label of BB No.1 Fdr01 Label of BC Phase-A current of BC

BC

Fdr03

0.01A

0.01A

Fdr05 0.00A

Fdr07 0.00A

Active group number

Label of each feeder Phase-A current of each feeder

0.01A Disconnector (Closed)

BB1 Bus Coupler means BC is open

BB2

Disconnector (Open)

means BC is closed 0.01A Fdr02

Label of BB No.2

0.00A

0.01A Fdr04

Fdr06

Three-phase voltage of BB No.1

U1:

57.70V

57.70V

57.70V

Three-phase voltage of BB No.2

U2:

57.70V

57.70V

57.70V

Three-phase differential current

DI:

0.00A

0.00A

0.01A

0.01A Fdr08

Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram

The middle part of Figure 8.3-1 displays the single line diagram of busbar with feeders whose CT correction coefficient is not zero. The label of each feeder (at most 6 digits or characters, please refer to label settings in Section 7.3) and feeder current is shown by the side of the corresponding feeder. System frequency (Freq), three-phase busbar voltages (Ux), check zone differential current (DI), discriminating zone differential current of BBx (DIx) may be shown under the single line diagram (x=1, 2, 3 or 4). If the protective device receives the IRIG-B signal for time synchronization and can correctly decode it, “S” will be displayed on the top left corner of LCD. If all feeders can not displayed in one page, the single line diagram will move automatically and circularly from right to left if no key is pressed, and will move to left quickly by pressing key “◄” continuously, move to right quickly by pressing key “►” continuously. The displayed content contains: the realtime date and time of the protection device (with a format of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), realtime valid setting group number, three-phase current and voltage sampling values on each side and differential current etc.

8.3.3 Display When Tripping This protection device can store 32 fault reports and 32 fault waveforms. When there is protection element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest fault report. PCS-915IC can provide two different LCD display interfaces based on the availability of self-check report. As shown in Figure 8.3-2, if the self-check report is not provided, the display interface will only show the fault report.


8-17 Date: 2014-09-20


NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip 0000ms 0006ms

Pkp_FD A

87B.Op_TrpBB1_DPFC BC Fdr02 Fdr03 Fdr06 Fdr08

0006ms

87B.Op_TrpBC

Id_max

1.05A

Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report

NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip: shows the SOE number, the time when fault detector picks up (the format is year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond) and the title of the report. 0000ms Pkp_FD

shows the fault detector of protection element and the operation time of fault detector is fixed at 0ms.

0006ms A 87B.Op_TrpBB1_DPFC BC Fdr02 Fdr03 Fdr06 Fdr08

shows the relative operation time of protection element, protection elements and trip elements.

0006ms 87B.Op_TrpBC

shows the relative operation time and operation element of protection element

Id_max 1.05A

shows the maximum differential current

If the fault report and the self-check alarm report occur simultaneously, as shown in Figure 8.3-2, the upper half part on the screen is fault report, and the lower half part is self-check report. The fault report includes fault report number, fault name, generating time of fault report (with a format of year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond), protection element and tripping element. If there is protection element, the relative time will be displayed on the basis of fault detector element and fault phase. If the upper half part on the screen is not big enough to list all the protection elements and tripping elements, the report will be automatically displayed in a cycle without pressing any key on the front panel. The displayed content of the lower half part is the alarm element. If the alarm element is more than one, all the alarm elements will be displayed in a cycle.

8-18



NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip 0000ms

Pkp_FD

0006ms

A

87B.Op_TrpBB1_DPFC BC Fdr02 Fdr03 Fdr06 Fdr08

0006ms

87B.Op_TrpBC

Id_max

1.05A

Superv Events Alm_Maintenance

Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report

All the trip information are listed in the following tables: 1.

Operation elements Table 8.3-1 Operation elements list

No.

Item

Description

1

87B.Op_Dly1_Biased

Stage 1 of backup protection operates.

2

87B.Op_Dly2_Biased

Stage 2 of backup protection operates.

3

87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased

Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

4

87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC

DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

5


Phase-A stage 1 of backup protection operates.

6


Phase-B stage 1 of backup protection operates.

7


Phase-C stage 1 of backup protection operates.

8


Phase-A stage 2 of backup protection operates.

9


Phase-B stage 2 of backup protection operates.

10


Phase-C stage 2 of backup protection operates.

11

87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_Biased

Phase-A steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

12

87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_Biased

Phase-B steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

13

87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_Biased

Phase-C steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

14

87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_DPFC

Phase-A DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

15

87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_DPFC

Phase-B DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

16

87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_DPFC

Phase-C DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.

17

87B.Op_Biased

Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar.


8-19 Date: 2014-09-20


Item

Description

18

87B.Op_DPFC

DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar.

19

87B.Op_Trp@BBx

20

87B.Op

21

87B.Op_Trp@Bayn

22

87B.Op_A_Trp@Bayn

23

87B.Op_B_Trp@Bayn

24

87B.Op_C_Trp@Bayn

25

@Bayn.50DZ.Op

26

@Bayn.Op_TT

27

@Bayn.50SOTF.Op_Trp

SOTF protection of bay n operates (only for BC or BS bay).

28

@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp

Phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates.

29

@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp

Ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates.

30

@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp

Pole disagreement protection of bay n operates.

31

50BF.Op_Trp@BBx

Breaker failure protection operates to trip BBx.

32

@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB

33

@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC

Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to trip BC/BS.

34

@Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp

Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to re-trip the breaker.

35

50BF.Op_Trp@Bayn

36

50BF.Op

DPFC busbar differential protection or steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx. DPFC busbar differential protection or steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar. Busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC or BS bay). Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC or BS bay). Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC or BS bay). Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC or BS bay). Dead zone fault protection of bay n operates. Dead zone fault protection or breaker failure protection of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit breaker.

Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to trip busbar zone (includes BC/BS bay and feeder bay).

Breaker failure protection operates to trip breaker of bay n (only for BC or BS bay). BC/BS breaker failure protection or feeder breaker failure protection operates. Misc operation signal, it can be used to trigger LED indicator (MISC TRIP). The signal will be issued if any of following operation signals is issued:

37

Op_Misc

87B.Op_Trp@BCy,

87B.Op_Trp@BSz,

@BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp,

@Bayn.Op_TT,

@BSz.50SOTF.Op_Trp,

@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp, @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp, @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp, @BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB, @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC,

@BSz.50BF.Op_TrpBB, @Bayn.50DZ.Op,

50BF.Op_Trp@BCy,

@Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp, 50BF.Op_Trp@BSz. 38

Op_Prot

Any of protective element operates.

8-20



Item

Description

39

Op_Prot_Latched

Any of protective element operates (latched signal).

40

FD.Pkp

Fault detector picks up.

41

TrigDFR_Man

Waveform recording function is triggered manually.

42

TrigDFR_Rmt

Waveform recording function is triggered remotely.

43

BI_TrigDFR

Waveform recording function is triggered by corresponding binary input.

44

Bx.TrigDFR_DataErr_SV

2.

Sampled values of Bx (GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x) errors to trigger waveform recording function

Trip elements

No.

Item

1

@Bayn

2

@Bayn.Op_TT

Description Trip circuit breaker of bay n Dead zone fault protection or breaker failure protection of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit breaker

8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition This protection device can store 1024 self-check reports. During the running of protection device, the self-check report of hardware errors or system running abnormity will be displayed immediately.

Superv Events NO.26 2010-04-29 09:18:47:500ms Alm_Maintenance

0

1

Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report

Superv Events Alm_Maintenance

shows the title of the report shows the content of abnormality alarm

If view the corresponding alarm report from the submenu “Superv Events” under the menu of


8-21 Date: 2014-09-20


“Records”, the SOE number and the real time of the report will be indicated in the alarm report. All the alarm elements have been listed in Chapter “Supervision”.

8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Status Changes If the status of any binary changes or any logic link is modified, as shown in Figure 8.3-5, a new report on the state changes will be automatically displayed on LCD. PCS-915 can store 1024 binary input change reports. During the running of the device, the signals will be displayed at the moment when the its state changes.

IO Events NO.26 2010-04-29 09:18:47:500ms 0

87B.BI_En

1

Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report

IO Events NO.26

shows the number and the title of the report

2010-04-29 09:18:47:500

shows the date and time of the report occurred, the format is year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond

87B.BI_En 0->1

shows the state change of binary input, including the binary input name and the original state and final state

All the binary inputs are listed in the following tables: Table 8.3-2 Binary input list No.

Item

Description

1

BI_TimeSyn

Binary input of time synchronization pulse

2

BI_Print

Binary input of triggering printing

3

BI_Maintenance

4

BI_RstTarg

Binary input of blocking communication between equipment and substation automatic system (SAS) or remote terminal unit (RTU). Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment.

8-22



Item

Description

5

87B.BI_ExtBlk

External binary input of blocking busbar differential protection

6

@Bayn.BI_Cls

Binary input of closing circuit breaker of bay n

7

@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD

Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement status

8

@Bayn.BI_BFI

Three-phase breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n

9

@Bayn.BI_A_BFI

Phase-A breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n

10

@Bayn.BI_B_BFI

Phase-B breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n

11

@Bayn.BI_C_BFI

Phase-C breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n

12

@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI

Common breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n

13

50BF.BI_RlsVCE

14

@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx


15

@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx


16

@Bayn.BI_52a

Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n

17

@Bayn.BI_52b

Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n

18

@Bayn.BI_A_52a

Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n

19

@Bayn.BI_B_52a

Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n

20

@Bayn.BI_C_52a

Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n

21

@Bayn.BI_A_52b

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n

22

@Bayn.BI_B_52b

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n

23

@Bayn.BI_C_52b

24

@Bayn.BI_89a_Byp_@BBx

Normally open auxiliary contact of transfer bus disconnector of bay n

25

BI_ConfirmDS

Disconnector position confirm binary input

26

BI_TrigDFR

Trigger waveform recording binary input

27

87B.BI_En

Binary input of enabling busbar differential protection

28

87B.BI_Blk

Binary input of disabling busbar differential protection

29

BI_En_IntLinkx

Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker failure protection

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n

Binary input indicating that two busbars are under the inter-connected operation mode, if it is not configured, its default value is “0” Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is configured

30

Fdr.50DZ.BI_En

when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it is

31

@Bayn.50DZ.BI_En


32

50DZ.BI_Blk

Binary input of disabling feeder dead zone fault protection


8-23 Date: 2014-09-20


Item

Description Binary input of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when the

33

50SOTF.BI_En

basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) Binary input of enabling SOTF of BCy (it is configured when the basic

34

@BCy.50SOTF.BI_En

information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) Binary input of enabling SOTF of BSz (it is configured when the basic

35

@BSz.50SOTF.BI_En

information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))

36

50SOTF.BI_Blk

Binary input of disabling BC/BS SOTF protection Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the

37

50/51.BI_En

basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) Binary input of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

38

@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En

configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)) Binary input of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

39

@Bayn.50/51G.BI_En


40

50/51.BI_Blk

Binary input of disabling overcurrent protection Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection (it is configured

41

62PD.BI_En

when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)) Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection of bay n (it is

42

@Bayn.62PD.BI_En


43

62PD.BI_Blk

Binary input of disabling pole disagreement protection

44

50BF.BI_En

Binary input of enabling feeder breaker failure protection

45

50BF.BI_Blk

Binary input of disabling feeder breaker failure protection

46

BI_En_BC_Byp

47

BI_En_RevCT_Byp

Binary input indicating BC/BS breaker is used to substitute one of feeder breakers Reverse the polarity mark of BC/BS CT when BC/BS breaker is used to

8-24



Item

Description substitute one of feeder breakers

8.3.6 Display Device Logs This protection device can store 1024 pieces of the control report (i.e. user operating reports). During the running of the protection device, the running report will be displayed after any operation is conducted.

Device Logs NO.4 2010-04-29 10:18:47:569ms Settings_Chgd

Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report

Device Logs NO. 4

shows the title and the number of the report

2010-04-29 10:18:47:569

shows the date and the time when the report is created, the format is year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond

Settings_Chgd

shows the state content of the user operation report.

User operating information listed below may be displayed. Table 8.3-3 User operating event list No.

Message

Description

1

Reboot

The protective device has been reboot.

2

Reset_Target

The protective device has been reset.

3

Settings_Chgd

The settings of protective device have been changed.

4

ActiveGrp_Chgd

Active setting group has been changed.

5

Report_Cleared

All reports have been deleted. (User operating event can not be deleted)

6

Waveform_Cleared

All waveforms have been deleted.

7

Process_Exit

A subprocess has exited.


8-25 Date: 2014-09-20


Message

Description

8

Fail_Setting_OvRange

Any setting value is out of setting scope.

9

Alm_CommTest

The relay is in test mode.

10

Fail_BoardConfig

11

FD.Pkp

Fault detector picks up.

12

TrigDFR_Man

Waveform recording function is triggered manually.

13

TrigDFR_BI

Waveform recording function is triggered by corresponding binary input

14

TrigDFR_Rmt

Waveform recording function is triggered remotely

Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in boards and the designing drawing of an applied-specific project.

8.4 Keypad Operation 8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values The operation is as follows: 1.

Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Measurements” menu, and then press the “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press “ENT” to enter submenu.

4.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).

5.

Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.

6.

Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Measurements” menu).

8.4.2 View Status of binary signals The operation is as follows: 1.


2.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Status” menu, and then press the “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press “ENT” to enter submenu.

4.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).

5.


6.

Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Status” menu).

8-26



8.4.3 View Device Records The operation is as follows: 1.


2.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Records” menu, and then press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the key “ENT” to enter the submenu.

4.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down.

5.

Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record.

6.


7.

Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Records” menu).

For the fault report, view the single item fault report by the command menu “Disturb Items”, and the item fault report produces with change of any item of fault report. The item fault report can save up to 1024 events. The operation is as follows: 1.


2.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Disturb Items”, and then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.

4.

Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record.

5.

Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Test” menu).

8.4.4 View Device Setting Follow the steps below to view the device settings: 1.


2.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press “ENT” to enter the menu.

4.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.

5.

Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.

6.



8-27 Date: 2014-09-20


7.

Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).

NOTICE! If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side of the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu and the relative location of information where the current cursor points at.

8.4.5 Modify Device Setting The operation is as follows: 1.


2.


3.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press “ENT” to enter the menu.

4.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.

5.

Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.

6.


7.

Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings” ).

8.

Select the command menu “Device Settings”, “Label Settings”, or “Comm Settings”, users need to enter the submenu “Device Setup” firstly. Select the command menu “BBP Settings”, “50DZ Settings”, “BC BFP Settings”, “Fdr BFP Settings”, “SOTF Settings”, “OC Settings” or “PD Settings”, users need to enter the submenu “Prot Settings” firstly. Select the command menu “Function Links”, “GOOSE Send Links” or “GOOSE Recv Links”, users need to enter the submenu “Logic Links” firstly. Following takes modification of system settings as an example.

1.


2.


3.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “System Settings”, and then press “ENT” to enter the menu.

4.

Move the cursor to the setting item to be modified, and then press the key “ENT”.

5.

Press the key “＋” or “－” to modify the value (if the modified value is multi-bit, press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value), press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”. Press the key “ENT” to automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command

8-28



menu “System Settings”). 6.

Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are modified, press the key “◄”, “►” or “ESC”, and the LCD will display “Save or Not?”. Directly press the “ESC” or press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select the “Cancel”, and then press the key “ENT” to automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”).

7.

Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select “No” and press the key “ENT”, all modified setting item will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).

8.

Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to select “Yes”, and then press the key “ENT”, the LCD will display password input interface.

Password:

Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password

9.

Input a 4-bit password (“＋”, “◄”, “▲” or “－”). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, then press “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”. If the password is correct, LCD will display “Save Settings…”, and then exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”). The device setting modification is completed.

NOTICE! The above modification instructions are available for all setting items. NOTICE! After modifying the settings in menu “System Settings” or “Prot Settings”, the “HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will automatically restart and re-check the settings. The device will be blocked until the check process is finished. If selecting the command menu of protection element such as “BBP Settings”, the LCD will display the following interface: PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

8-29 Date: 2014-09-20


2. BBP Settings Please Select Group for Config Active Group:

01

Selected Group:

01

Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings

Then move the cursor to the modified value and press “ENT” to enter. For example, if the setting [87B.I_Bias] need to be modified, press the “ENT” to enter and the LCD will display the interface shown in Figure 8.4-3. Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value and then press the “ENT” to enter.

87B.I_Pkp Current Value

5.00

Modified Value

005.00

Min Value

0.05

Max Value

20.00

Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings

10. If selecting the other menus, move the cursor to the setting to be modified, and then press the “ENT”.

8.4.6 Copy Protection Setting The operation is as follows: 1.

Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu;

8-30



2.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;

3.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Protection Settings”, and then press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the command menu;

4.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Copy Settings”, and then press the key “ENT” to enter the menu. The following display will be shown on LCD.

Copy Settings

Active Group:

01

Copy To Group:

02

Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings

Press the key “＋” or “－” to modify the value. Press the key “ESC”, and return to the menu “Settings”. Press the “ENT”, the LCD will display the interface for password input, if the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, press the key “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the menu “Settings”. If the password is correct, the LCD will display “Copy Settings Success!”, and exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).

8.4.7 Print Device Records The operation is as follows: 1.


2.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Print” menu, and then press the “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the “ENT” to enter the menu. 

Selecting the “Disturb Records”, and then Press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”,


8-31 Date: 2014-09-20


the LCD will display “Start Printing... ”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”). If the printer doesn’t complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”). 

Selecting the command menu “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, and then press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor. Press the “＋” or “－” to select the starting and ending numbers of printing message. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).

4.

If selecting the command menu “IEC103 Info”, “Device Status” or “Device Info”, press the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start printing..”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).

5.

If selecting the “Settings”, press “ENT” or “►” to enter the submenu.

6.

After entering the submenu “Settings”, press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor, and then press the key “ENT” to print the corresponding default value. To select items to print: Press the key “＋” or “－” to select the setting group to print. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).

7.

After entering the submenu “Waveforms”, press the “＋” or “－” to select the printed waveform and press “ENT” to enter. With waveform data existing: Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “Waveforms”). If the printer does not complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Waveforms”). If there is no any waveform data, the LCD will display “No Waveform Data!”.

8.4.8 Switch Setting Group The operation is as follows: 1.

Exit the main menu.

2.

Press the “GRP”.

8-32



Change Active Group

Active Group:

01

Change To Group:

02

Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group

Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the main menu). After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display the password input interface. If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the key “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the “HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check the protection setting. If the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check is successful, the LCD will return to its original state.

8.4.9 Delete Records The operation is as follows: 1.

Exit the main menu.

2.

Press the “＋”, “－”, “＋”, “－” and key “ENT”; Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the original state). Press the key “ENT” to carry out the deletion.


8-33 Date: 2014-09-20


Press To Clear Press To Exit

Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report

NOTICE! The operation of deleting report will delete all messages except for user operation reports (i.e. control reports), including tripping reports, alarm reports and binary input change reports. The deleted reports are IRRECOVERABLE, so the function shall be used with great cautious.

8.4.10 Modify Device Clock The operation is as follows: 1.


2.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Clock” menu, and then press the key “ENT” to enter clock display.

8-34



Clock Year:

2010

Month:

04

Day:

28

Hour:

20

Minute:

59

Second:

14

Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock

3.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified.

4.

Press the key “＋” or “－”, to modify value, and then press the key “ENT” to save the modification and return to the main menu.

5.

Press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.

8.4.11 View Module Information The operation is as follows: 1.


2.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Board Info”, and then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.

4.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar.

5.

Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).

8.4.12 Check Software Version The operation is as follows: 1.


2.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Version Info”, and then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.


8-35 Date: 2014-09-20


4.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar.

5.

Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).

8.4.13 Communication Test The operation is as follows: 1.


2.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3.

Select the command menu “Disturb Events”, “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, users need to enter the submenu “Device Test” firstly.

4.

Select any command menu (takes “Disturb Events” as an example), press the key “ENT”, two options “All Test” and “Select Test” are provided.

5.

If “Select Test” is selected, press the key “ENT”. Press the “＋” or “－” to page up/down, and then press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar. Move the cursor to select the corresponding protection element. Press the key “ENT” to execute the communication test of this protection element, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive the corresponding fault report, and view the fault report produced by communication test in the command menu “Disturb Items”.

6.

If “All Test” is selected, press the key “ENT” to execute the communication test of all protection element one by one, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive all the fault report.

NOTICE! If selecting the “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, the substation automatic system can receive the corresponding self-check report or binary signals, and the self-check report or binary signals produced by communication test can also be viewed by the two command menus of “Superv Events” and “IO Events” in the menu “Records”.

8.4.14 Select Language The operation is as follows: 1.


2.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Language” menu, then press “ENT” to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on LCD.

8-36



Please Select Language: 1

中文

2

English

Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language

3.

Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the preferred language and press the key “ENT” to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD will return to the main menu, and the display language is changed. Otherwise, press “ESC” to cancel language switching and return to the main menu.

NOTICE! The LCD interfaces provided in this chapter are only for references and available for explaining specific definition of LCD. The actual displayed interfaces maybe different from these.


8-37 Date: 2014-09-20


8-38


9 Configurable Function

9 Configurable Function Table of Contents 9 Configurable Function ...................................................................... 9-a 9.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 9-1 9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer Software ........................................................ 9-1 9.3 Device Setup.................................................................................................... 9-1 9.3.1 Device Information ............................................................................................................... 9-1 9.3.2 Hardware Configuration ....................................................................................................... 9-2 9.3.3 MOT ..................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.3.4 Function Configuration ........................................................................................................ 9-4

9.4 Program Configuration ................................................................................... 9-5 9.4.1 LED Configuration ............................................................................................................... 9-5 9.4.2 Configuration of BI and BO .................................................................................................. 9-7

9.5 Setting Configuration ................................................................................... 9-10 9.5.1 Active Setting Group Selection .......................................................................................... 9-10 9.5.2 Browsing Settings ...............................................................................................................9-11 9.5.3 Modify Name and Value of Settings ...................................................................................9-11

List of Figures Figure 9.3-1 Setting device information .................................................................................... 9-2 Figure 9.3-2 Hardware module configuration........................................................................... 9-3 Figure 9.3-3 MOT configuration interface ................................................................................. 9-4 Figure 9.3-4 Function configuration interface.......................................................................... 9-5 Figure 9.5-1 Setup of setting group......................................................................................... 9-10 Figure 9.5-2 Modify setting name command .......................................................................... 9-11 Figure 9.5-3 Modify setting name dialog box ......................................................................... 9-12 Figure 9.5-4 Modify a setting value ......................................................................................... 9-12


9-a Date: 2014-07-02


9-b



9.1 General Description By adoption of PCS-Explorer software, it is able to make function configuration, binary input and binary output configuration, LED indicator configuration and setting configuration for PCS-915IC.

9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer Software PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customer’s demand on functions of UAPC platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects substation as the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one substation to govern many devices. The software provides on-line and off-line functions: on-line mode: Ethernet connected with the device supporting IEC60870-5-103 and capable of uploading and downloading configuration files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration. In addition, it also supports programmable logic to meet customer’s demand. Please refer to Instruction Manual of PCS-Explorer Auxiliary Software for details and other functions. Overall functions: 

Function configuration (off-line function)



Programmable logic (off-line function)



LED indicators configuration (off-line function)



Binary input signals configuration (off-line function)



Binary output signals configuration (off-line function)



Setting configuration (off-line & on-line function)



Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device (on-line function)



Display of sequence of report (SOE) (on-line function)



Analysis of waveform (off-line & on-line function)



File downloading/uploading (on-line function)

9.3 Device Setup Click “Device Config”→“Device Setup” node, and four labels are displayed in the edit window. These labels are used to set device information, configure hardware module, configure the software and hardware related function according to the selected series number of MOT and configure ancillary protection functions respectively.

9.3.1 Device Information Select “Device Information” page to view the basic information of the device. All these information


9-1 Date: 2014-07-02


are default settings in the selected driver package for creating the device. Part of the basic information can be modified including “Project Name”, “User File Version” and “User Modify Time”.

Figure 9.3-1 Setting device information

9.3.2 Hardware Configuration Select page “Hardware Configuration” and configure hardware modules according to the project requirements. There are four columns information shown in this page, they are “Slot” (slot number), “Name” (the selectable module name), “Current Type” (currently selected module type) and “Description” (module description). The modules of which the currently selected module type are grey are not configurable. 1.

Slot: To simplify hardware configuration, the slot number of PCS series is defined to start with slot 01 from left to right in rear view of device.

4U device: 01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

P1

8U device: 01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

P1

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

8U+4U device: 01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

P1

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

9-2



32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

P2

In the table, NR1301 located in slot P1 (and P2) is power supply, NR1102 located in slot 01 is MON module, and others are functional modules. 2.

Name: The selectable module name is fixed in a program, normally, the module name implies its function, such as BIO means the module can be configured as a binary input module or a binary output module.

3.

Current Type: Current module type is also marked on the aluminum base where the module is fixed on. In this column, two types of modules can be observed: mandatory and optional. As shown in the figure below, cells in “Current Type” column marked in grey are mandatory modules which are necessary for device normal operation, the module type is fixed. Other cells marked in white are optional modules which can be configured according to the application. It is convenient to change the type of optional modules by clicking the optional module, and select the module type in the pull-down menu or select “none” to leave the slot blank if not required.

4.

Description: Module description includes the functions and parameters of the selected module.

Figure 9.3-2 Hardware module configuration

9.3.3 MOT Choose “MOT” page to enter MOT configuration interface as shown below. According to the selected series number of MOT, the applied busbar arrangement, some software and hardware related function can be configured. For detailed function configuration, please refer to Section 3.3.


9-3 Date: 2014-07-02


Figure 9.3-3 MOT configuration interface

9.3.4 Function Configuration Choose “Function Configuration” page to enter function configuration interface as shown below (the content may vary subject to created projects). Click the pull-down list in “Option” column to perform function configuration. For detailed function configuration, please refer to Section 3.2.

9-4



Figure 9.3-4 Function configuration interface

9.4 Program Configuration 9.4.1 LED Configuration On front panel of PCS-915, two columns of indicators are normally provided. The first two indicators indicate device running status (Healthy) and alarm status (Alarm). Remaining indicators have their specific meanings according to device functions (please refer to corresponding project configuration manual for details). Colors of these indicators may vary with functions of device. The control of these indicators is configured by LED element configuration in PCS-Explorer. Click “Program Config”→“Slot01:CPU” node, and select “LED” page to view and configure LED element. The following is an example of LED configuration:


9-5 Date: 2014-07-02


Figure 9.4-1 Example of LED configuration

If the LED symbol and the connected input block are in blue, indicating that they cannot be modified. For some fixed configuration, the necessary functions not allowed to change will be marked in blue, even the attributes cannot be modified. The indicators not in blue can be defined according to the application. The method is very simple: Double click LED element to open its attributes setup window. users can see that it consists of 4 sub-pages. Switch to “Func Block Parameter” sub-page. Here, indicators LED3~20 can be set. Each indicator has two items to be set: Parameter “ledx_latched” (x=3~20): click corresponding entry under “Set Value” to select “yes” or “no”. If “yes” is selected, indicator attribute is “latched”, indicating that after this indicator is lit, it will remain on even the initiation signal disappears until it is reset. If “no” is selected, indicator attribute is “un-latched”, indicating that the indicator status will follow the change of its initiation signal. The other parameter is “ledx_color” (x=3~20): The color of indicator can be selected as required: green, yellow, and red. After completion of setup, click “OK” to close attributes setup window. The set parameters will be displayed on the element, as shown below.

9-6



Figure 9.4-2 LED indicators configuration interface

Next, indicators initiation signals should be placed on the page and connect them to corresponding input interfaces of LED element: select the output signal from the “Source” tab at the right side of the window to be used as input source. Press and hold left button of mouse, and directly drag it to the page. When this signal passes input signal connection point, a red dot will appear to prompt connection. After placing it at a suitable position, connection line will be automatically generated to connect this input signal.

9.4.2 Configuration of BI and BO PCS-915IC is normally configured with a number of IO modules. Quantities may vary with different project. These BI and BO modules are normally configured according to general configuration. Corresponding modules are usually selected according to the application. However, in some cases, addition of IO modules may be required according to the changing requirements. At this time, configuration of signals and parameters of additional IO modules is required. After creation of a device using the template driver package by PCS-Explorer, required configuration can be performed on editable page. 9.4.2.1 Configuration of BI Takes BI module in slot No.5 as an example. Click “Program Config” node. Unfold module node “Slot05:BIO_2”, one page node: “NR1506A_A” is shown.


9-7 Date: 2014-07-02


Figure 9.4-3 Module nodes and pages in program configuration

Click the page “NR1506A_A”; NR1506AS configuration graph is shown in an editing window.

Figure 9.4-4 Configuration graph of NR1506AS

In the graph, NR1506AS plug-in module symbol and respective output signals are shown with connection to output symbol block. Plug-in module symbol shows functions corresponding to NR1506AS input pins: numbers in the “PIN” column are input terminal numbers of NR1506AS module, and name or function of each pin is described in the “BI_Name” column. Pins can be configured via their output signals to form output symbol blocks. 9-8



[BI_COMMON] of BI module is an internal binary input, it will be energized if any other binary input of the BI module is energized. When users configure BFI binary input via PCS-Explorer auxiliary software by themselves, all the common BFI binary inputs ([@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]) of related bays must be configured to [BI_COMMON] of the BI module, so if any BFI binary input of a BI module is energized, the common BFI binary inputs of related bays are energized (refer to Section 3.12.2.2). On the element symbol, two parameters columns of symbols “

” and “

”. The former

indicates BI delay pick up time and the latter indicates BI delay drop off time. If voltage applied between a BI input and the common terminal exceeds the BI delay pick up time, corresponding output signal will be energized, and if the applied voltage is disappeared for a period exceeding the BI delay drop off time, the output signal will be reset. Connect a signal to a pin of NR1506AS module and the status of this signal is reflected by the BI output signal and the connected output symbol block in visualized page. Double click such output symbol block and modify its description in a pop-up dialog box (or maintain default description; input signal will not be affected). Besides above method for the addition of BI signal and viewing the status, outputs of all configured binary inputs (including elements) can be viewed in the “Source” tab at the right side of the window (variable library). Please note the variable library has to be refreshed if there is any description modification on output symbol block. The output symbol block of these binary inputs can be configured as input symbol block of other elements by dragging. 9.4.2.2 Configuration of BO Takes BO module in slot No.15 as an example. Click “Program Config” node. Unfold module node “Slot15:BIO_12”, one page node: “NR1521A_A” is shown.

Figure 9.4-5 Configuration graph of NR1521A

In the graph, NR1521A plug-in module symbol and respective input signals are shown with PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

9-9 Date: 2014-07-02


connection to input symbol block. Plug-in module symbol shows functions corresponding to NR1521A input pins: numbers in the “PIN” column are input terminal numbers of NR1521A module, and name or function of each pin is described in the “BO_Name” column. Pins can be configured via their input signals to form input symbol blocks. Inputs of all configurable binary outputs can be viewed in the “Source” tab at the right side of the window (variable library). As shown in the figure, each input corresponds to one way output contact of the BO module. The output contact of BO module will operate (output relay pickup or reset) in response to the status change of corresponding input signal. The output contacts of BO modules can be configured or modified according to the application or drag the required signals from the variable library.

9.5 Setting Configuration After function configuration is finished, disabled protective function is hidden in device and in setting configuration list of PCS-Explorer software.

9.5.1 Active Setting Group Selection Click “Settings” node to enter “Settings” interface. In the middle of editing window is the setting group setup interface, where two parameters can be set: “Active Group” and “Setting Groups: [1-30]” (shown in Figure 9.5-1), users can change the number in the two text boxes then click the button “Set” to modify the two parameters. The text box of “Active Group” is used for users to change the current active setting group. The text box of “Setting Groups: [1-30]” is used for users to change the number of active setting groups, the number of sub-nodes of “Setting” node will change with this parameter. Several sub-nodes: “Global” and “Group x” (x: 1~n, n is the number that inputted in the text box of “Setting Groups: [1-30]”, n should not be larger than 30). Among them, global settings (the sub-node “Global”) are common for all setting groups. In setting groups Group 1~Group n, only one group is the current active setting group used in device operation, and mainly includes protection settings, the current active setting group can be switched among Group 1~Group n when required.

Figure 9.5-1 Setup of setting group

9-10



9.5.2 Browsing Settings Click “Settings”→“Global” node, five sub-nodes are unfolded (number of sub-nodes may vary with different device models) in the edit window. These sub-nodes are used to set system settings, logic links, device settings, communication settings and label settings. Click “Settings”→“Group x” node, all the protective settings of corresponding group can be shown by clicking corresponding setting menu item.

9.5.3 Modify Name and Value of Settings Although there are many setting group nodes, settings under these nodes have the same layout in editing page. Therefore, steps of modification of settings are basically the same. It is seen from the graph that when any setting node is clicked and open, the editing page will display name, value, range, step, and unit of the settings in this sequence. Here, user can modify name and set value of the settings according to actual application requirements.

Figure 9.5-2 Modify setting name command

The name of a setting is the name user will finally see on the device. Users can suitably modify this name according to actual project requirements: right click on the name entry to be modified to pop up a right-key context menu, execute command “Modify Name”; the following window will pop up:


9-11 Date: 2014-07-02


Figure 9.5-3 Modify setting name dialog box

In the “Modify Name” dialog box, users will see two entries, “Original Name” is the default name of this setting in the symbol library, and “Name” is the name currently used, and can be modified. Modified setting value must not exceed its range (if there has an ordain). There are two types of set value modification operation: direct input of the value after double clicking corresponding entry of the setting value, or selection from a pull-down menu. User can also right click the entry of set value and select “Get Default Value” in the right-key context menu, so as to obtain default set value of this entry from the symbol library. During modification and editing operations of settings in the customizing editing window, modified item will become red, till users perform saving operation.

Figure 9.5-4 Modify a setting value

9-12


10 Communications

10 Communications Table of Contents 10 Communications ........................................................................... 10-a 10.1 General Description .................................................................................... 10-1 10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ..................................................... 10-1 10.2.1 RS-485 Interface.............................................................................................................. 10-1 10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................ 10-3 10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication .................................................................................... 10-4

10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ................................................ 10-4 10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ............................................................................... 10-5 10.3.2 Initialization ...................................................................................................................... 10-5 10.3.3 Time Synchronization ...................................................................................................... 10-5 10.3.4 Spontaneous Events ........................................................................................................ 10-5 10.3.5 General Interrogation ....................................................................................................... 10-6 10.3.6 General Functions ........................................................................................................... 10-6 10.3.7 Disturbance Records ....................................................................................................... 10-6

10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet .................................................... 10-6 10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .......................................... 10-6 10.5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 10-6 10.5.2 Communication Profiles ................................................................................................... 10-7 10.5.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment ................................................................... 10-8 10.5.4 Server Data Organization ...............................................................................................10-11 10.5.5 Server Features and Configuration ............................................................................... 10-13 10.5.6 ACSI Conformance ........................................................................................................ 10-15 10.5.7 Logical Nodes ................................................................................................................ 10-20

10.6 DNP3.0 Interface........................................................................................ 10-23 10.6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 10-23


10-a Date: 2015-03-07

10 Communications

10.6.2 Link Layer Functions...................................................................................................... 10-23 10.6.3 Transport Functions ....................................................................................................... 10-23 10.6.4 Application Layer Functions........................................................................................... 10-23

List of Figures Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ..................................................... 10-2 Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ........................................................................ 10-3 Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure .................................................................. 10-4 Figure 10.5-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance ......................... 10-9 Figure 10.5-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance ..................... 10-10 Figure 10.5-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances .................. 10-11

10-b


10 Communications

10.1 General Description This section introduces NR’s remote communications interfaces. The protective device is compatible with three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet). The protocol provided by the protective device is indicated in the submenu in the “Comm Settings” column. Using the keypad and LCD to set the parameter [Protocol_RS485A] and [Protocol_RS485B], the corresponding protocol will be selected. The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection no matter whichever protocol is selected. It has advantage that 32 protective devices can be “daisy chained” together in electrical connection using a twisted pair. It should be noted that the descriptions in this section do not aim to fully introduce the protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred for this information. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.

10.2 Rear Communication Port Information 10.2.1 RS-485 Interface This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay. Each port has a ground terminal for earth shield of communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485 serial data communication and are intended for permanently wired connection to a remote control center. 10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, but the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed. 10.2.1.2 Bus Termination The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a facility, so an external termination resistor is required when it is located at the bus terminus.


10-1 Date: 2015-03-07

Master

EIA RS-485

10 Communications

120 Ohm

120 Ohm

Slave

Slave

Slave

Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements

10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies The EIA RS-485 requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable i.e. the communications bus. Stubs and tees are strictly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop bus topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden also. Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length must not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end, normally at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially when the cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons. This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other devices connected to the bus. The signal ground shall not be connected to the cables screen or to the product’s chassis at any stage. This is for both safety and noise reasons. 10.2.1.4 Biasing It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal level has an indeterminate state due to inactively driven of tubs. This can occur when all the slaves are in receive mode and the master unit is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit mode. The reason is that the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high impedance state, until it has something to transmit. Jabber can result in the loss of first bits of the first character in the packet for receiving device(s), which will lead to the rejection of messages for slave units, causing non-responding between master unit and slave unit. This could brings poor response times (due to retries), increase in message error counters, erratic communications, and even a complete failure to communicate. Biasing requires that the signal lines shall be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V. There should be only one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection point. The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Please note that some devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias that the external components will not be required. NOTICE! It is extremely IMPORTANT that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do 10-2


10 Communications

so will result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the bus. As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR CANNOT assume responsibility for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a result of incorrect application of this voltage. ENSURE that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic inputs) as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.

10.2.2 Ethernet Interface This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached to each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the submenu “Comm Settings”. 10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture is shown bellow.

Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable

10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies Each device is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a star structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is also connected to the exchanger acting as the master station, and every device which has been connected to the exchanger will act as a slave unit.


10-3 Date: 2015-03-07

10 Communications

SCADA

Exchanger A

Exchanger B

Equipment

Equipment

Equipment

Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure

10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform communication with protective device. The standard configuration of IEC60870-5-103 protocol is using a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports an Ethernet for communication between devices. The relay operates as a slave unit in the system to respond commands received from master station. To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings of the protective device must be configured by using keypad and LCD user interface. In the submenu “Comm Settings”, set the parameters [Protocol_RS485A], [Protocol_RS485B] and [Baud_RS485]. To use the Ethernet port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the IP address and the submask of each Ethernet port shall be set in the same submenu. Please refer to the corresponding section in Chapter “Settings” for further details.

10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface and the protective device is the slave device. The protective device conforms to compatibility level 3. The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface: 

Initialization (reset)



Time synchronization



Event record extraction



General interrogation



General commands

10-4


10 Communications 

Disturbance records

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device. The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s. The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.

10.3.2 Initialization When the protective device is powered up, or the communication parameters are changed, a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The protective device will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference is that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the transmit buffer. The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5, the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command.

10.3.3 Time Synchronization The time and date of protective device can be set by time synchronization feature of the IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103 will be corrected in the protective device. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message, then the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the time-synchronization message is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronization class 1 event will be generated/produced. If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input, the protection device will not be able to set the time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. For attempt to set the time via the interface, the protective device will create an event with the date and time taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal clock.

10.3.4 Spontaneous Events Events are categorized by the following information: 

Type identification (TYP)



Function type (FUN)



Information number (INF)

Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103 protocol. Operation elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and status of binary Input and alarm element are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message). The cause of transmission (COT) of these responses is 1. The complete list of all events produced by the protective device can be printed by choosing the submenu “IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”.


10-5 Date: 2015-03-07

10 Communications

10.3.5 General Interrogation The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and the information numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103. Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.

10.3.6 General Functions The general functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the relay, and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and ASDU 10. For more details about generic functions, please see the IEC60870-5-103 standard. Generic service group numbers supported by the relay can be printed by the submenu “IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”.

10.3.7 Disturbance Records This protective device can store up to 32 disturbance records in its memory. Pickup of fault detector or operation of relay will be stored as disturbance recorders in the protective device. The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103. It can be printed by the submenu “IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”

10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet The IEC60870-5-103 interface over Ethernet is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave device. All the functions provided by this relay are based on generic functions of the IEC60870-5-103. This relay will send all the relevant information on group caption to SAS or RTU after establishing a successful communication link.

10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol 10.5.1 Overview The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic device to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration, testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes: 

IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview



IEC 61850-2: Glossary



IEC 61850-3: General requirements



IEC 61850-4: System and project management

10-6



IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models

IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations related to IEDs 

IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Principles and models 

IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Abstract communication service interface (ACSI) 

IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device – Common data classes 

IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device – Compatible logical node classes and data classes 

IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO 9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3 

IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link 

IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3 



IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing

These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.

10.5.2 Communication Profiles PCS-915 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication protocol stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires IP address to establish communications. These addresses are located in the submenu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”. 1.

MMS protocol

IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to actual MMS protocol services in IEC61850-8-1. 2.

Client/server

This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation device such as protection relays, meters, RTUs, instrument transformers, tap changers, or bay controllers. Please note that gateways can be considered as clients and servers subject to the communication PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

10-7 Date: 2015-03-07

10 Communications

object. When retrieving data from IEDs within the substation, the gateways are considered as servers whereas transmitting data to control centers, the gateways are considered as clients. 3.

Peer-to-peer

This is a non-connection-oriented high speed communication between substation device, such as protection relays. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer communication. 4.

Substation configuration language (SCL)

A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED configurations and communication systems according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has an IED Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The substation single line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the combination of the following items: individual ICD files, SSD file, communication system parameters (MMS, GOOSE control block, SV control block), as well as GOOSE/SV connection relationship amongst IEDs.

10.5.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment To enhance the stability and reliability of SAS, dual-MMS Ethernet is widely adopted. This section is applied to introduce the details of dual-MMS Ethernet technology. Generally, single-MMS Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of 110kV and lower voltage levels, while dual-MMS Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of voltage levels above 110kV. Client-server mode is adopted: clients (SCADA, control center and etc.) communicate with the IEDs via MMS communication network, and the IEDs operate as the servers. IEDs are connected to clients passively, and they can interact with the clients according to the configuration and the issued command of the clients. Three modes for dual-MMS Ethernet (abbreviated as dual-net) are provided as below. NOTICE! Hereinafter, the normal operation status of net means the physical link and TCP link are both ok. The abnormal operation status of net means physical link or TCP link is broken. 1)

Mode 1: Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the same RCB instance

10-8


10 Communications

Client

Client

Net B

Net A

Net B

Net A

Report Instance 1

Report Instance 1

RptEna = true

RptEna = true

Report Control Block


IED (Server)

IED (Server)

Normal operation status

Abnormal operation status TCP Link MMS Link

Figure 10.5-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance

Net A and Net B share the same report control block (abbreviated as RCB) enabled by the client. IED sends undifferentiated date through dual-net to the clients. If one net is physically disconnected, the flag of RCB instance (i.e.: “RptEna” in above figure) is still “true”. Only when both Net A and Net B are disconnected, the flag of the RCB instance will automatically change to “false”. In normal operation status of mode 1, IED provides the same MMS service for Net A and Net B. If one net is physically disconnected (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in above figure), the working mode will switch to single-net mode seamlessly and immediately. Network communication supervision is unnecessary here, and Buffered Report Control Block (abbreviated as BRCB) need not to be used. On the other net, date alternation works normally. Therefore, MMS service can interact normally without interruption. This mode ensures no data loss during one net is in abnormal operation status. In mode 1, one report will be transmitted twice via dual nets for the same report instance, so the client needs to distinguish whether two reports are same according to corresponding EntryIDs. 2)

Mode 2: Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance


10-9 Date: 2015-03-07

10 Communications

Client

Client

Net B

Net A

Net B

Net A

Report Instance 1

Report Instance 1

RptEna = true

RptEna = true



IED (Server)

IED (Server)

Normal operation status

Abnormal operation status TCP Link Main MMS Link Standby MMS Link

Figure 10.5-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance

In mode 2, the MMS service is provided on main MMS link, no MMS service interacts on the standby MMS link. The definitions of two links are as follows: 

Main MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service available.



Standby MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service not available.

If the main net fails to operate (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in the above figure), the IED will set “RptEna” to “false”. Meanwhile the client will detect the failure by heartbeat message or “keep-alive”, it will automatically enable the RCB instance by setting “RptEna” back to “true” through standby MMS link. By the buffer function of BRCB, the IED can provide uninterrupted MMS service on the standby net. However, the differences of BRCB standards among different manufacturers may cause data loss. Moreover, if duration of net switch is too long, the data loss is positively as the capacity of BRCB’s buffer function is limited. NOTICE! In mode 1 and mode 2, Net A IED host address and Net B IED host address must be the same. E.g.: if the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, network prefix of Net A is 198.120.0.0, network prefix of Net B is 198.121.0.0, Net A IP address of the IED is 198.120.1.2, and then Net B IP address of the IED must be configured as 198.121.1.2, i.e.: Net A IED host address =1x256+2=258, Net B IED host address =1x256+2=258, Net A IED host address equals to Net B IED host address.

10-10


10 Communications

3)

Mode 3: Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances

Client

Client

Net B

Net A

Net B

Net A

Report Instance 1

Report Instance 2

Report Instance 1

Report Instance 2

RptEna = true

RptEna = true

RptEna = false

RptEna = true



IED (Server)

IED (Server)

TCP Link MMS Link

Figure 10.5-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances

In mode 3, IED provides 2 report instances for each RCB, Net A and Net B work independently from each other, failures of one net will not affect the other net at all. In this mode, 2 report instances are required for each client. Therefore, the IED may be unable to provide enough report instances if there are too many clients. Net A and Net B send the same report separately when they operates normally, To ensure no repeated data is saved into database, massive calculation is required for the client. Moreover, accurate clock synchronization of the IED is required to distinguish whether 2 reports are the same report according to the timestamps. Clock synchronization error of the IED may lead to report loss/redundancy. As a conclusion: In mode 2, it’s difficult to realize seamless switchover between dual nets; In mode 3, the IED may be unable to provide enough report instances if too many clients are applied on site. For the consideration of client treatment and IED implementation, mode 1 (Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the same report instance) is recommended for MMS communication network deployment.

10.5.4 Server Data Organization IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

10-11 Date: 2015-03-07

10 Communications

nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting. Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one or more logical device(s), and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains common information about the IED logical device. 10.5.4.1 Digital Status Values The GGIO logical node is used to provide access to digital status points (including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags. The data content must be configured before using. GGIO provides digital status points for access by clients. It is intended for the use of GGIO by client to access to digital status values from PCS-915 series relays. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered report from GGIO to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block (BRCB) is defined in LLN0. 10.5.4.2 Analog Values Most of measured analog values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering values in MMTR, the others in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Data of each MMXU logical node is provided from a IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source. Data of MMXU1 is provided from CT/VT source 1 (usually for protection purpose), and data of MMXU2 is provided from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog data objects are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the corresponding unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical nodes provide the following data for each source: 

MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency



MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle



MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle



MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle



MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle



MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle



MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle



MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle



MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle



MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle

10-12


10 Communications

10.5.4.3 Protection Logical Nodes The following list describes the protection elements for all PCS-915 series relays. The specified relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list. 

PDIF: current differential and transfer trip



RBRF:Breaker failure



PTOC: Time overcurrent



RDRE: Disturbance recorder function

The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup) flags “PTRC.ST.Str.general”. The operate flag for PDIF1 is “PDIF1.ST.Op.general”. For PCS-915 series relay protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for the corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is reported via BRCB, and it also locates in LLN0. 10.5.4.4 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defined for the whole device; the common settings include all the setting items of communication settings, system settings and some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements (logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this item indicates the local operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED will be blocked until Loc is changed to false. In PCS-915 series relays, besides the logical nodes described above, there are some other logical nodes in the IEDs: LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical device. 

PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it is used to connect the “operate” outputs of one or more protection functions to a common “trip” to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or alternatively, any combination of “operate” outputs of protection functions may be combined to a new “operate” of PTRC. 

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers fault wave recorder and its output refers to the “IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System” (IEC 60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording and is independent of the trigger mode. 

10.5.5 Server Features and Configuration 10.5.5.1 Buffered/unbuffered Reporting IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks are located in LLN0, they can be


10-13 Date: 2015-03-07

10 Communications

configured to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes), binary status values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and MSQI). The reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via an IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured. 

TrgOps: Trigger options.

The following bits are supported by PCS-915 series relays: － Bit 1: Data-change － Bit 4: Integrity － Bit 5: General interrogation 

OptFlds: Option Fields.

The following bits are supported by PCS-915 series relays: － Bit 1: Sequence-number － Bit 2: Report-time-stamp － Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion － Bit 4: Data-set-name － Bit 5: Data-reference － Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only) － Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only) － Bit 8: Conf-revision － Bit 9: Segmentation 

IntgPd: Integrity period.



BufTm: Buffer time.

10.5.5.2 File Transfer MMS file services allows transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from a PCS-915 series relay. 10.5.5.3 Timestamps The timestamp values associated with all IEC61850 data items represent the time of the last change of either the value or quality flags of the data item. 10.5.5.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters. The name is composed of: 

A five or six-character name prefix.

10-14



A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).



A one or two-character instantiation index.

Complete names are in the form of xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable. Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project. 10.5.5.5 GOOSE Services IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support, Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to configure and control the transmission. The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE logic link settings in device. The PCS-915 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-915 series relays. IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.

10.5.6 ACSI Conformance 10.5.6.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement Services

Client

Server

PCS-915

Client-Server Roles B11

Server side (of Two-party Application-Association)

－

C1

Y

B12

Client side (of Two-party Application-Association)

C1

－

N

SCSMS Supported B21

SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used

N

N

Y

B22


N

N

N

B23


N

N

N

B24

SCSM: other

N

N

N

Generic Substation Event Model (GSE) PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

10-15 Date: 2015-03-07

10 Communications Services

Client

Server

PCS-915

B31

Publisher side

－

O

Y

B32

Subscriber side

O

－

Y

Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC) B41

Publisher side

－

O

N

B42

Subscriber side

O

－

N

Client

Server

PCS-915

Where: C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared O: Optional M: Mandatory Y:

Supported by PCS-915 relay

N: Currently not supported by PCS-915 relay 10.5.6.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement Services M1

Logical device

C2

C2

Y

M2

Logical node

C3

C3

Y

M3

Data

C4

C4

Y

M4

Data set

C5

C5

Y

M5

Substitution

O

O

Y

M6

Setting group control

O

O

Y

Buffered report control

O

O

Y

M7-1

sequence-number

Y

Y

Y

M7-2

report-time-stamp

Y

Y

Y

M7-3

reason-for-inclusion

Y

Y

Y

M7-4

data-set-name

Y

Y

Y

M7-5

data-reference

Y

Y

Y

M7-6

buffer-overflow

Y

Y

N

M7-7

entryID

Y

Y

Y

M7-8

BufTm

N

N

N

M7-9

IntgPd

Y

Y

Y

M7-10

GI

Y

Y

Y

Unbuffered report control

M

M

Y

sequence-number

Y

Y

Y

Reporting M7

M8 M8-1

10-16


10 Communications Services

Client

Server

PCS-915

M8-2

report-time-stamp

Y

Y

Y

M8-3

reason-for-inclusion

Y

Y

Y

M8-4

data-set-name

Y

Y

Y

M8-5

data-reference

Y

Y

Y

M8-6

BufTm

N

N

N

M8-7

IntgPd

N

Y

Y

Log control

O

O

N

M9-1

IntgPd

N

N

N

M10

Log

O

O

N

M12

GOOSE

O

O

Y

M13

GSSE

O

O

N

M14

Multicast SVC

O

O

N

M15

Unicast SVC

O

O

N

M16

Time

M

M

Y

M17

File transfer

O

O

Y

Logging M9

GSE

Where: C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has been declared C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared M: Mandatory Y:

Supported by PCS-900 series relays

N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays 10.5.6.3 ACSI Services Conformance Statement Service

Server/Publisher

PCS-900 Series

Server S1

ServerDirectory

M

Y

Application association S2

Associate

M

Y

S3

Abort

M

Y


10-17 Date: 2015-03-07

10 Communications Service

Server/Publisher M

Y

LogicalDeviceDirectory

M

Y

S6

LogicalNodeDirectory

M

Y

S7

GetAllDataValues

M

Y

S8

GetDataValues

M

Y

S9

SetDataValues

M

Y

S10

GetDataDirectory

M

Y

S11

GetDataDefinition

M

Y

S12

GetDataSetValues

M

Y

S13

SetDataSetValues

O

Y

S14

CreateDataSet

O

N

S15

DeleteDataSet

O

N

S16

GetDataSetDirectory

M

Y

SetDataValues

M

Y

S4

Release

PCS-900 Series

Logical device S5 Logical node

Data

Data set

Substitution S17

Setting group control S18

SelectActiveSG

M/O

Y

S19

SelectEditSG

M/O

Y

S20

SetSGValuess

M/O

Y

S21

ConfirmEditSGValues

M/O

Y

S22

GetSGValues

M/O

Y

S23

GetSGCBValues

M/O

Y

Reporting Buffered report control block S24

Report

M

Y

S24-1

data-change

M

Y

S24-2

qchg-change

M

N

S24-3

data-update

M

N

S25

GetBRCBValues

M

Y

S26

SetBRCBValues

M

Y

Unbuffered report control block

10-18


10 Communications Service

Server/Publisher

PCS-900 Series

S27

Report

M

Y

S27-1

data-change

M

Y

S27-2

qchg-change

M

N

S27-3

data-update

M

N

S28

GetURCBValues

M

Y

S29

SetURCBValues

M

Y

Logging Log control block S30

GetLCBValues

O

N

S31

SetLCBValues

O

N

S32

QueryLogByTime

O

N

S33

QueryLogAfter

O

N

S34

GetLogStatusValues

O

N

Log

Generic substation event model (GSE) GOOSE control block S35

SendGOOSEMessage

M

Y

S36

GetGoReference

O

Y

S37

GetGOOSEElementNumber

O

N

S38

GetGoCBValues

M

Y

S39

SetGoCBValuess

M

N

S51

Select

O

N

S52

SelectWithValue

M

Y

S53

Cancel

M

Y

S54

Operate

M

Y

S55

Command-Termination

O

Y

S56

TimeActivated-Operate

O

N

Control

File transfer S57

GetFile

M/O

Y

S58

SetFile

O

N

S59

DeleteFile

O

N

S60

GetFileAttributeValues

M/O

Y

M

Y

Time SNTP


10-19 Date: 2015-03-07

10 Communications

10.5.7 Logical Nodes 10.5.7.1 Logical Nodes Table PCS-915 relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code. Nodes

PCS-915

L: System Logical Nodes LPHD: Physical device information

YES

LLN0: Logical node zero

YES

P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions PDIF: Differential

YES

PDIR: Direction comparison

－

PDIS: Distance

－

PDOP: Directional overpower

－

PDUP: Directional underpower

－

PFRC: Rate of change of frequency

－

PHAR: Harmonic restraint

－

PHIZ: Ground detector

－

PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent

－

PMRI: Motor restart inhibition

－

PMSS: Motor starting time supervision

－

POPF: Over power factor

－

PPAM: Phase angle measuring

－

PSCH: Protection scheme

－

PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault

－

PTEF: Transient earth fault

－

PTOC: Time overcurrent

YES

PTOF: Overfrequency

－

PTOV: Overvoltage

－

PTRC: Protection trip conditioning

YES

PTTR: Thermal overload

－

PTUC: Undercurrent

－

PTUV: Undervoltage

－

PUPF: Underpower factor

－

PTUF: Underfrequency

－

PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent

－

10-20


10 Communications Nodes

PCS-915

PVPH: Volts per Hz

－

PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed

－

R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions RDRE: Disturbance recorder function

YES

RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue

－

RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary

－

RDRS: Disturbance record handling

－

RBRF: Breaker failure

YES

RDIR: Directional element

－

RFLO: Fault locator

－

RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking

－

RREC: Autoreclosing

－

RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing

－

C: Logical Nodes For Control CALH: Alarm handling

－

CCGR: Cooling group control

－

CILO: Interlocking

－

CPOW: Point-on-wave switching

－

CSWI: Switch controller

－

G: Logical Nodes For Generic References －

GAPC: Generic automatic process control GGIO: Generic process I/O

YES －

GSAL: Generic security application I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving IARC: Archiving

－

IHMI: Human machine interface

－

ITCI: Telecontrol interface

－

ITMI: Telemonitoring interface

－

A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control ANCR: Neutral current regulator

－

ARCO: Reactive power control

－

ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller

－

AVCO: Voltage control

－

M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement MDIF: Differential measurements

YES


10-21 Date: 2015-03-07


PCS-915

MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics

－

MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic

－

MMTR: Metering

－

MMXN: Non phase related measurement

－

MMXU: Measurement

YES

MSQI: Sequence and imbalance

－

MSTA: Metering statistics

－

S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs

－

SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas)

－

SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid)

－

SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges

－

X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear TCTR: Current transformer

YES

TVTR: Voltage transformer

YES

Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil)

－

YLTC: Tap changer

－

YPSH: Power shunt

－

YPTR: Power transformer

－

Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment ZAXN: Auxiliary network

－

ZBAT: Battery

－

ZBSH: Bushing

－

ZCAB: Power cable

－

ZCAP: Capacitor bank

－

ZCON: Converter

－

ZGEN: Generator

－

ZGIL: Gas insulated line

－

ZLIN: Power overhead line

－

ZMOT: Motor

－

ZREA: Reactor

－

ZRRC: Rotating reactive component

－

ZSAR: Surge arrestor

－

ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter

－

10-22



PCS-915 －

ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component

10.6 DNP3.0 Interface 10.6.1 Overview The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0 implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0. The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 3 of the protocol, plus some of the features from level 4. The DNP3.0 communication uses the Ethernet ports (electrical or optical) at the rear side of this relay.

10.6.2 Link Layer Functions Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.

10.6.3 Transport Functions Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.

10.6.4 Application Layer Functions 10.6.4.1 Function Code Function Code

Function

0 (0x00)

Confirm

1 (0x01)

Read

2 (0x02)

Write

3 (0x03)

Select

4 (0x04)

Operate

5 (0x05)

Direct Operate

6 (0x06)

Direct Operate No Acknowledgment

13 (0x0D)

Cold Restart

14 (0x0E)

Warm Restart

20 (0x14)

Enable Unsolicited Responses

21 (0x15)

Disable Unsolicited Responses

22 (0x16)

Assign Class

23 (0x17)

Delay Measurement

10.6.4.2 Supported Object List The supported object groups and object variations are show in the following table. Request: Master may issue/Outstation shall parse


10-23 Date: 2015-03-07

10 Communications

Function code: decimalism Qualifier code: hexadecimal OBJECT GROUP & VARIATION Group/Variation

REQUEST

Description

No.

Function code

Qualifier code

1 (read)

00, 01 (start ~ stop)

22 (assign class)

06 (no range, or all)

1

0

Binary Input: Any Variation

1

1

Binary Input: Packed format

1 (read)

1

2

Binary Input: With flags

1 (read)

2

0

Binary Input Event: Any Variation

1 (read)

2

1

Binary Input Event: Without time

1 (read)

2

2

Binary Input Event: With absolute time

1 (read)

2

3

Binary Input Event: With relative time

1 (read)

10

0

Binary output: Any Variation

1 (read)

10

0


1 (read)

10

1

Binary output: Packed format

2 (write)

00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)

3 (select) 12

1

Binary Command: Control relay output block

4 (operate)

(CROB)

5 (direct op) 6 (dir. op, no ack)

17, 28 (index)

1 (read)


22 (assign class)


30

0

Analog Input: Any Variation

30

1

Analog Input: 32 ~ bit with flag

1 (read)

30

2


1 (read)

30

3

Analog Input: 32 ~ bit without flag

1 (read)

30

4


1 (read)

30

5

Analog Input: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt with flag

1 (read)

32

0

Analog Input Event: Any Variation

1 (read)

10-24

17, 28 (index)

00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 06 (no range, or all) 07,08 (limited qty)


10 Communications OBJECT GROUP & VARIATION Group/Variation

REQUEST

Description

No.

Function code

32

1

Analog Input Event: 32 ~ bit without time

1 (read)

32

2


1 (read)

32

5

34

0

Analog Input Event: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt without time Analog Input Deadband: Any Variation

1 (read)

1 (read)

1 (read) 34

1

Analog Input Deadband: 16 ~ bit 2 (write)

1 (read) 34

2

Analog Input Deadband: 32 ~ bit 2 (write)

1 (read) 34

3

Analog Input Deadband: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt 2 (write)

40

0

Analog Output Status: Any Variation

1 (read)

40

1

Analog Output Status: 32 ~ bit with flag

1 (read)

40

2


1 (read)

40

3

Analog Output Status: single ~ prec flt ~ pt with flag

1 (read)

Qualifier code 06 (no range, or all) 07,08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07,08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07,08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 17,28 (index) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 17,28 (index) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 17,28 (index) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start ~ stop) 06 (no range, or all)

3 (select) 41

1

4 (operate)

Analog Output: 32 ~ bit

17,28 (index)

5 (direct op) 6 (dir. Op, no ack)

17,28 (index)

3 (select) 41

2

4 (operate)

Analog Output: 16 ~ bit

17,28 (index)

5 (direct op) 6 (dir. Op, no ack)

17,28 (index)

3 (select) 41

3

Analog Output: Single ~ prec ft ~ pt

4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6 (dir. Op, no ack)


17,28 (index)

17,28 (index)

10-25 Date: 2015-03-07


Description

No. 50

1

50

3

51

1

51

2

60

1

REQUEST Function code

Time and Data: Absolute time Time and Data: Absolute time at last recorded time

1 (read)

07 (limited qty = 1)

2 (write)


2 (write)


Time and Data CTO: Absolute time, synchronized Time and Data CTO: Absolute time, unsynchronized 1 (read)

Class Objects: Class 0 data

22 (assign class)

2


06 (no range, or all) 06 (no range, or all)

1 (read) 60

Qualifier code

07,08 (limited qty)

20 (enable unsol.) 21 (disable unsol.)


22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)

1 (read) 60

3


07,08 (limited qty)



22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)

1 (read) 60

4

Class Objects : Class 3 data

07,08 (limited qty)



22 (assign class)

Response: Master shall parse\Outstation may issue Function code: decimalism Qualifier code: hexadecimal OBJECT GROUP & VARIATION Group/Variation No.

RESPONSE

Description

Function code

Qualifier code

1

0

Binary Input: Any Variation

1

1

Binary Input: Packed format

129 (response)


1

2

Binary Input: With flags

129 (response)


2

0

Binary Input Event: Any Variation

2

1

Binary Input Event: Without time

10-26

129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp)

17, 28 (index)



Description

No.

RESPONSE Function code

2

2

Binary Input Event: With absolute time

2

3

Binary Input Event: With relative time

10

0


10

0


10

1

Binary output: Packed format

12

1

30

0

Analog Input: Any Variation

30

1

30

129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp)

Qualifier code

17, 28 (index)

17, 28 (index)

129 (response)

echo of request


129 (response)


2


129 (response)


30

3


129 (response)


30

4


129 (response)


30

5

Analog Input: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt with flag

129 (response)


32

0

Analog Input Event: Any Variation

32

1


32

2


32

5

34

0

Analog Input Deadband: Any Variation

34

1

Analog Input Deadband: 16 ~ bit

34

2

Analog Input Deadband: 32 ~ bit

34

3

Analog Input Deadband: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt

40

0

Analog Output Status: Any Variation

40

1

40

2

40

3

41

1

41

2

41

3

Binary Command: Control relay output block (CROB)

129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp)

Analog Input Event: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt without

129 (response)

time

130 (unsol. resp)

17,28 (index)

17,28 (index)

17,28 (index)

129 (response)


129 (response)


129 (response)



129 (response)



129 (response)


129 (response)


129 (response)

echo of request

129 (response)

echo of request

129 (response)

echo of request

Analog Output Status: single ~ prec flt ~ pt with flag Analog Output: 32 ~ bit Analog Output: 16 ~ bit Analog Output: Single ~ prec ft ~ pt


10-27 Date: 2015-03-07


RESPONSE

Description

No. 50

1

50

3

51

1

51

2

60

1


60

2


60

3


60

4

Class Objects : Class 3 data

Function code 129 (response)

Time and Data: Absolute time

Qualifier code 07 (limited qty = 1)

Time and Data: Absolute time at last recorded time Time and Data CTO: Absolute time,

129 (response)

synchronized

130 (unsol. resp)

Time and Data CTO: Absolute time,

129 (response)

unsynchronized

130 (unsol. resp)



10.6.4.3 Communication Table Configuration This relay now supports 4 Ethernet clients and 2 serial port clients. Each client can be set the DNP related communication parameters respectively and be selected the user-defined communication table. This relay supports a default communication table and 4 user-defined communication tables, and the default communication table is fixed by the manufacturer and not permitted to configure by the user. The user can configure the user-defined communication table through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software. The object groups “Binary Input”, “Binary Output”, “Analog Input” and “Analog Output” can be configured according to the practical engineering demand. 10.6.4.4 Analog Input and Output Configuration To the analog inputs, the attributes “deadband” and “factor” of each analog input can be configured independently. To the analog outputs, only the attribute “factor” of each analog output needs to be configured. If the integer mode is adopted for the data formats of analog values (to “Analog Input”, “Object Variation” is 1, 2 and 3; to “Analog Output”, “Object Variation” is 1 and 2.), the analog values will be multiplied by the “factor” respectively to ensure their accuracy. And if the float mode is adopted for the data formats of analog values, the actual float analog values will be sent directly. The judgment method of the analog input change is as below: Calculate the difference between the current new value and the stored history value and make the difference value multiply by the “factor”, then compare the result with the “deadband” value. If the result is greater than the “deadband” value, then an event message of corresponding analog input change will be created. In normal communication process, the master can online read or modify a “deadband” value by reading or modifying the variation in “Group34”.

10-28


10 Communications

10.6.4.5 Binary Output Configuration The remote control signals, logic links and external extended output commands can be configured into the “Binary Output” group. The supported control functions are listed as below. Information Point

Pulse On/Null

Pulse On/Close

Pulse On/Trip

Latch On/Null

Latch Off/Null

Remote Control

Not supported

Close

Trip

Close

Trip

Logic Link

Not supported

Set

Clear

Set

Clear

Extended Output

See following description

To an extended output command, if a selected command is controlled remotely, this command point will output a high ~ level pulse. The pulse width can be decided by the “On ~ time” in the related “Binary Command” which is from the DNP3.0 master. If the “On ~ time” is set as “0”, the default pulse width is 500ms. 10.6.4.6 Unsolicited Messages This relay does not transmit the unsolicited messages if the related logic setting is set as “0”. If the unsolicited messages want to be transmitted, the related logic setting should be set as “1” or the DNP3.0 master will transmit “Enable Unsolicited” command to this relay through “Function Code 20” (Enable Unsolicited Messages). If the “Binary Input” state changes or the difference value of the “Analog Input” is greater than the “deadband” value, this device will transmit unsolicited messages. If the DNP3.0 master needs not to receive the unsolicited messages, it should forbid this relay to transmit the unsolicited messages by setting the related logic setting as “0” or through the “Function Code 21” (Disable Unsolicited Messages). 10.6.4.7 Class Configuration If the DNP3.0 master calls the Class0 data, this relay will transmit all actual values of the “Analog Input”, “Binary Input” and “Analog Output”. The classes of the “Analog Input” and “Binary Input” can be defined by modifying relevant settings. In communication process, the DNP3.0 master can online modify the class of an “Analog Input” or a “Binary Input” through “Function Code 22” (Assign Class).


10-29 Date: 2015-03-07

10 Communications

10-30


11 Installation

11 Installation Table of Contents 11 Installation ...................................................................................... 11-a 11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 11-1 11.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................ 11-1 11.3 Check the Shipment ..................................................................................... 11-2 11.4 Material and Tools Required ........................................................................ 11-2 11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions .................................................. 11-2 11.6 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 11-3 11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring ................................................................ 11-5 11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines .......................................................................................................11-5 11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding ............................................................................................................11-5 11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ...................................................................................11-6 11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation ..............................................................................11-6 11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring.........................................................................................................11-7 11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables ...............................................................................................11-7

List of Figures Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of 4U equipment ........................................................................... 11-3 Figure 11.6-2 Dimensions of 8U equipment ........................................................................... 11-4 Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot .................. 11-4 Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system ................................................................................ 11-6 Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this device ......................................................................... 11-6 Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination ........................................................................... 11-7 Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables ................................... 11-8


11-a Date: 2013-12-13

11 Installation

11-b


11 Installation

11.1 Overview The device must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care. Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the front of the device are easily accessible. Air must circulate freely around the device. Observe all the requirements regarding place of installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual. Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the device and terminated correctly and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in this section.

11.2 Safety Information Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when handling the device. In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC. WARNING! ONLY insert or withdraw a module while the device power supply is switched off. To this end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the PWR module. NOTICE! Industry packs and ribbon cables may ONLY be replaced on a workbench for electronic equipment. Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in the unit's housing. NOTICE! Jumper links may ONLY be changed on a workbench for electronic equipment. Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in the unit's housing. NOTICE! A module can ONLY be inserted in the slot designated in the chapter 6. Components can be damaged or destroyed by inserting module in a wrong slot. The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows: 

Should boards have to be removed from this device installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle) beforehand.


11-1 Date: 2013-12-13

11 Installation



Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.



Only works on the board which has been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed for electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband, however, while inserting or withdrawing units.



Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in electrostatic screened packing materials.

11.3 Check the Shipment Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be found. Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage, lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or agent. If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Chapter “Technical Data”.

11.4 Material and Tools Required The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly instructions. A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs provided (if this device is mounted in cubicles).

11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions NOTICE! Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of this device. The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the human machine interface of the equipment. There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of electronic boards. Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient conditions, such as: 1.

The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).

2.

Surge voltages of high amplitude and short rise time, extreme changes of temperature, high levels of humidity, severe vibration and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as far as possible.

11-2


11 Installation

3.

Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.

The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically (visibility of markings).

11.6 Mechanical Installation NOTICE! It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle for heat emission of this device. The relay is made of one 8U height or one 8U height add one 4U height 19" chassis with 8 connectors on its rear panel. Following figure shows the dimensions of 4U relay for reference in mounting. (290)

Front

177

101.6

482.6 465

Side

465±0.2 +0.4

451 -0

+0.4

Cut-Out

179 -0

101.6±0.1

4-Ø6.8

Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of 4U equipment

Following figure shows the dimensions of 8U relay for reference in mounting.


11-3 Date: 2013-12-13

11 Installation (290)

Side

354.8

Front

101.6

76.2

101.6

482.6 465

465±0.2 +0.4 451-0

+0.4

356.8 -0

Cut-Out

101.6±0.1

76.2±0.1 101.6±0.1

8-Ø6.8

Figure 11.6-2 Dimensions of 8U equipment

Following figure shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding slot.

Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot

11-4


11 Installation

In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.

11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring 11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines NOTICE! All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality. Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables. There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them. All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus. On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of other apparatus. In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.

11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible. Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding. NOTICE! If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts of it forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission of interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced interference. Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 11.7-1). The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible. NOTICE! For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials according to the electrochemical code. The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a grounding strip (braided copper). PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

11-5 Date: 2013-12-13

11 Installation Door or hinged equipment frame

Cubicle ground rail close to floor

Braided copper strip Station ground Conducting connection

Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system

11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed. There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this device, and the sign is “GND”. All the ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this device. Therefore, the ground terminal on the rear panel (see Figure 11.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.

Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this device

11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence. The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large. Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting them firmly to the items to be connected.

11-6


11 Installation

The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and non-corroding. The following figure shows the ground strip and termination. Press/pinch fit cable terminal

Braided copper strip

Terminal bolt Contact surface

Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination

11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring There are several types of cables that are used in the connection of this device: braided copper cable, serial communication cable etc. Recommendation of each cable: 

Grounding: braided copper cable, 2.5mm 2 ~ 6.0mm 2



Power supply, binary inputs & outputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm 2 ~ 2.5mm 2



AC voltage inputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm 2 ~ 2.5mm 2



AC current inputs: brained copper cable, 1.5mm 2 ~ 4.0mm 2



Serial communication: 4-core shielded braided cable



Ethernet communication: 4-pair shielded twisted category 5E cable

11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables DANGER! NEVER allow a open current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this device while the primary system is live. Open CT circuit will produce a dangerously high voltage that cause death. A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter “Hardware” for further details about the pin defines of these connectors. The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.


11-7 Date: 2013-12-13

11 Installation

Tighten

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

01

Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables

11-8


12 Commissioning

12 Commissioning Table of Contents 12 Commissioning ............................................................................. 12-a 12.1 General ......................................................................................................... 12-1 12.2 Safety Instructions ...................................................................................... 12-1 12.3 Commission Tools ...................................................................................... 12-2 12.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................ 12-2 12.5 Product Checks ........................................................................................... 12-3 12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized........................................................................................... 12-3 12.5.2 With the Relay Energized ................................................................................................ 12-5 12.5.3 Protection Function Checks............................................................................................. 12-7 12.5.4 Print Fault Report........................................................................................................... 12-34 12.5.5 On-load Checks ............................................................................................................. 12-34 12.5.6 Final Checks .................................................................................................................. 12-34

List of Figures Figure 12.5-1 Testing used configuration ............................................................................... 12-8 Figure 12.5-2 External fault test ............................................................................................. 12-12 Figure 12.5-3 Internal fault test (BB1) ................................................................................... 12-13 Figure 12.5-4 Steady-state percentage restraint characteristic test .................................. 12-14 Figure 12.5-5 Voltage controlled element test ...................................................................... 12-15 Figure 12.5-6 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is closed).................................. 12-17 Figure 12.5-7 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is open) .................................... 12-18 Figure 12.5-8 BC SOTF protection test ................................................................................. 12-21 Figure 12.5-9 BC OC protection test ..................................................................................... 12-22 Figure 12.5-10 BC pole disagreement protection test ......................................................... 12-24 Figure 12.5-11 BC BFP test ..................................................................................................... 12-26 Figure 12.5-12 BFP test ........................................................................................................... 12-30 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

12-a Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

12-b


12 Commissioning

12.1 General This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays. To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay. Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for completion as required. Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.

12.2 Safety Instructions DANGER! Current transformer secondary circuits MUST be short-circuited BEFORE the current leads to the device are disconnected. WARNING! ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. This personnel MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from improper behavior. Particular attention must be drawn to the following: 

The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor before any other electrical connection is made.



Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.



Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply voltage (storage capacitors!)



The limit values stated in the Chapter “Technical Data” must not be exceeded at all, not even during testing and commissioning.



When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and


12-1 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.

12.3 Commission Tools Minimum equipment required: 

Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.



Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0~440V and 0~250V respectively.



Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).



Phase angle meter.



Phase rotation meter.

NOTICE! Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit. Optional equipment: 

An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for insulation resistance test when required).



A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).



EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).



PCS-915 serials dedicated protection tester HELP-9000.

12.4 Setting Familiarization When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu structure of this relay is contained in Chapter “Operation Theory” and Chapter “Settings”. With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be entered before changes can be made. Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as PCS-9700 SAS software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become 12-2


12 Commissioning

familiar with its operation.

12.5 Product Checks These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances. If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.

12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function tests are carried out according to user’s correlative regulations. The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first put into service. 

Hardware tests These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.



User interfaces test



Binary input circuits and output circuits test



AC input circuits test



Function tests These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.



Measuring elements test



Timers test



Metering and recording test



Conjunctive tests The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external equipment.



On load test.



Phase sequence check and polarity check.


12-3 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

12.5.1.1 Visual Inspection After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed is necessary. 

Protection panel Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation. The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation.



Panel wiring Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section meeting the requirement. Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.



Label Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.



Equipment plug-in modules Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.



Earthing cable Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel steel sheet.



Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons work normally and smoothly.

12.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required) Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they have not been performed during installation. Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include: 

Voltage transformer circuits



Current transformer circuits



DC power supply

12-4


12 Commissioning



Optic-isolated control inputs



Output contacts



Communication ports

The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V. Test method: To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the Insulation resistance test for each circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester. On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the protection. 12.5.1.3 External Wiring Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram. Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected. Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the customer’s normal practice. 12.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relay’s nominal power supply rating. The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Chapter “Technical Data”, before energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range. Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Chapter “Technical Data”. See this section for further details about the parameters of the power supply. WARNING! Energize this device ONLY if the power supply is within the specified operating range in the Chapter “Technical Data”.

12.5.2 With the Relay Energized The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay. The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker. 12.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered. PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

12-5 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

12.5.2.2 Date and Time If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time should be set manually. Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “Clock”. In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct and not need to set again. To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being re-energized, the time and date should be correct. 12.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) On power up, the green LED “HEALTHY” should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that the relay is healthy. The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip when the relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate when the auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing required for that LED because it is known to be operational. 12.5.2.4 Testing the HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the “HEALTHY” LED is lighting in green. We need to emphasize that the “HEALTHY” LED is always lighting in operation course except that the equipment find serious errors in it. Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter “Supervision”, the “MISC ALM” LED will light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the “MISC ALM” LED extinguishes. 12.5.2.5 Testing the TRIP LED The “xx TRIP” LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay. However the “xx TRIP” LED will operate during the setting checks. Therefore no further testing of the “TRIP” LED is required at this stage. 12.5.2.6 Testing the AC Current Inputs This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances. Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu. The measurement accuracy of the protection is 2.5% or 0.02In. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. NOTICE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental

12-6


12 Commissioning

operation of the associated circuit breaker. 12.5.2.7 Testing the AC Voltage Inputs This test verified that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances. Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu. The measurement accuracy of the relay is 2.5% or 0.1V. However an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. NOTICE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker. 12.5.2.8 Testing the Binary Inputs This test checks that all the binary inputs on the equipment are functioning correctly. The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for terminal numbers. Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range. The status of each binary input can be viewed using relay menu. Sign “1” denotes an energized input and sign “0” denotes a de-energized input. Test method: To unplug all the terminals sockets of this protective device, and do the insulation resistance test for each circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester. On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the protection.

12.5.3 Protection Function Checks 12.5.3.1 Hardware Configuration The following is an configuration just for testing requirement, the protection function test in this section is conducted based on this configuration. For a specific project, the actual configuration is provided by a project configuration manual or configured by users, the concrete pin definition maybe different. Assumption: All the binary input modules are NR1506AS module. For different type of binary input module, the pin definitions are different.


12-7 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

Ia

1603

Ib

1605

Ic

1602

Ian

1604

Ibn

1606

Icn

Bus Coupler

AC Current of BC1

1601

BC1.62PD.BI_PD

0502

BC1.BI_52b

0409

BC1.BI_52a

Pole disagreement binary input of circuit breaker

0410

BC1.BI_BFI

0602

BC1.BI_ChkBFI

0603

Fdr01.BI_BFI

0604

Fdr01.BI_52b

0411

Normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker Breaker failure initiating binary input Normally open auxiliary contact of circuit breaker

Ia

1609

Ib

1611 AC Current of feeder 01

1608

Ic

Feeder 01

1607

Fdr01.BI_52a

0412

50BF.BI_RlsVCE

0605

Fdr01.BI_Cls

0516

Manually closing binary input

Fdr01.62PD.BI_PD

0503

Pole disagreement binary input of circuit breaker

Binary input of releasing VCE of BFP

Ian

1610

Ibn

1612

Icn

Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1

0702

Fdr01.BI_89a_BB2

0703

Normally open auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector Ia

1615

Ib

1617

Ic

1614

Ian

1616

Ibn

1618

Icn

2807

Ua

AC Voltage of BB1

Ub

2811

Uc

2808

Uan

2810

Ubn

2812

Ucn

2813

Ua

2815

Ub

2817

Uc

Busbar No.1

2809

Normally open auxiliary contact of BB2 disconnector Feeder 02

AC Current of feeder 02

1613

Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1

0704

Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2

0705

0402

87B.BI_En

0403

BBP enabling binary input

BI_En_IntLink1

0404

Inter-connected operation mode binary input

50SOTF.BI_En

0405

BC/BS SOTF protection enabling binary input

50/51.BI_En

0406

62PD.BI_En

0407

Fdr.50DZ.BI_En

0408

Overcurrent protection enabling binary input Pole disagreement overcurrent protection enabling binary input Feeder dead zone fault protection enabling binary input

BO_Trp1_BC1

2814

Uan

2816

Ubn

2818

Ucn

Busbar No.2

AC Voltage of BB2

BFP enabling binary input

50BF.BI_En

1101

Tripping contact of BC1 (first)

1102 1105 Tripping contact of feeder 01 (first)

BO_Trp1_Fdr01 1106 BO_Trp1_Fdr02

1109 Tripping contact of feeder 02 (first) 1110

Figure 12.5-1 Testing used configuration

In order to convenient to test, the power supply of opto-coupler should be connected as follows.

12-8


12 Commissioning

+

-

Opto+

0501

Opto+

0601

Opto+

0701

Opto+

0422

Opto-

0522

Opto-

0622

Opto-

0722

Opto-

PCS-915

DC

0401

12.5.3.2 Function Configurations and Related Settings MOT Configuration Application

F

A: Single BB, 1½ Breakers B: Single BB with one BS (single CT) C: Single BB with one BS (dual CTs) D: Single BB with two BS (single CT) E: Single BB with two BS (dual CTs)

BB: busbar;

F: Double BB with one BC (single CT)

BC: bus coupler;

G: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs)

BS: bus section.

H: Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT) I: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT) J: Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT) K: Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs) The option is reserved for other busbar L: Other

arrangement, further modifications for the program are required

Software Version

B

A: Standard 1

Please refer to Table 3.3-2 for concrete

B: Standard 2

contents

Language

C

C: English + Chinese F: English + French R: English + Russian S: English + Spanish Protocol

B

A: IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS & GOOSE) B: IEC 60870-5-103 (Ethernet, Serial port) C: DNP 3.0 (Ethernet) Number of Terminals

A

A: 1~16 (use 8U device) B: 17~25 (use 8U+4U device)

A 4U extended chassis is added

Dual-position Binary Inputs (BI)

C


12-9 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning X: Not required A: Dual-position BI for disconnector B: Dual-position BI for circuit breaker C: Dual-position BI for disconnector and circuit breaker Voltage Concerned Functions

A

A: With voltage concerned functions B: Without voltage concerned functions Communication Ports&Time Synchronization Mode A: 3 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x RS-485 + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer)

C The MON plug in module is NR1101F module

B: 4 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer)

The MON plug in module is NR1102M module

C: 2 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x 100Base-FX (ST-Connector) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer)

The MON plug in module is NR1102N module

AC Input A: CT 1A B: CT 5A Power Supply for Device A: 110~250Vdc Basic information configuration All protective function

Disable

Phase-segregated breaker position

Disable

Phase-segregated binary input for initiating BFP

Enable

Enforced disconnector position

Disable

Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each bay

Disable

Enable

Protective function configuration Breaker failure protection re-tripping function

Enable

Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection IDMT overcurrent characteristic

Enable Disable

Label settings Name_Bus1

BB1

Name_Bus2

BB2

Name_Bay1

BC1

Name_Bay2

Fdr01

Name_Bay3

Fdr02 System settings

U2n_PP

110V

Bay1.I1n

1200A

Bay2.I1n

1200A

12-10


12 Commissioning Bay3.I1n

1200A

I2n_Ref

1A

12.5.3.3 Busbar Differential Protection All relevant settings can be configured temporarily as following for easier test. (Just for reference) BBP Settings 87B.I_Pkp

1.8A

87B.VCE.U_Set

30V

87B.VCE.3U0_Set

8V

87B.VCE.U2_Set

3V

87B.En

1

87B.VCE.En

1

Function Links 87B.Link

1

Link_IntLink1

0

Change the following settings to avoid effects on steady state differential protection element. [I_AlmH_CTS]=5A [I_AlmL_CTS]=5A All relevant binary inputs can be connected as follows.

[87B.BI_En]

0404

[BI_En_IntLink1]

0401

Opto+

0702

[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]

0704

[Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1]

0705

[Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]

0701

Opto+

PCS-915

Test source

0402

Energize the binary input [87B.BI_En] Please pay attention that the polarity mark of CT of bus coupler is the same to that of feeder connected to bus 1, but opposite to that connected to bus 2. 

Simulate an external fault

1.

Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and set feeder 02 connecting to BB2 through energizing binary input [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2].

2.

Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT with the reverse polarity in series and then connect CT of


12-11 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

feeder 02 with reverse polarity in series (Refer to Figure 12.5-2). Inject a current (For example ITEST1  100 ) to make steady-state percentage restraint differential element operate.

3.

VCE for BBP will operate. Steady-state percentage restraint differential element does not operate.

ITEST1 A

1601

Test source

1603 Bus coupler

1605 1602 1604 1606

1607 1609

1612

CURRENT CIRCUIT

1610

PCS-915

1608

Feeder 01

1611

1613 1615

1614

Feeder 02

1617

1616 1618

Figure 12.5-2 External fault test

Because check zone differential current is equal to zero, the protection judges that as an external fault. 

Simulate an internal fault (BB1)

1.

Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 though energizing binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and set feeder 02 connecting to BB2 though energizing binary input [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]

2.

Connect CT of feeder 01, BC CT, and CT of feeder 02 with the same polarity in series (Refer to Figure 12.5-3).

3.

0 Inject a current I TEST1  1.00 A to make steady-state percentage restraint differential

element operate. 12-12


12 Commissioning

4.

VCE for BBP will operate. Steady-state percentage restraint differential element operates with “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED turned on simultaneously.

A

ITEST1 1601

Test source

1603 Bus coupler

1605 1602 1604 1606

1607

PCS-915

1608

Feeder 01

1611

1610 1612

CURRENT CIRCUIT

1609

1613 1615

1614

Feeder 02

1617

1616 1618

Figure 12.5-3 Internal fault test (BB1)



Inter-connected operation mode

1.

Energize the binary input [BI_En_IntLink1]

2.

Set the virtual binary input [Link_IntLink1]=1

3.

Repeat the internal fault test mentioned above. Steady-state percentage restraint differential element will operate to trip feeder 01 and feeder 02, “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED will turn on simultaneously. After the test is finished, set the virtual binary input [Link_IntLink1]=0 and de-energized the binary input [BI_En_IntLink1].



Check the setting [87B.I_Pkp]=1.8A

1.

Set both feeder 01 and feeder 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1].

2.

Connect CT of feeder 01 and CT of feeder 02 with the same polarity in series (Refer to Figure 12.5-4)


12-13 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

3.

Inject a current ( ITEST1  [87B.I_Pkp]  0.95/2  0.85500 A), the steady state percentage restraint differential element will not operate.

4.

Inject a current (For example ITEST1  [87B.I_Pkp] 1.05/2  0.94500 A), the steady-state percentage restraint differential element will operate to trip BB1

5.

Inject a current ( ITEST1  [87B.I_Pkp]  2/2  1.800 A), the steady-state percentage restraint differential element will operate to trip BB1. By the timer, users can get the time of BBP operating to trip BB1.

A

ITEST1

Test Source

1607 1609 1611

Feeder 01

1608 1610

1614

Feeder 02

1617

PCS-915

1613 1615

CURRENT CIRCUIT

1612

1616 1618 Start 1105 Stop

1106

BO_Trp1_Fdr01

PCS-915

Timer

Figure 12.5-4 Steady-state percentage restraint characteristic test



Voltage control element

12-14


12 Commissioning

ITEST1

1607

A

1611

Feeder 01

1608 1610

CURRENT CIRCUIT

1609

1612

Test Source

V

UTEST3

V

2807 2809 2811 2808 2810

VOLTAGE CIRCUIT

UTEST2

Busbar No.1

V

PCS-915

UTEST1

2812

Figure 12.5-5 Voltage controlled element test



Check Phase Voltage

1.

Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 by energizing the binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1].

2.

Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence voltage (U1=U2=U3=31.5V) to VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not operate.

3.

Keep injected current (2A) and change injected value of three-phase positive-sequence voltage (U1=U2=U3=28.5V). Steady-state percentage differential element will operate.



Check Residual Voltage

Change the setting [87B.VCE.U2_Set] as 10V 1.


2.

Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence voltage (U1=63.5V, U2=63.5V, U3=55.9V) to VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not operate.

3.

Keep injected current (2A) and change injected value of three-phase positive-sequence voltage (U1=63.5V, U2=63.5V, U3=55.1V). Steady-state percentage differential element will operate.

4.

Change the setting [87B.VCE.U2_Set] as 3V.



Check Negative-sequence Voltage


12-15 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

Change the setting [87B.VCE.3U0_Set] as 20V 1.


2.

Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence rated voltage to VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not operate.

3.

Keep injected current (2A) and change injected value of three-phase positive-sequence voltage (U1=63.5V, U2=63.5V, U3=54.95V). Steady-state percentage differential element will not operate.

4.

Keep injected current (2A) and change injected value of three-phase positive-sequence voltage (U1=63.5V, U2=63.5V, U3=54.05V). Steady-state percentage differential element will operate.

5.

Change the setting [87B.VCE.3U0_Set] as 8V.

12.5.3.4 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection All relevant settings can be configured temporarily as following for easier test. (Just for reference) 50DZ Settings BC.50DZ.I_Set

0.1A

BC.50DZ.t_Op

0.15s

All relevant binary inputs can be connected as follows.

[BC1.BI_52b]

0401

Opto+

0702

[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]

0705

[Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]

0701

Opto+

PCS-915

Test source

0409



BC breaker is closed

1.

Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing the binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and set feeder 02 connecting to BB2 through energizing binary input [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2].

2.

Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT the opposite polarity in series, and then connect CT of feeder 02 with reverse polarity in series. Then connect binary output contact of tripping BB2 and three phases normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC breaker [BC1.BI_52b] to test source. Connect binary output contact of tripping BB1 and binary output contact of tripping feeder 02 to time meter (Refer to Figure 12.5-6).

12-16


12 Commissioning

I TEST1

A

1601 1603

Bus coupler

1605 1602 1604 1606

1607

Feeder 01

1608

Test source

PCS-915

1611

1610

CURRENT CIRCUIT

1609

1612

1613

1617 1614

Feeder 02

1615

1616 1618 1109

BO_Trp1_Fdr02

1105

BO_Trp1_Fdr01

PCS-915

1110

1106

Start Timer Stop

Figure 12.5-6 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is closed)

3.

Please set two stages of test source and change from stage 1 to stage 2 to simulate to trip BC breaker and to make dead zone fault protection operate. (For example STAGE 1:

I TEST1  20 0 A and de-energize three phases normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC breaker; STAGE 2: I TEST1  20 A and energize three phases normally closed auxiliary 0

contacts of BC breaker) 4.

Use binary output contact of tripping BB2 (feeder 02 will be tripped) as a triggering signal to change the state from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2.

5.

Start test from STAGE 1. BBP should operate to trip BC breaker and BB2. The binary output contact of tripping BB2 (feeder 02 will be tripped) will close and control the test source to change the state from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, and then BBP will trip BB1 with a time delay for dead zone fault protection operates to make BC current be excluded from discriminating zone differential current. “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED will be turned on.



BC breaker is open


12-17 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

1.

Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1].

2.

Energize normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC breaker [BC1.BI_52b].

3.

Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT with the opposite polarity in series, and connect VTs of BB1 and BB2. (Refer to Figure 12.5-7)

ITEST1

A

1601 1603

Bus coupler

1605 1602 1604 1606

1609

1610

PCS-915

1608

Feeder 01

1611

1612 V UTEST1

2809 2811

BB1 Voltage

2807

CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CIRCUIT

1607 Test source

2808

2815 2817

BB2 Voltage

2813

2814

Figure 12.5-7 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is open)

4.

Please set two stages of test source and change from stage 1 to stage 2 to make dead zone protection operate. (For example STAGE 1: ITEST1  000 A , UTEST1  4000 V ; STAGE 2:

ITEST1  200 A , UTEST1  000 V ). 5.

Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BBP should operate to trip BC breaker and BB1 with “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED turned on.

12.5.3.5 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection All relevant settings can be configured temporarily as following for easier test. (Just for reference)

12-18


12 Commissioning 50DZ Settings Fdr.50DZ.I_Set

0.1A

Fdr.50DZ.t_Op

0.02s

Bay2.50DZ.En

1

Function Links 50DZ.Link

1


[50DZ.BI_En]

0411

[Fdr01.BI_52b]

0401

Opto+

0516

[Fdr01.BI_Cls]

0501

Opto+

0702

[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]

0701

Opto+

PCS-915

Test source

0408

Energize the binary input [50DZ.BI_En] 

Feeder DZP

1.


2.

Energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker of feeder 01 [Fdr01.BI_52b].

3.

Inject a current (0.2 IN) to three phases of this feeder.

A

A

ITEST2 ITEST3

1609 1611

1610

Feeder 01

1608

CURRENT CIRCUIT

A

1607

PCS-915

Test Source

ITEST1

1612

4.

DZP will operate and send transfer trip signal to the remote end with a time delay of 20ms.



Manual Closing Contact

1.



12-19 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

2.

Energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker of feeder 01 [Fdr01.BI_52b].

3.

Energize closing binary input [Fdr01.BI_Cls] for 50ms and inject a current (0.2IN) to any phase of this feeder for 500ms. DZP will not operate.

4.

If the binary input [Fdr01.BI_Cls] is energized for longer than 10 seconds, an alarm [Fdr01.Alm_Cls] will be issued and feeder DZP will still be blocked.



Disable Feeder DZP

1.


2.

At the beginning, inject three-phase current to any feeder, which is slightly greater than 0.04 IN (for example, 0.05 IN) and energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker of feeder 01 [Fdr01.BI_52b].

3.

After an alarm [Fdr01.Alm_52b] is issued. When feeder current increases to over 0.2 IN, feeder DZP will not operate.

12.5.3.6 BC/BS SOTF Protection SOTF Settings 50SOTF.I_Set

1A

Bay1.50SOTF.En

1

Function Links 50SOTF.Link

1


[50SOTF.BI_En]

0409

[BC1.BI_52b]

0401

Opto+

PCS-915

Test source

0405

Check BC SOTF protection 1.

Energize the binary input [50SOTF.BI_En].

2.

Connect the BC CT, and connect binary input [BC1.BI_52b]. (Refer to Figure 12.5-8)

12-20


12 Commissioning

ITEST1

A

1601

1604

CURRENT CIRCUIT

1602

PCS-915

1605

BUS COUPLER

1603

Test source

1606 Start 1101 Stop

BO_Trp1_BC1

1102

PCS-915

Timer

Figure 12.5-8 BC SOTF protection test

3.

Injecting a current ITEST1  0.950 0 A , BC SOTF protection should not operate. If injecting a current ITEST1  1.050 0 A , BC SOTF protection should operate to trip BC breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on. If injecting a current I TEST1  20 A , BC SOTF protection should operate to trip BC 0

breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of SOTF protection operating to trip BC. BC SOTF protection is only enabled for 300ms if any of the following conditions satisfied, users must inject the current within 300ms if any of the following conditions satisfied, or BC SOTF protection should not operate.  The position status of BC/BS breaker changes from open to closed.  BC current changes from being smaller than 0.04IN to being larger than 0.04IN.  Both connected busbars are in service (when busbar phase voltage is greater than 0.3U N or current of any connected bay is larger than 0.04IN, the busbar is thought as be in service). 12.5.3.7 Overcurrent Protection Takes definite-time overcurrent protection of BC as an example. OC Settings Bay1.50/51P.I_Set

1A

Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set

1A

Bay1.50/51P.t_Op

0.5s

Bay1.50/51G.t_Op

0.5s

Bay1.50/51P.Opt_Curve

0


12-21 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning Bay1.50/51G.Opt_Curve

0

Bay1.50/51P.En

1

Bay1.50/51G.En Function Link 50/51.Link

1


0406

[50/51.BI_En]

0401

Opto+

PCS-915

Test source

Energize binary input [50/51.BI_En]. Connect the BC CT and binary output contact of tripping BC to time meter. (For example Figure 12.5-9)

ITEST1

A

Test source

1601

1602 1604

Bus coupler

PCS-915

1605

CURRENT CIRCUIT

1603

1606 Start Timer BO_Trp1_BC1

1102

PCS-915

1101 Stop

Figure 12.5-9 BC OC protection test



Check the setting [Bay1.50/51P.I_Set]=1A

Change the setting [Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set]=4A 1.

Inject a current ITEST1  0.950 0 A and BC phase overcurrent protection will not operate.

2.

Inject a current ITEST1  1.050 0 A and BC phase overcurrent protection operates to trip BC breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on.

3.

Inject a current I TEST1  20 A and BC phase overcurrent protection operates to trip BC 0

breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of phase 12-22


12 Commissioning

overcurrent protection operating to trip BC. 4.

After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set] =1A



Check the setting [Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set]=1A

Change the setting [Bay1.50/51P.I_Set]=4A 1.

Inject a current ITEST1  0.950 0 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection should not operate.

2.

Inject a current ITEST1  1.050 0 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection should operate to trip BC breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on.

3.

Inject a current I TEST1  20 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates to 0

trip BC breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating to trip BC. 4.

After finishing the test, change the setting i.e. [Bay1.50/51P.I_Set] =1A

12.5.3.8 Pole Disagreement Protection Takes pole disagreement protection of BC as an example. PD Settings Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set

1A

Bay1.62PD.I2_Set

0.6A

Bay1.62PD.t_Op

1s

Bay1.62PD.En

1

Function Links 62PD.Link

1


[62PD.BI_En]

0401

Opto+

0502

[BC1.62PD.BI_PD]

0501

Opto+

PCS-915

Test source

0407

Energize the binary inputs [62PD.BI_En] and [BC1.62PD.BI_PD]. 

Check settings [Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set]=1A

Change the setting [Bay1.62PD.I2_Set]=5A PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

12-23 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

1.

Connect BC CT to test source. Connect binary output contact of BC protection operating to a time meter (Refer to Figure 12.5-10).

ITEST1 A

1601 1603

1604

Bus coupler

1602

PCS-915

1605

CURRENT CIRCUIT

Test source

1606 Start Timer BO_Trp1_BC1

1102

PCS-915

1101

Stop

Figure 12.5-10 BC pole disagreement protection test

2.

Inject a current ITEST1  0.950 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay [Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC does not operate.

3.

Inject a current ITEST1  1.050 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay [Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC TRIP” LED should be turned on.

4.

Inject a current

I TEST1  20 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay

[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC TRIP” LED should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of PD protection operating to trip BC. 5.

After finishing the test, please change the setting [Bay1.62PD.I2_Set]=1A.



Check the setting i.e. [Bay1.62PD.I2_Set]=1A

Change the setting [Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set]=5A 1.

Connect BC CT.

2.

Inject a current I TEST1  0.6 * 3 * 0.95  1.710 A with persisting time longer than the 0

time delay [Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection does not operate. 3.

Inject a current I TEST1  1.89 0 A and persisting time is longer than the time delay 0

[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection should operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC TRIP” LED should be turned on.

12-24


12 Commissioning

4.

Inject a current

I TEST1  3.60 0 A

and persisting time is longer than the time delay

[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection should operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC TRIP” LED should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of PD protection operating to trip BC. 5.

After finishing the test, please change the setting [Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set]=0.6A.

6.

After finishing all test of BC PD protection, de-energize the two binary inputs [62PD.BI_En] and [BC1.62PD.BI_PD].

12.5.3.9 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection BC BFP Settings BC.50BF.I_Set

1A

BC.50BF.t_TrpBB

0.5s

OC Settings 50/51.En_Init50BF

1

PD Settings 62PD.En_Init50BF

1


[87B.BI_En]

0406

[50/51.BI_En]

0407

[62PD.BI_En]

0401

Opto+

0502

[BC1.62PD.BI_PD]

0501

Opto+

0602

[BC1.BI_BFI]

0603

[BC1.BI_ChkBFI]

0601

Opto+

0702

[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]

0705

[Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]

0701

Opto+

PCS-915

Test source

0403

The connection is shown as follows.


12-25 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

ITEST1 A

1601 1603

1604

Bus coupler

1602

PCS-915

1605

CURRENT CIRCUIT

Test source

1606 Start Timer BO_Trp1_Fdr02

1110

PCS-915

1109

Stop

Figure 12.5-11 BC BFP test



Check external binary input initiating BC BFP

1.

Connect BC CT to test source

2.

STAGE 1: ITEST1  00 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and [BC1.BI_ChkBFI] are energized; STAGE 2:

I TEST1  0.950 0 A

and binary inputs

[BC1.BI_BFI] and

[BC1.BI_ChkBFI] are energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, BC BFP will not operate. 3.

STAGE 1: ITEST1  00 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and [BC1.BI_ChkBFI] are energized; STAGE

2:

I TEST1  1.05 0 0 A

and binary inputs

[BC1.BI_BFI] and

[BC1.BI_ChkBFI] are energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, BC BFP operates to trip BB1 and BB2. “BFP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED should be turned on. 4.

STAGE 1: ITEST1  00 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and [BC1.BI_ChkBFI] are energized; STAGE 2: ITEST1  20 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and [BC1.BI_ChkBFI] are energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2. “BFP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of BC BFP operating to trip BB2.



Check BBP initiating BC BFP

Change the setting [87B.En]=1, [87B.Link]=1 Energize the function binary input [87B.BI_En] 12-26


12 Commissioning

1.


2.

Simulating an internal fault on BB1 (please refer to Section 12.5.3.3).

3.

Inject a current ITEST1  20 0 A and the persisting time is longer than the setting [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].

4.

BBP protection should operate to trip BB1 and BC breaker. “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED will be turned on first. Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2, and “BFP TRIP” LED will be turned on.

5.

After finishing the test, change the setting [87B.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input [87B.BI_En].



Check OC protection initiating BC BFP

Change the two settings [Bay1.50/51P.En]=1, [50/51.Link]=1 Energize the binary input [50/51.BI_En] 1.


2.

Simulating an internal fault to make OC protection of BC operates (please refer to Section 12.5.3.7).

3.

Inject a current ITEST1  20 0 A and the persisting time is longer than the setting [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].

4.

OC protection of BC will operate to trip BC breaker. “MISC TRIP” LED will be turned on first. Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2, and “BFP TRIP” LED will be turned on.

5.

After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay1.50/51.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input [50/51.BI_En].



Check PD protection initiating BC BFP

Change the two settings [Bay1.62PD.En]=1, [62PD.Link]=1 Energize the binary input [62PD.BI_En] 1.


2.

Simulating an internal fault to make PD protection of BC operates (please refer to Section 12.5.3.8).

3.

Inject a current ITEST1  20 0 A and the persisting time is longer than the setting


12-27 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]. 4.

PD protection of BC will operate to trip BC breaker. “MISC TRIP” LED will be turned on first. Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2, and “BFP TRIP” LED will be turned on.

5.

After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay1.62PD.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input [62PD.BI_En].

12.5.3.10 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection Fdr BFP Settings 50BF.t_ReTrp

0.15s

50BF.t_TrpBC

0.25s

50BF.t_TrpBB

0.35s

50BF.VCE.U_Set

30V

50BF.VCE.3U0_Set

8V

50BF.VCE.U2_Set

3V

Bay2.50BF.I_Set

1.5A

Bay2.50BF.3I0_Set

1A

Bay2.50BF.I2_Set

1A

Bay2.50BF.En_3I0

0

Bay2.50BF.En_I2

0

50BF.En_Current_Ctrl

0

Bay2.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE

0

50BF.En

1

50BF.VCE.En

1

50BF.En_ReTrp

1

OC Settings 50/51.En_Init50BF

1

PD Settings 62PD.En_Init50BF

1

Function Links 50BF.Link

1


12-28


12 Commissioning

[50BF.BI_En]

0403

[87B.BI_En]

0406

[50/51.BI_En]

0407

[62PD.BI_En]

0401

Opto+

0503

[Fdr01.62PD.BI_PD]

0501

Opto+

0604

[Fdr01.BI_BFI]

0605

[50BF.BI_RlsVCE]

0601

Opto+

0702

[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]

0704

[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]

0701

Opto+

PCS-915

Test source

0402

Energize the binary input [50BF.BI_En] Set feeder 01 and feeder 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary inputs [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1]. Connect the VT of BB1 and CT of feeder 01 to test source (Refer to Figure 12.5-12).


12-29 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

UTEST1 UTEST2

V

V

V 2807 2809 2811 2808 2810 2812

1607

A

1611 1608

Feeder 01

1609

Test source

PCS-915

ITEST1

1610

CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CIRCUIT

Busbar No.1

UTEST3

1612

Timer

Start t2

1101

Stop

BO_Trp1_BC1

1102 Start 1105 Stop

BO_Trp1_Fdr01

1106

PCS-915

t1

Start t3

1109

Stop

BO_Trp1_Fdr02

1110

Figure 12.5-12 BFP test



Check external binary input initiating BFP

1.

0 STAGE 1: ITEST1  00 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is de-energized; STAGE 2:

I TEST1  1.425 0 0 A

and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. Persisting time of

STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP will not operate. 2.


I TEST1  1.575 0 0 A

and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. Persisting time of

STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP operates to re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” will be turned on. 3.


12-30


12 Commissioning

I TEST1  30 0 A

and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. Persisting time of STAGE 1

and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP operates to re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” will be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of feeder BFP operating to re-trip feeder 01 (t1), trip BC breaker (t2) and trip BB1 (t2). 

Check BBP initiating BFP

Change the two settings [87B.En]=1, [87B.Link]=1 Energize the binary input [87B.BI_En] 1.

Simulating an internal fault on BB1.

2.

Inject a current I TEST1  30 A and the persisting time is set as 1s.

3.

BBP protection should operate to trip BB1 and BC breaker. “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED will be turned on first. Then feeder BFP operates to re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP TRIP” LED will be turned on.

4.

After finishing the test, change the setting [87B.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input [87B.BI_En].



Check OC protection initiating BFP

0

Change the two settings [Bay2.50/51P.En]=1 and [50/51.Link]=1 Energize the binary input [50/51.BI_En] 1.

Simulating an internal fault to make OC protection of feeder 01 operates (please refer to Section 12.5.3.7).

2.


3.

OC protection of feeder 01 will operate to trip feeder 01 breaker. Then feeder BFP operates to re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP TRIP” LED will be turned on.

4.

After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay2.50/51P.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input [50/51.BI_En].



Check PD protection initiating BFP

0

Change the two settings [Bay2.62PD.En]=1 and [62PD.Link]=1 Energize the binary input [62PD.BI_En] 1.

Simulating an internal fault to make PD protection of feeder 01 operates (please refer to Section 12.5.3.8).


12-31 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

2.


3.

PD protection of feeder 01 will operate to trip feeder 01 breaker. Then feeder BFP operates to re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP TRIP” LED will be turned on.

4.

After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay2.62PD.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input [62PD.BI_En].



Check VCE of BFP



Check Phase Voltage

1.

Set

0

three

stages:

STAGE1:

UTEST1  63.50 0 V

UTEST2  63.5  120 0 V

,

UTEST3  63.5120 0 V , ITEST1  00 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is de-energized; STAGE2: U TEST1  31.50 V , U TEST2  31.5  120 V , U TEST3  31.5 120 V , 0

I TEST1  2.50 0 A

and

0

binary

input

0

[Fdr01.BI_BFI]

is

energized;

STAGE3: U TEST1  28.50 V , U TEST2  28.5   120 V , U TEST3  28.5 120 V , 0

0

0

ITEST1  2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. 2.

The persisting time of STAGE 1, STAGE 2 and STAGE 3 are set as 1s.

3.

Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BFP will not operate. Sequentially test from STAGE 2 to STAGE 3. BFP operates.



Check Residual Voltage

Change the setting [50BF.VCE.U2_Set] as 10V 1.


2.

Set

three

stages:

STAGE1:

UTEST1  63.50 0 V

UTEST2  63.5  120 0 V

,


I TEST1  2.50 0 A U TEST1  63.50 0 V

and ,

0

binary

input

0

[Fdr01.BI_BFI]

U TEST2  63.5   120 0 V

,

is

energized;

STAGE3:

U TEST3  55.1120 0 V

,

ITEST1  2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. 12-32


12 Commissioning

3.


4.


5.

Change the setting [50BF.VCE.U2_Set] as 3V.



Check Negative-sequence Voltage

Change the setting [50BF.VCE.3U0_Set] as 20V. 1.


2.

Set

three

stages:

STAGE1:

UTEST1  63.50 0 V

UTEST2  63.5  120 0 V

,


I TEST1  2.50 0 A

and

U TEST1  63.50 0 V ,

0

0

binary

input

[Fdr01.BI_BFI]

U TEST2  63.5   120 0 V ,

is

energized;

STAGE3:

U TEST3  54.05 120 0 V ,

ITEST1  2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. 3.


4.


5.

Change the setting [50BF.VCE.3U0_Set] as 8V.



Check external binary input [50BF.BI_RlsVCE] releasing the VCE of BFP

Change the logic setting [Bay2.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] as “1”. 1.

De-energize the binary input [50BF.BI_RlsVCE].

2.

Set

two

stages:

STAGE1:

UTEST1  63.50 0 V

,

UTEST2  63.5  120 0 V

UTEST3  63.5120 0 V , ITEST1  00 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is de-energized; STAGE2: UTEST1  63.50 0 V , UTEST2  63.5  120 0 V , UTEST3  63.5120 0 V ,

ITESY1  2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. 3.

The persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s.

4.

Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BFP should not operate.


12-33 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

5.

Energize the binary input [50BF.BI_RlsVCE] and repeat the above test, BFP will operate.

12.5.4 Print Fault Report In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows. 1) Trip event report 2) Binary input when protection devices start 3) Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start 4) Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE 5) The setting value when the protection device trips

12.5.5 On-load Checks The objectives of the on-load checks are: 

Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.



Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).



Check the polarity of each current transformer.

However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the tenderization of the plant being protected. Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has been removed to allow testing. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage transformer wiring.

12.5.6 Final Checks After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Ensure that the protection has been restored to service. If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.

12-34


12 Commissioning

Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared and LED’s has been reset before leaving the protection.


12-35 Date: 2014-07-02

12 Commissioning

12-36


13 Maintenance

13 Maintenance Table of Contents 13 Maintenance .................................................................................. 13-a 13.1 Appearance Check ...................................................................................... 13-1 13.2 Failure Tracing and Repair ......................................................................... 13-1 13.3 Replace Failed Modules ............................................................................. 13-2 13.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 13-3 13.5 Storage ......................................................................................................... 13-3


13-a Date: 2013-12-13

13 Maintenance

13-b


13 Maintenance

This device is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and signal processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output relays are hermetically sealed. Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are not required. Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.

13.1 Appearance Check 1.

The device case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly fixed in the case. Device terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel with very good feeling can be operated flexibly.

2.

It is only allowed to plug or withdraw device board when the supply is reliably switched off. Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary system is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the device board when it is unnecessary.

3.

Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual inline components must be well plugged.

13.2 Failure Tracing and Repair Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing. When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record. Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the “Superv State” screen on the LCD. When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following: 1. Test circuit connections are correct 2.

Modules are securely inserted in position

3.

Correct DC power voltage is applied

4.

Correct AC inputs are applied

5.

Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual


13-1 Date: 2013-12-13

13 Maintenance

13.3 Replace Failed Modules WARNING! Module can ONLY be replaced while the device power supply is switched off. ONLY appropriately trained and qualified personnel can perform the replacement by strictly observing the precautions against electrostatic discharge. WARNING! Five seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. CAUTION! Take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wristband and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat when handling a module. Otherwise, electronic components could be damaged. CAUTION! Check the device configuration after a replacement of module. Unintended operation of device may occur. If the failure is identified to be in the device module and the user has spare modules, the user can recover the device by replacing the failed modules. Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is not recommended. Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, MON, BI, BO, etc.) and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the MON module replaced should have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have the same ratings. The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in LCD menu “Information”->“Version Info”. 1)

Replacing a module 

Switch off the DC power supply



Disconnect the trip outputs



Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs



Unscrew the module connector



Unplug the connector from the target module.

13-2


13 Maintenance

2)



Unscrew the module.



Pull out the module



Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.



After replacing the MON module, input the application-specific setting values again.

Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel) 

Open the device front panel



Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.



Detach the HMI module from the device



Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.

13.4 Cleaning Before cleaning the device, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.

13.5 Storage The spare device or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard 60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40°C to +70°C, but the temperature of from 0°C to +40°C is recommended for long-term storage.


13-3 Date: 2013-12-13

13 Maintenance

13-4


14 Decommissioning and Disposal

14 Decommissioning and Disposal Table of Contents 14 Decommissioning and Disposal ................................................. 14-a 14.1 Decommissioning ....................................................................................... 14-1 14.2 Disposal ....................................................................................................... 14-1


14-a Date: 2013-12-13


14-b



14.1 Decommissioning DANGER! Switch OFF the circuit breaker for primary CTs and VTs BEFORE disconnecting the cables of AI module. WARNING! Switch OFF the external miniature circuit breaker of device power supply BEFORE disconnecting the power supply cable connected to the PWR module. WARNING! KEEP an adequate safety distance to live parts of the power substation. 1.

Switching off To switch off this device, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.

2.

Disconnecting cables Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational department.

3.

Dismantling The device rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may also be removed.

14.2 Disposal NOTICE! Strictly observe all local and national laws and regulations when disposing the device.


14-1 Date: 2013-12-13


14-2


15 Manual Version History

15 Manual Version History In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been modified. Manual version and modification history records Manual Version

Software

Source

New

Version

R1.00

R1.00

Date 2012-12-25

Description of change Form the original manual. Symbol corresponding relationship are added in the end of the preface;

R1.00

R1.01

R1.00

2013-02-06

Operation characteristic of DPFC percentage restraint differential element in Figure 3.3-3 is modified; “Logic Links State” submenu are added for the menu “Status”; MMS communication network deployment are modified.

R1.01

R1.02

R1.00

2013-07-04

Mechnical dimension of the devices are changed Four restraint coefficients for steady-state busbar differential

R1.02

R1.03

R1.00

2013-09-25

protection are added; Three

logic

settings

[En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS],

[En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] and [87B.En_CTS_Blk] are added. Section 3.3 are added and Section 3.4 are modified; Dead zone fault protection settings are added; R1.03

R2.00

R1.00

2013-12-13

Many description of several protective functions are modified; One device setting [En_Volt_BB] is added; Many communication settings are added. All the contents related to digital substation are modified;

R2.00

R2.10

R1.00

2014-07-02

Some contents of Chapter 3 are modified; Almost all the figures in Chapter 9 are changed.

R2.10

R2.11

R1.00

2014-09-20

The basic information configuration item “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is deleted Phase-segregated CT circuit failure alarm signals are added;

R2.11

R2.12

R1.10

2015-03-07

Disconnector position configuration settings are added; DNP3.0 protocol related configuration and communication settings are added.

R2.12

R2.13

R1.10

2015-07-13

The MON module NR1101D is replaced by NR1101F.


15-1 Date: 2015-07-13

15 Manual Version History

15-2


PCS-915IC_X_Centralized_Busbar_Protection_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X_R2.13.pdf

Recommend Documents